JP2021045218A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To improve the amusement of a game.SOLUTION: A game machine has display means that can display various images. The game machine can execute first performance to display, on the display means, a selection image that allows selecting one of a plurality of performance modes, but when predetermined conditions are met, the game machine stops the selection image from being displayed on the display means by the first performance. The first performance produces a display mode in which the names of the plurality of performance modes are arranged like a reel and displayed rotationally, and the selected one performance mode is disposed on the nearest side to the player.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 95

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Conventionally, there is known a game machine capable of performing a display effect using a display device when a game ball wins a prize at the start port (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

In such a game machine, it is possible to perform a display effect using a character image, a pattern, or the like.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-202930 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-198339 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-182376

However, even with the above-mentioned game machines, there is still room for improvement in the technology for improving the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to improve the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made to solve at least a part of the above-mentioned problems, and can be realized as the following application example. It should be noted that the reference numerals and supplementary explanations in parentheses in this column indicate the correspondence with the embodiments described later in order to assist the understanding of the present invention, and do not limit the present invention in any way. ..

[Application example 1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying various images.
A first effect of displaying a selected image capable of selecting one of the plurality of effect modes on the display means, and a first effect.
At least one of the second effect of displaying the special image on the display means can be executed.
Based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, it is possible to prevent the display of the selected image on the display means by the first effect and display the special image on the display means by the second effect.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Application example 2]
The gaming machine described in Application Example 1
The first effect and the second effect can be performed in a specific period.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Application example 3]
The gaming machine according to the application example 1 or the application example 2.
Equipped with multiple operating means that can be operated by the player
One of the plurality of effect modes can be selected only when a specific operation means is operated among the plurality of operation means.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Application example 4]
The gaming machine according to any one of application examples 1 to 3.
When the special image is displayed on the display means based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the effect mode already selected in the first effect is maintained before the second effect is executed. ,
A game machine characterized by that.

[Application example 5]
The gaming machine according to any one of Application Examples 1 to 4.
The first effect is a display mode in which the names of the plurality of effect modes are arranged in a reel shape and rotated and displayed, and one selected effect mode is arranged on the foremost side.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Application example 6]
The gaming machine according to any one of application examples 1 to 5.
The predetermined condition includes a condition suggesting the degree of expectation of the occurrence of a gaming state that gives a profit to the player.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a front view of a game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the detail of the 2nd prize winning apparatus. It is an enlarged view of the display. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the main control board side of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the sub-control board side of a game machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the main ROM and the main RAM. It is a figure for demonstrating a sub ROM and a sub RAM. It is a figure for demonstrating various random numbers used in a game machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the special symbol hit detection table and the like. It is 1st figure for demonstrating the hit type determination table. It is a 2nd figure for demonstrating the hit type determination table. It is a figure for demonstrating the variation pattern determination table. It is a figure for demonstrating the ordinary symbol hit determination table and the like. It is a figure for demonstrating the electric chew opening pattern determination table. It is a figure for demonstrating the big prize opening opening pattern determination table. It is a flowchart of a main control main process. It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing on the main side. It is a flowchart of a start port sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of a normal operation process. It is a flowchart of special operation processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of a special symbol hit detection process. It is a 1st flowchart of a special symbol variation pattern selection process. It is the 2nd flowchart of the special symbol variation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of the process during special symbol change. It is a flowchart of a special symbol determination process. It is a flowchart of a game state management process. It is a flowchart of special electric accessory processing 1. It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. It is a figure for demonstrating the setting table of the time saving counter. It is the first flowchart of the special electric accessory processing 2. It is a 2nd flowchart of the special electric accessory processing 2. It is a flowchart of V opening / closing member control processing. It is a flowchart of V area sensor detection processing. It is a flowchart which shows the sub-control main process. It is a flowchart of the sub-side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of the received command analysis process. It is a flowchart of the variation effect start processing. It is a flowchart of the variation production end processing. It is a flowchart of the ending effect pattern determination process. It is a figure for demonstrating the mode status setting table. It is a figure for demonstrating the time saving effect scenario determination table. It is a figure for demonstrating the concrete content of the time saving production scenario. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the expected production of V. It is explanatory drawing which exemplifies the winning game production at the time of special drawing 2 winning. Special figure 2 It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the fluctuation effect at the time of lottery. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the countdown effect. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the one-time production of crying. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the movement of the 1st movable accessory 14 in the advancing direction. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the 2nd aspect of the 1st movable accessory 14. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the combination effect of the 1st movable accessory 14 and an image. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the rotation operation of the 1st movable accessory 14. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the 1st light emission mode of the 1st movable accessory 14. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the 2nd light emitting mode of the 1st movable accessory 14. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the 2nd aspect of the 2nd movable accessory 15. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the rotation operation of the 2nd movable accessory 15. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the 1st combination production of the 1st and 2nd movable accessory. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the 2nd combination production of the 1st and 2nd movable accessory. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the variation timing change effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the variation timing change effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the variation timing change effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the symbol direction change effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the symbol direction change effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the symbol direction change effect C. It is explanatory drawing which exemplifies the character symbol cooperation production A. It is explanatory drawing which exemplifies the character symbol cooperation production B. It is explanatory drawing which exemplifies the character symbol cooperation production C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the specific image symbol cooperation effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the specific image symbol cooperation effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the specific image symbol cooperation effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative pattern mode change effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the decorative pattern mode change effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative pattern mode change effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative pattern variation area effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative pattern variation area effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative pattern variation area effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the operation promotion effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the operation promotion effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the operation promotion effect C. It is explanatory drawing which exemplifies this announcement production A. It is explanatory drawing which exemplifies this announcement production B. It is explanatory drawing which exemplifies this announcement effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the operation part image display effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the operation part image display effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the operation part image display effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the appearance disappearance effect A of the effect button. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the appearance disappearance effect B of an effect button. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the appearance disappearance effect C of an effect button. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the winning notification effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the winning notification effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the winning notification effect C. It is explanatory drawing which exemplifies the effect A inside and outside the outer shell of a stereoscopic image. It is explanatory drawing which exemplifies the effect B inside and outside the outer shell of a stereoscopic image. It is explanatory drawing which exemplifies the effect C inside and outside the outer shell of a stereoscopic image. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the selection display prevention effect A of the effect mode. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the selection display prevention effect B of the effect mode. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the selection display prevention effect C of the effect mode. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the game ball image production A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the game ball image production B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the game ball image production C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the specific end face effect A of a stereoscopic image. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the specific end face effect B of a stereoscopic image. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the specific end face effect C of a stereoscopic image. It is explanatory drawing which exemplifies the combination production A of a movable accessory. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the combination production B of a movable accessory. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the union effect C of a movable accessory.

<First Embodiment>
1. 1. Structure of Game Machine Based on FIGS. 1 and 2, the structure of the game machine 1 as an embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the game machine 1. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing details of the second prize-winning device 36. In the following, the left-right direction of the game machine 1 will be described so as to match the left-right direction seen by the player facing the game machine 1. Further, the front direction of the game machine 1 will be described as a direction from the game machine 1 toward the player, and the rear direction of the game machine 1 will be described as a direction from the player toward the game machine 1.

The game machine 1 is a pachinko gaming machine that launches a game ball based on a player's firing operation, and when the game ball wins a prize in a specific winning device, pays a predetermined number of game balls to the player based on the winning. is there. The game machine 1 includes a game machine frame 50 and a game board 2, and the game board 2 is attached to the inside of the game machine frame 50. The game machine frame 50 includes a front frame (front frame portion) 53, an outer frame (base frame portion) forming an outer shell portion of the game machine, and an inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached inside the outer frame. I have. The front frame (front frame portion) 53 is a vertically rectangular unit arranged on the front side of the outer frame and the inner frame, and has a handle 60, a ball striking plate (upper plate) 61, and a surplus ball tray (lower plate). ) 62, an effect button 63, a sword member 64, a sword button 65, a frame lamp 66, a speaker 67, and a select button 68. An opening is formed in the center of the front frame 53, and the game area 3 of the game board 2 can be visually recognized through the opening.

The handle 60 is arranged at the lower end on the right side of the front frame 53, and launches the game ball with a firing intensity according to the rotation angle. The hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 61 is provided below the front frame 53 and stores game balls. The surplus ball receiving plate (lower plate) 62 is arranged below the hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 61, and stores game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply plate 61. The effect button 63 is an operation unit arranged in the vicinity of the hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 61, and is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of the effect executed as the game progresses. The sword member 64 is an operation unit that imitates the shape of a sword, and can be pushed downward by the player during a production or the like that is executed as the game progresses. The sword button 65 is an operation unit provided at the upper end portion of the sword member 64, that is, the end portion of the handle of the sword, and is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of production performed as the game progresses. To. The sword member 64 is configured to be capable of performing two different operations, a first operation of pushing the entire sword member 64 downward and a second operation of pressing the sword button 65 at the tip. The frame lamp 66 is arranged around the opening of the front frame 53, and emits light during a game or the like. The speakers 67 are arranged on the upper left and upper right of the front frame 53 to produce sound during a game or the like.

The game board 2 includes a game area 3, a rail member 4, a board lamp 5, an image display device 7, a first board movable body 14, a second board movable body 15, and an illumination panel (light guide plate) 18. , Fixed winning device (navel) 19, normal variable winning device (electric chew) 22, first gate (through chucker) 28, second gate (through chucker) 29, first big winning device (first attacker) ) 31, a second major winning device (second attacker) 36, a general winning opening (ordinary winning opening) 27, an out opening 16, and indicators 40.

The game area 3 is an area in which the game ball launched by the operation of the handle 60 flows down, and a plurality of game nails for guiding the game ball are projected. The rail member 4 is arranged at the left end of the game area 3 and guides the game ball launched by the operation of the handle 60 toward the upper side of the game area 3. The board lamp 5 is arranged on the back side of the game area 3, and irradiates light from the back side of the game area 3. Here, a part of the board lamp 5 is also provided inside each of the first board movable body 14 and the second board movable body 15, and the first board movable body 14 and the second board movable body 15 are provided. Is configured to be capable of producing light emission in a specific manner.

The image display device 7 is provided near the center of the game area 3 and includes a display screen 7a. The image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has an effect symbol display area in which the effect symbols (decorative symbols) 8L, 8C, 8R) are variably displayed (also referred to as variable display), and a hold image in which the hold images 9A and 9B are displayed. It has a display area and a hold digestion image display area on which the hold digestion image 9C is displayed. The hold images 9A and 9B are images representing hold, and are also called hold icons. The hold digestion image 9C is an image representing the hold, and is also referred to as a hold icon. The hold icon and the hold icon are collectively referred to as a hold icon.

The effect symbol display area includes three symbol display areas of "left", "middle", and "right". The left effect symbol 8L is displayed in the symbol display area on the left. The middle effect symbol 8C is displayed in the symbol display area inside. The right effect symbol 8R is displayed in the symbol display area on the right. The effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are composed of a plurality of symbols representing numbers from "1" to "9", for example. The variable display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, which will be described later. The image display device 7 has the first special symbol and the first special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b, which will be described later, depending on the combination of the effect symbols displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas. The result of the variable display of the second special symbol (the result of the big hit small hit lottery) can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

For example, when a big hit is won, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with doublet such as "777". If it is out of alignment, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed at a random number such as "637". This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game. The player can grasp the result of the big hit / small hit lottery by the first special symbol display 41a, the second special symbol display 41b, and the image display device 7. The position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed. Further, the variation display of the effect symbol may be a mode of scrolling in the vertical direction or another mode. Further, when a small hit is won, the effect symbol may be stopped and displayed at a predetermined chance such as "135", or the effect symbol may be stopped and displayed at a random number. What kind of combination of effect symbols is stopped and displayed according to each lottery result is not limited to the above, and can be arbitrarily set. Hereinafter, the effect of displaying the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is also referred to as "variable effect of the effect symbol" or simply "variable effect" and "variable display". In this decorative symbol variation effect, the effect in the period from the start of the special symbol variation to the final stop (also referred to as the special symbol variation period) is counted as one variation effect (one cycle variation effect). .. Therefore, even if the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped during the period from the start of fluctuation of the special symbol to the fixed stop, the effect of the temporary stop is included in the variation effect of the decorative symbol.

The image display device 7 can display on the display screen 7a a jackpot effect performed in parallel with the jackpot game (second special game), a demo effect for waiting for customers, and the like, in addition to the effect symbol variation effect. In the effect symbol variation effect, in addition to the effect symbol, an effect image such as a background image or a character image may be displayed. Further, the image display device 7 can indicate that the special symbol is changing or the lottery result of the special symbol in addition to the effect symbol (fourth symbol, not shown). May be displayed on the display screen 7a. The identification display (fourth symbol) may be displayed by a light emitter such as an LED provided in the game area 3.

The reserved image display area displays a first reserved display area for displaying the reserved image 9A according to the number of stored images of the first special figure reserved, which will be described later, and a reserved image 9B according to the number of stored images for the second special figure reserved, which will be described later. Includes a second hold display area. By displaying the reserved images 9A and 9B, the number of stored first special figure hold displayed on the first special figure hold indicator 43a, which will be described later, and the second special figure hold displayed on the second special figure hold indicator 43b. The number of memories of can be displayed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. The reserved digestion image display area includes a reserved digestion display area for displaying the reserved digestion image 9C. The hold digestion image 9C corresponds to the effect symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a, and depending on the display of the hold digestion image 9C, the first special figure hold or the second special figure hold. Can be displayed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the image is digested (“digestion of special figure hold” described later).

On the left and right sides of the image display device 7, a movable first board movable body 14 (also referred to as a first movable accessory 14), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided. The first movable accessory 14 is configured such that two semiring-shaped members arranged on the left and right sides can move in the left-right direction. The first movable accessory 14 is normally stationary at the retracted positions (FIG. 1) on the left and right sides of the image display device 7, and moves from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a so as to be close to each other (the first movable accessory 14 is stationary). It is possible to move forward) and stand still at the advance position in front of the display screen 7a. The first movable accessory 14 forms a ring-shaped decorative portion when the left and right members are united at the advanced position, and covers a part of the image display device 7.

On the upper side of the image display device 7, a movable second board movable body 15 (also referred to as a second movable accessory 15), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided. The second movable accessory 15 is configured such that a rectangular member (decorative portion) described as "OARO" can be moved in the vertical direction. The second movable accessory 15 is normally stationary at the retracted position (FIG. 1) above the image display device 7, and moves (advances) downward from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a to be displayed. It is possible to stand still at the advance position in front of the screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 covers a part of the image display device 7 when stopped at the advanced position.

A stage portion 11 is formed in the lower portion of the image display device 7. The stage portion 11 has a shape capable of guiding a game ball rolling on the upper surface of the stage portion 11 to the first starting port 20, which will be described later. A warp portion 12 is provided at the lower left of the center decoration body 10. The warp portion 12 includes an inlet portion into which the game ball flows in and an outlet portion in which the game ball flows out, and the game ball flowing in from the entrance portion is discharged from the outlet portion to the stage portion 11.

The illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is a transparent flat plate member attached to the central opening of the front frame 53, and the game area 3 of the game board 2 can be visually recognized through the illumination panel 18. That is, the illumination panel 18 is arranged in front of the image display device 7, and the image displayed on the image display device 7 is visible through the illumination panel 18. The illumination panel 18 is configured to be able to display a predetermined image on the main surface by irradiating the end surface with LED light. The illumination panel 18 is configured to be able to display a small number of types of images in a plurality of types of colors depending on the irradiation direction and color of the LED light.

The fixed winning device (navel) 19 is arranged below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, and includes a first starting opening (first starting winning opening, first ball entry opening, fixed starting opening) 20. The winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 is an opportunity for the lottery of the first special symbol (big hit small hit lottery). In other words, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 is an opportunity for acquiring a random number or the like per special symbol and determining a big hit.

The ordinary variable winning device (electric chew) 22 is arranged below the first starting opening 20 in the game area 3, and includes a second starting opening (second starting winning opening, second entry opening, variable starting opening) 21. ing. The winning of the game ball to the second starting port 21 is an opportunity for the second special symbol lottery (big hit small hit lottery). The electric chew 22 includes a movable member 23 that can move forward and backward, and opens and closes the second starting port 21 by the operation of the movable member 23. The movable member 23 is driven by the electric chew solenoid 24. A game ball can enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in the open state (advanced state). The electric chew 22 may be easier to enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in the open state than when it is in the closed state (retracted state). 2 It may be possible to enter the ball into the starting port 21.

The first gate (through chucker) 28 is arranged on the right side of the image display device 7 in the game area 3, and the second gate (through chucker) 29 is arranged on the left side of the image display device 7 in the game area 3. Each is configured so that the game ball can pass through. The passage of the game ball through the gates (the first gate 28 and the second gate 29) is an opportunity for a normal symbol lottery to decide whether or not to open the electric chew 22. In other words, the passage of the game ball to the gates 28 and 29 is an opportunity for obtaining a random number per normal symbol and determining the hit.

Here, the "special symbol lottery" means that when a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, a random number for determining a special symbol is acquired, and the acquired random number is predetermined. It refers to a process of determining whether or not a jackpot is a big hit and whether or not it is a small hit by comparing it with a value corresponding to a "big hit" or a "small hit". The lottery results of the "big hit" and the "small hit" are not immediately notified to the player, and the special symbol is variablely displayed on the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b, which will be described later. Then, when the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), and the player is notified of the lottery result. In the image display device 7, a symbol matching game is played in which the effect symbols are variablely displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, and the symbol matching game more effectively notifies the player of the lottery result of the big hit.

Further, the "ordinary symbol lottery" means that when the game ball passes through the first gate 28 or the second gate 29, a random number for determining the ordinary symbol is acquired, and the acquired random number is used as a predetermined "hit". It means a process of determining whether or not a hit is made by comparing with a value corresponding to "." Regarding the lottery result of this ordinary symbol, the lottery result is not immediately notified when the game ball passes through the first gate 28 or the second gate 29, and the ordinary symbol display 42 described later displays the variation of the ordinary symbol. Is performed, and when a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is confirmed (lit or turned off), and the player is notified of the lottery result.

The first big winning device (first attacker, first special variable winning device) 31 is arranged below the first gate 28 in the game area 3, and includes the first big winning opening (first special winning opening) 30. There is. The first large winning opening 30 includes an opening / closing member (first special winning opening opening / closing member) 32 that allows or hinders the acceptance of game balls by a swing-type opening / closing operation. The opening / closing member 32 is driven by the first large winning opening solenoid 33. A game ball can enter the first large winning opening 30 when the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state.

The second big winning device (second attacker, second special variable winning device) 36 is arranged below the first big winning opening 30 in the game area 3, and the second big winning opening (second special winning opening) 35 is placed. I have. The second large winning opening 35 includes an opening / closing member (second special winning opening opening / closing member, movable member) 37 that hinders or allows acceptance of a game ball by a shutter-type opening / closing operation. The opening / closing member 37 is driven by the second large winning opening solenoid 38. The second large winning opening 35 allows a game ball to enter when the opening / closing member 37 is in the open state.

The second grand prize device 36 internally includes a V region (specific region) 39, a V region sensor 39a, a non-V region (non-specific region) 70, a non-V region sensor 70a, and a second grand prize opening sensor. It includes 35a, a V opening / closing member 71, and a V opening / closing member solenoid 73. The V region (specific region) 39 and the non-V region (non-specific region) 70 are configured as regions inside the second prize winning device 36 through which a game ball that has passed through the second prize opening 35 can pass. .. The second large winning opening sensor 35a is arranged upstream of the V region 39 and the non-V region 70, and detects the winning of the game ball into the second large winning opening 35. The V region sensor 39a is arranged in the V region 39 and detects the passage of the game ball into the V region 39. The non-V region sensor 70a is arranged in the non-V region 70 and detects the passage of the game ball into the non-V region 70. The V opening / closing member 71 distributes the game ball that has passed through the second special winning opening 35 to either the V region 39 or the non-V region 70. The V opening / closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening / closing member 71. The V opening / closing member 71 is configured to rotate (clockwise and counterclockwise with respect to the game board 2), and when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is energized, the V opening / closing member 71 rotates clockwise from the origin position to V the game ball. It is in the first state (rotational state) of distributing to the region 39, and is in the second state (stopped state) of distributing the game ball to the non-V area 70 located at the origin when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is not energized. The V opening / closing member 71 is not limited to the rotational movement, and may have a function of distributing the game ball that has passed through the first large winning opening 30 to either the V region 39 or the non-V region 70. It may be configured to move in the left-right direction with respect to the game board 2. That is, when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is energized, the game ball is distributed to the V region 39 (first state), and when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, the game ball is distributed to the non-V region 70. (Second state) may be configured.

FIG. 2A shows a state in which the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is energized. When the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is energized, the V opening / closing member 71 is in a state of allowing the game ball to pass through the V region 39 (first state). When the V opening / closing member 71 is in the first state, the game ball that has won the second special winning opening 35 passes through the V region 39 after passing through the second special winning opening sensor 35a (FIG. 2A). Route A). The route of this game ball is called the "first route". FIG. 2B shows a state in which the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is not energized. When the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, the V opening / closing member 71 is in a state of hindering the passage of the game ball into the V region 39 (second state). When the V opening / closing member 71 is in the second state, the game ball that has won the second special winning opening 35 passes through the second special winning opening sensor 35a and then rolls on the upper surface of the V opening / closing member 71 to be non-V. It passes through the region 70 (Route B in FIG. 2B). The route of this game ball is called a "second route". In the game machine 1, the passage of the game ball into the V region 39 triggers the execution of the jackpot game (second special game) described later. That is, the winning or losing lottery of the big hit is also performed depending on whether or not the passing of the game ball into the V region 39 is successful. The jackpot won by the lottery of the first special symbol or the lottery of the second special symbol described above is also referred to as a "type 1 jackpot", and the jackpot won by passing the game ball through the V area 39 is also referred to as a "type 2 jackpot".

Returning to FIG. 1, two ordinary winning openings 27 are provided in the lower part of the game area 3. The number of ordinary winning openings 27 can be set arbitrarily. The out port 16 is provided in the lower part of the game area 3, and the game ball that has not won a prize in any of the winning ports is discharged to the outside of the game area 3. The indicators 40 are arranged at the lower right of the game board 2. Details of the indicators 40 will be described later.

The game area 3 includes a left game area 3A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and a right game area 3B on the right side. The method of firing the game ball so that the game ball flows down in the left game area 3A is called "left-handed hit". On the other hand, a method of launching a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the right game area 3B is called "right-handed". In the game machine 1, it is possible to aim for passing through the second gate 29 and winning a prize in the first starting port 20 by hitting left. On the other hand, it is configured so that it is possible to pass through the first gate 28 by hitting right, and to win a prize in the second starting port 21, the first large winning opening 30, and the second large winning opening 35.

FIG. 3 is an enlarged view of the display devices 40. The indicators 40 include a first special symbol indicator 41a, a second special symbol indicator 41b, a normal symbol indicator 42, a first special symbol hold indicator 43a, and a second special symbol hold indicator 43b. , The general figure hold indicator 44, and the like. The first special symbol display 41a variably displays the first special symbol. The second special symbol display 41b variably displays the second special symbol. The normal symbol display 42 variably displays the normal symbol. The first special figure hold indicator 43a displays the number of stored operations of the first special symbol display 41a (first special figure hold). The second special figure hold indicator 43b displays the number of stored operations of the second special symbol display 41b (second special figure hold). The normal figure hold indicator 44 displays the number of stored operations hold (normal figure hold) of the normal symbol display 42. The variable display of the first special symbol is performed when the game ball is won in the first starting port 20. The variable display of the second special symbol is performed when the game ball is won in the second starting port 21. Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are also collectively referred to as “special symbol”. Further, the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b are also collectively referred to as "special symbol display 41". Further, the first special figure holding indicator 43a and the second special drawing holding indicator 43b are also collectively referred to as "special figure holding indicator 43".

The special symbol display 41 displays a special symbol (identification information) in a variable manner (variable display) and then stops and displays a lottery based on winning a prize in the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 (lottery per special symbol). , Big hit and small hit lottery) will be notified. The stop-displayed special symbol (stop symbol, special symbol derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by a special symbol lottery. If the stop symbol is a special symbol (big hit symbol) in a predetermined jackpot stop mode, the first jackpot 30 will have an open pattern according to the type of jackpot symbol (type of winning jackpot) displayed as a stop. A big hit game (second special game) is performed. In addition, when the stop symbol is a special symbol (small hit symbol) in a predetermined small hit stop mode, an open pattern corresponding to the type of the small hit symbol displayed as stopped (the type of the winning small hit) is used. A small hit game (first special game) that opens the second big winning opening 35 is performed. The opening pattern of the large winning openings (first special winning opening 30 and second large winning opening 35) in the first special game or the second special game will be described later.

The special symbol display 41 is composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side, and displays a special symbol according to the result of a lottery per special symbol depending on the lighting mode thereof. For example, if you win a jackpot (one of the multiple types of jackpots described below), you will see "○○ ●● ○○ ●●" (○: lit, ●: off) from the left, 1 and 2. , The 5th and 6th LEDs are lit to display the jackpot symbol. Also, if you win a small hit (one of the multiple types of small hits described below), the 5th and 6th LEDs from the left will light up, such as "●●●● ○○ ●●". Display the small hit symbol. If there is a loss, a lost pattern such as "●●●●●●● ○" is displayed, in which only the LED on the far right is lit. A mode in which all the LEDs are turned off may be adopted as a lost symbol. Before the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the special symbol is variablely displayed (variable display) over a predetermined variable time. In the variable display mode, for example, each LED may be turned on so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode as long as each LED is not stopped and displayed (lighting display in a specific mode), and any lighting mode can be used. For example, in the variable display mode, all the LEDs may blink at the same time.

In the game machine 1, when a game ball is won (winning) in the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, various random numbers such as random numbers per special symbol acquired for the winning (numerical information). ) Is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 (FIG. 6). Specifically, if the winning is to the first starting port 20, it is stored in the first special figure holding storage area 85a (FIG. 6) as the first special figure holding, and if the winning is to the second starting port 21. , It is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b (FIG. 6) as the second special figure reservation. There is an upper limit to the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage area 85, and the upper limit values in the present embodiment are four for the first special figure reservation storage area 85a and the second special figure reservation storage area. 85b is one. The special figure hold stored in the special figure hold storage area 85 is digested when the special symbol can be variably displayed based on the special figure hold. "Digestion of special symbol hold" means to determine a random number or the like per special symbol corresponding to the special symbol hold and execute variable display of the special symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the game machine 1, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 cannot be performed immediately after the winning, that is, the variable display of the special symbol is executed. Even if a prize is won during the execution of a medium or special game (big hit game or small hit game), the right to the big hit small hit lottery for the prize can be reserved up to a predetermined number. The number of special figure hold indicators is displayed on the special figure hold indicator 43. The first special figure holding indicator 43a is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and the second special figure holding indicator 43b is composed of, for example, one LED. Each special figure hold indicator 43 displays the number of special figure hold by turning on the LED as many as the number of special figure hold.

The variable display of the normal symbol is performed when the game ball passes through the first gate 28 or the second gate 29. The normal symbol display 42 notifies the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the first gate 28 or the second gate 29 by displaying the normal symbol in a variable manner (variable display) and then stopping the display. The normal symbol that is stopped and displayed (normal symbol, normal symbol that is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one ordinary symbol selected from a plurality of types of ordinary symbols by the ordinary symbol lottery. When the normal symbol stop symbol is a predetermined specific normal symbol (ordinary symbol in a predetermined stop mode, that is, a normal hit symbol), an assist for opening the second starting port 21 with an opening pattern according to the current gaming state. The game is played. The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

The ordinary symbol display 42 is composed of three LEDs, and displays ordinary symbols according to the result of the ordinary symbol lottery depending on the lighting mode thereof. For example, when the lottery result is a win, a normal hit symbol in which the first and second LEDs from the left are lit is displayed, such as "○○ ●" (○: on, ●: off). If the lottery result is lost, a normal lost symbol such as "●● ○" in which only the right LED is lit is displayed. A mode in which all the LEDs are turned off may be adopted as a normal loss pattern. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner over a predetermined fluctuation time. In the variable display mode, for example, each LED may be turned on so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode as long as each LED is not stopped and displayed (lighting display in a specific mode), and any lighting mode can be used. For example, in the variable display mode, all the LEDs may blink at the same time.

In the game machine 1, when the game ball passes through the first gate 28 or the second gate 29, the value of the random number per normal symbol acquired for the passage is stored in the normal figure reservation storage area 86 (FIG. 6). It is temporarily stored as a normal figure hold. There is an upper limit to the number of normal figure reservations that can be stored in the normal figure reservation storage area 86, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is one. The normal figure hold stored in the normal figure hold storage area 86 is digested when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the normal figure hold becomes possible. The digestion of the normal symbol hold means to determine a random number per normal symbol corresponding to the normal symbol hold and execute variable display of the normal symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the game machine 1, when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after the passage, that is, the prize is won during the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol or the execution of the auxiliary game. Even if there is, the right of the ordinary symbol lottery for the passage can be reserved up to the predetermined number. The number of the normal figure hold is displayed on the normal figure hold indicator 44. The normal figure hold indicator 44 is composed of, for example, one LED, and displays the number of normal figure hold by turning on the LEDs as many as the number of the normal figure hold.

2. Electrical configuration of the game machine The electrical configuration of the game machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 and 5. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the main control board side of the game machine 1. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the sub-control board side of the game machine 1. The game machine 1 includes a main control board 80 (FIG. 4), a sub control board 90 (FIG. 5), an image control board 100 (FIG. 5), a lamp control board 107 (FIG. 5), and a voice control board 106 (FIG. 5). FIG. 5) and a payout control board 110 (FIG. 4) are provided. The main control board 80 is a game control board that controls game profits such as a big hit / small hit lottery and a transition of a game state, and constitutes a main control unit. The sub-control board 90 is an effect control board that controls the effect to be executed as the game progresses, and constitutes a sub-control unit together with the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the voice control board 106. The sub control unit can be configured as long as it includes at least the sub control board 90.

The main control board 80 includes a game control microcomputer 81 and an input / output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the main control board 80, and controls the progress of the game of the game machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a main ROM 83 that stores a program for controlling the progress of the game, a main RAM 84 that is used as a work memory, and a main CPU 82 that executes a program stored in the main ROM 83. Includes. The details of the data stored in the main ROM 83 and the details of the storage area provided in the main RAM 84 will be described later. The main ROM 83 may be configured as an external ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits / receives data to / from another board or the like via an input / output circuit (I / O port unit) 87. The input / output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81.

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via the input / output circuit 87 and the relay board 88. The main control board 80 inputs signals output from each sensor and outputs signals to each solenoid. As the sensors connected via the relay board 88, the first start port sensor 20a, the second start port sensor 21a, the first gate sensor 28a, the second gate sensor 29a, the first large winning opening sensor 30a, and the second Examples thereof include a large winning opening sensor 35a, a V region sensor 39a, a non-V region sensor 70a, and a normal winning opening sensor 27a. Examples of the solenoids connected via the relay board 88 include an electric chew solenoid 24, a first special winning opening solenoid 33, a second special winning opening solenoid 38, and a V opening / closing member solenoid 73. The first start port sensor 20a is provided inside the first start port 20, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the first start port 20. The second start port sensor 21a is provided inside the second start port 21, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second start port 21. The first gate sensor 28a is provided inside the first gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the first gate 28. The second gate sensor 29a is provided inside the second gate 29 and detects a game ball that has passed through the second gate 29. The first large winning opening sensor 30a is provided inside the first large winning opening 30, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the first large winning opening 30. The second large winning opening sensor 35a is provided inside the second large winning opening 35, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second large winning opening 35. The V region sensor 39a is provided in the V region 39 inside the second large winning opening 35, and detects a game ball that has passed through the V region 39. The non-V region sensor 70a is provided in the non-V region 70 inside the second large winning opening 35, and detects a game ball that has passed through the non-V region 70. The ordinary winning opening sensor 27a is provided inside the ordinary winning opening 27, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the ordinary winning opening 27. The electric chew solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the electric chew 22. The first prize-winning port solenoid 33 drives the opening / closing member 32 of the first prize-winning device 31. The second prize-winning port solenoid 38 drives the opening / closing member 37 of the second prize-winning device 36. The V-opening / closing member solenoid 73 drives the V-opening / closing member 71 of the second winning opening 35.

The indicators 40 are connected to the main control board 80 via the input / output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol hold indicator 43a, a second special symbol hold indicator 43b, and a normal symbol display. Display control for the display 44 is performed.

The payout control board 110 is connected to the main control board 80 via the input / output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110, and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. The prize ball payout device 120, the ball rental ball payout device 130, and the card unit 135 are connected to the payout control board 110, and the launch device 112 is connected via the launch control circuit 111. The prize ball payout device 120 pays out the prize balls. The payout control board 110 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 to pay out the prize balls based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 81. The prize balls to be paid out are detected by the prize ball sensor 122 for counting. The ball rental payout device 130 pays out the ball rental. The payout control board 110 drives the ball lending motor 131 of the ball lending device 130 to pay out the ball lending based on the signal from the card unit 135 connected to the game machine 1. The ball lending to be paid out is detected by the ball lending sensor 132 for counting. The card unit 135 is arranged adjacent to the game machine 1 and outputs information regarding ball lending based on information such as an inserted prepaid card. The launcher 112 includes a handle 60 (FIG. 1), a launch motor 113, a touch switch 114, and a launch volume 115. When the player operates the handle 60, the launcher 112 detects the contact of the handle 60 with the touch switch 114 and detects the amount of rotation of the handle 60 with the launch volume 115. Then, the launch motor 113 is driven so that the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the launch volume 115.

A sub control board 90 (FIG. 5) is connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection capable of only transmitting a signal from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90. That is, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) as a communication direction regulating means is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90.

The sub-control board 90 includes an effect control microcomputer 91 and an input / output circuit 95. The effect control microcomputer 91 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the sub control board 90, and controls the effect of the game of the game machine 1 according to a program. The effect control microcomputer 91 is a sub ROM 93 that stores a program or the like for controlling the effect as the game progresses, a sub RAM 94 that is used as a work memory, and a sub that executes a program stored in the sub ROM 93. The CPU 92 and the like are included. The details of the data stored in the sub ROM 93 and the details of the storage area provided in the sub RAM 94 will be described later. The sub ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits / receives data to / from another board or the like via an input / output circuit (I / O port unit) 95. The input / output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91. The image control board 100, the voice control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the relay board 108 are connected to the sub control board 90 via the input / output circuit 95.

The image control board 100 includes an image control microcomputer 101, an input circuit 105a, and an output circuit 105b. The image control microcomputer 101 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the image control board 100, and controls the display of the image display device 7 according to a program. The image control microcomputer 101 includes a CPU 102, a ROM 103, and a RAM 104. In the ROM 103, in addition to a program for performing display control, still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device 7, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers, symbols, etc. (effect patterns are displayed). Image data such as) and background images are stored. The RAM 104 is used as a memory for expanding image data. The CPU 102 executes the program stored in the ROM 103. The effect control microcomputer 91 causes the image control microcomputer 101 to control the display of the image display device 7 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The image control microcomputer 101 reads image data from the ROM 103 based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91, and performs display control based on the read image data.

A speaker 67 is connected to the voice control board 106, and the effect control microcomputer 91 receives voice, music, and sound effects from the speaker 67 via the voice control board 106 based on a command received from the main control board 80. Etc. are output. Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90. The voice control board 106 may be equipped with a CPU, and the CPU may be made to execute voice control based on a command. Further, the voice control board 106 may mount a ROM, or may store acoustic data in the ROM. Further, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 may execute voice control. Further, the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100.

The frame lamp 66, the panel lamp 5, the first movable accessory 14, and the second movable accessory 15 are connected to the lamp control board 107, and control these. Based on the command received from the main control board 80, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 (the lamps of the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15) via the lamp control board 107. Control the lighting of lamps such as). That is, the effect control microcomputer 91 creates light emission pattern data (data that determines lighting / extinguishing, emission color, etc., also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5. The light emission of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 is controlled according to the data. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data. The effect control microcomputer 91 operates the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The effect control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data (drive data) that determines the operation modes of the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15, and these movable accessories are created according to the operation pattern data. Control the operation. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. The lamp control board 107 may be equipped with a CPU, and the CPU may be used to execute command-based lamp lighting control and movable accessory operation control. In this case, the lamp control board 107 may mount a ROM, and the ROM may store data related to a light emission pattern and an operation pattern.

An effect button detection switch 63a and a select button detection switch 68a are connected to the relay board 108. The effect button detection switch 63a detects that the effect button 63 has been pressed. When the effect button 63 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the effect button detection switch 63a to the sub control board 90 via the relay board 108. The select button detection switch 68a detects that the select button 68 has been pressed. Further, the sub-control board 90 can cause the effect button 63 and the select button 68 to execute the light emission effect via the relay board 108.

3. 3. Data structure of the game machine The data structure of the game machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7. FIG. 6A is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the main ROM 83. FIG. 6B is a diagram for explaining a storage area provided in the main RAM 84. FIG. 7A is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the sub ROM 93. FIG. 7B is a diagram for explaining a storage area provided in the sub RAM 94.

The main ROM 83 (FIG. 6A) includes a special symbol hit determination table T1, a reach determination table T2, a special symbol hit type determination table T3, a special symbol variation pattern determination table T4, and a normal symbol hit determination table T5. A normal symbol hit type determination table T6, a normal symbol variation pattern determination table T7, an electric chew opening pattern determination table T8, and a large winning opening opening pattern determination table T9 are stored. These determination tables are referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) executed by the game control microcomputer 81. The specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The main RAM 84 (FIG. 6B) includes a command set area 84a, a flag set area 84b, a counter set area 84c, a special operation status set area 84d, a special figure hold storage area 85, and a normal figure hold storage. A region 86 is provided. The command set area 84a is an area (output buffer) in which commands output from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side are set in the main control main process (described later), and is a fluctuation start command, a fluctuation stop command, and an opening. Command, round specification command, ending command, game state specification command, V passage command, pre-judgment command, customer waiting wait command, hold ball number command, normal symbol fluctuation start command, normal symbol fluctuation stop command, normal symbol opening command, normal The symbol ending command etc. are set. The flag set area 84b is an area in which a flag indicating the state of the game machine or the game state is set in the main control main process (described later), and is a jackpot flag, a jackpot end flag, a small hit flag, a small hit end flag, and V. A flag, a time saving flag, a V opening / closing member operation flag, etc. are set. The counter set area 84c is an area in which a counter used in the main control main process (described later) is set, and a random number counter, a round counter, a first time reduction counter, a second time reduction counter, and the like are set. The special operation status set area 84d is an area in which the status in the special operation process (FIG. 20) described later is set. The special figure reservation storage area 85 includes a first special figure reservation storage area 85a in which the first special figure reservation is stored and a second special figure reservation storage area 85b in which the second special figure reservation is stored. In the first special figure hold storage area 85a, a random number value group (hold information) such as a random number per special symbol corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the first special figure hold is stored. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area for storage are provided. The second special figure reservation storage area 85b is provided with a first storage area for storing a random number value group (hold information) corresponding to the first item of the second special figure reservation. The normal figure hold storage area 86 is provided with a first storage area for storing a random number value group (hold information) such as a random number per normal symbol corresponding to the first normal figure hold. In addition to the above area, the main RAM 84 is provided with a hit type set buffer in which special figure stop symbol data is set, a drive data buffer in which drive data for driving the decorative movable body 15 is set, and the like. Has been done.

The sub ROM 93 (FIG. 7A) includes a variable effect pattern determination table T51, a stop symbol pattern determination table T52, a mode status setting table T53, a time saving effect scenario determination table T54, and a look-ahead effect pattern determination table T55. Is stored. These determination tables are referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91 in the sub-control main process (described later) executed by the effect control microcomputer 91. The specific contents of each decision table will be described later.

The sub RAM 94 (FIG. 7B) is provided with a command storage area 94a, an effect command set area 94b, a pre-judgment information storage area 94c, a counter set area 94d, and a mode status set area 94e. .. The command storage area 94a is an area (input buffer) in which commands input from the main control unit side are stored in the sub-control main process (described later), and is a fluctuation start command, a fluctuation stop command, an opening command, and a round designation command. , Ending command, game state specification command, V passage command, pre-judgment command, customer waiting standby command, hold ball number command, normal symbol fluctuation start command, normal symbol fluctuation stop command, normal symbol opening command, normal symbol ending command, etc. Stored. The effect command set area 94b is an area (output buffer) in which commands output from the sub control board 90 to the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the voice control board 106 are set in the sub control main process (described later). Yes, variable effect start command, variable effect end command, opening effect start command, round effect start command, ending effect start command, normal symbol variable effect start command, normal symbol variable effect end command, normal symbol opening effect start command, normal symbol The ending effect start command etc. are set. The pre-determination information storage area 94c stores pre-determination information in the sub-control main process (described later). The counter set area 94d is an area in which a counter used in the sub-control main process (described later) is set, and is a random number counter, a first special figure hold effect counter, a second special figure hold effect counter, and a normal figure hold effect counter. , The first time saving effect counter, the second time saving effect counter, etc. are set. In the mode status set area 94e, a mode status (described later) indicating a gaming state (whether a time-saving state or a non-time-saving state described later) of the game machine 1 is set.

FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the game machine 1. FIG. 8A shows a random number acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 on the main control unit side, and FIG. 8B shows a random number acquired by the effect control microcomputer 91 on the sub control unit side. There is. The game control microcomputer 81 includes "special symbol per random number", "special symbol per type random number", "reach random number", "variable pattern random number", "ordinary symbol per random number", and "ordinary symbol per type". It is configured to acquire "random numbers" at the timings described later. The "special symbol per random number" is a random number used in a lottery for whether or not it is a big hit or a small hit (big hit small hit lottery), and takes a value in the range of 0 to 65535. The "special symbol hit type random number" is a random number used for a lottery (winning type determination) of the winning big hit or small hit type, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "reach random number" is a random number used to determine whether or not to generate reach in the effect symbol variation effect indicating the result when the big hit / small hit determination is lost, and is in the range of 0 to 127. Takes the value of. Reach is a state in which there is only one effect symbol that is variablely displayed among a plurality of effect symbols (decorative symbols), and it depends on which symbol the variable display effect symbol is stopped and displayed. It is a state (for example, a state of "7 ↓ 7") in which a combination of production symbols indicating a big hit and a small hit is won. The effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the reach state may be displayed as if it is shaking in the display screen 7a. The “variation pattern random number” is a random number used to determine a fluctuation pattern including a fluctuation time, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "normal symbol per random number" is a random number used in a winning lottery (ordinary symbol lottery) for whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the electric chew 22, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 255. The "ordinary symbol per type random number" is a random number used for the lottery of the winning type (winning type determination) won in the ordinary symbol lottery, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 65535. "Random number per special symbol", "Random number type per special symbol", "Reach random number", and "Fluctuating pattern random number" are acquired based on the entry into the starting port (first starting port 20 or second starting port 21). Will be done. The random number value group acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, and the random number value group acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 is stored. The second special figure is stored in the reserved storage area 85b. The "random number per ordinary symbol" and the "random number per type per ordinary symbol" are acquired based on the passage of the gate (first gate 28 or second gate 29). The acquired random value per normal symbol and the random value per type of normal symbol are stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area 86.

The effect control microcomputer 91 is configured to acquire a "variable effect pattern random number", a "time saving effect scenario random number", and a "look-ahead effect random number" at a timing described later. The “variable effect pattern random number” is a random number used to determine the variable effect pattern, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "time saving effect scenario random number" is a random number used to determine a change scenario of the time saving remaining number (display time saving remaining number) displayed on the image display device 7 in the time saving state, and is a value in the range of 0 to 127. Take. The “look-ahead effect random number” is a random number used to determine the look-ahead effect at the time of the variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "variation effect pattern random number" is acquired based on the fact that the variation start command is output from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side. The acquired random number value is stored in the sub RAM 94. The "time saving effect scenario random number" is acquired based on the output of the ending command from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side. The "look-ahead effect random number" is acquired based on the output of the pre-determination command from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side. The acquired random number value is stored in the sub RAM 94.

FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol hit determination table T1 and the reach determination table T2. FIG. 9A shows a diagram for explaining the special symbol hit determination table T1, and FIG. 9B shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2.

In the special symbol hit determination table T1, the random value per special symbol (any of 0 to 65535) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main processing (described later) is "big hit", "small hit", and "loss". It is a table referred to for determining which of the above is applicable. In FIG. 9A, in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), when the random number value per special symbol is "0 to 210", it is determined as "big hit" and the random number value per special symbol is " In the case of "1000 to 10500", it is determined to be "small hit", and when the random number value per special symbol is 0 to 65535 other than the above, it is determined to be "missing". .. Further, in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), when the random number value per special symbol is "0 to 210", it is determined as "big hit" and the random number value per special symbol is "1000 to 16500". In this case, it is determined that it is a "small hit", and if the random number value per special symbol is a value other than the above among 0 to 65535, it is determined that it is "missing".

In the reach determination table T2, the reach random number value (any of 0 to 127) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "with reach" or "without reach". It is a table referred to for determining whether or not. In FIG. 9B, when the reach random number value is “0 to 13” in the “non-time saving state”, it is determined that there is “reach”, and the reach random number value is a numerical value other than “0 to 13” (14 to 13). In the case of "127)", it is shown that it is determined as "no reach". Further, in the "time saving state", when the reach random number value is "0 to 5", it is determined that there is "reach", and when the reach random number value is "a numerical value other than 0 to 5 (6 to 127)". Is shown to be determined as "no reach". The contents of the "time saving state" and the "non-time saving state" will be described later. In the reach determination table T2, the time-saving state is less likely to reach when lost than the non-time-saving state. This is to speed up the digestion speed of the special figure hold by selecting more non-reach loss with a short fluctuation time in the time saving state.

The special symbol per type determination table T3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol per type determination table T3 in the lottery of the special figure 1. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol per type determination table T3 in the lottery of the special figure 2. The special symbol hit type determination table T3 is set to "big hit type" or "big hit type" according to the special symbol hit type random value (any of 0 to 127) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later). It is a table referred to for determining "small hit type" and "special symbol type". In FIG. 10, when the “big hit” is won in the lottery of the special figure 1 in the “non-time saving state” and the special symbol hit type random value is “0 to 15”, the big hit type is “15R time saving 99 times big hit”. It is determined that "A" is determined, and the stop symbol of special figure 1 (special figure 1 stop symbol) that is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41a is determined to be "time saving symbol 1". When the special symbol hit type random value is "16 to 63", the jackpot type is determined to be "15R time saving 99 times jackpot B", and the special figure 1 stop symbol is determined to be "time saving symbol 2". When the special symbol hit type random value is "64 to 127", the jackpot type is determined to be "15R time saving 5 times jackpot A", and the special figure 1 stop symbol is determined to be "time saving symbol 3". On the other hand, in the case of "small hit winning" in the lottery of special figure 1 in the "non-time saving state", the small hit type is different regardless of the special symbol hit type random value (any of 0 to 127). It is determined that "16R normal small hit A (substantially impossible to pass 5R / V)", and the special figure 1 stop symbol is determined to be "small hit symbol 1 without time reduction".

When the "big hit win" is won in the lottery of special figure 1 in the "time saving state", if the special symbol hit type random value is "0 to 63", the big hit type is determined to be "15R time saving 99 times big hit C" , The special figure 1 stop symbol is determined to be "time saving symbol 4". When the special symbol hit type random value is "64 to 127", the jackpot type is determined to be "15R time saving 5 times jackpot B", and the special figure 1 stop symbol is determined to be "time saving symbol 5". On the other hand, in the case of "small hit winning" in the lottery of special figure 1 in the "time saving state", the small hit type is "regardless of the random value of the special symbol hit type (any of 0 to 127)". It is determined that "16R normal small hit B (substantially impossible to pass 5R / V)", and the special figure 1 stop symbol is determined to be "small hit symbol 2 without time reduction".

In FIG. 11, when the “big hit” is won in the lottery of the special figure 2 in the “non-time saving state” and the special symbol hit type random value is “0 to 63”, the big hit type is “15R time saving 5 times big hit”. It is determined as "C", and the stop symbol of special figure 2 (special figure 2 stop symbol) which is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 41b is determined as "time saving symbol 6". When the special symbol hit type random value is "64 to 95", the jackpot type is determined to be "15R time saving 15 times jackpot A", and the special figure 2 stop symbol is determined to be "time saving symbol 7". When the special symbol hit type random value is "96 to 127", the jackpot type is determined to be "15R time saving 99 times jackpot D", and the special figure 2 stop symbol is determined to be "time saving symbol 8". On the other hand, when the special figure 2 lottery in the "non-time saving state" is "small hit winning" and the special symbol hit type random value is "0 to 63", the small hit type is "16R time saving 5 times small". It is determined that "hit A (substantially 15R / V can pass)", and the special figure 2 stop symbol of special figure 2 is determined to be "small hit symbol 1 with time reduction" on the second special symbol display 41b. When the random value of the special symbol per type random value is "64 to 127", it is determined that the small hit type is "16R time reduction 99 times small hit A (actually 15R / V can pass)", and the special figure 2 stop symbol is "time reduction". It is determined that there is a small hit symbol 2 ”.

When the special figure 2 lottery in the "time saving state" is "big hit winning", if the special symbol hit type random value is "0 to 79", the big hit type is determined to be "15R time saving 5 times big hit D". , Special figure 2 The stop symbol is determined to be "time saving symbol 9". When the special symbol hit type random value is "80 to 95", the jackpot type is determined to be "15R time reduction 15 times jackpot B", and the special figure 2 stop symbol is determined to be "time reduction symbol 10". When the special symbol hit type random value is "96 to 127", the jackpot type is determined to be "15R time saving 99 times jackpot E", and the special figure 2 stop symbol is determined to be "time saving symbol 11". On the other hand, when "small hit winning" is won in the lottery of special figure 2 in "time saving state", when the special symbol hit type random value is "0 to 63", the small hit type is "16R time saving 5 times small hit". It is determined that "B (substantially 15R / V can pass)", and the special figure 2 stop symbol is determined to be "small hit symbol 3 with time reduction". When the random value of the special symbol per type random value is "64 to 95", it is determined that the small hit type is "16R time reduction 10 times small hit (actually 15R / V can pass)", and the special figure 2 stop symbol is "time reduction available". It is determined as "small hit symbol 4". When the random value of the special symbol hit type is "96 to 111", it is determined that the small hit type is "16R time reduction 15 times small hit (actually 15R / V can pass)", and the special figure 2 stop symbol is "time reduction available". It is determined as "small hit symbol 5". When the random value of the special symbol per type random value is "112 to 127", the small hit type is determined to be "16R time reduction 99 times small hit B (substantially 15R / V can pass)", and the special figure 2 stop symbol is "time reduction". It is determined that there is a small hit symbol 6 ”. By referring to the special symbol per type determination table T3, in addition to the "special symbol stop symbol data" corresponding to the special symbol stop symbol (special symbol 1 stop symbol and special symbol 2 stop symbol), the "opening" of the special game (OP) command, "round designation command", and "ending (ED) command" can also be specified. The specific contents of each big hit and each small hit will be described later.

FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4. The special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 is a table referred to for determining the variation pattern according to the variation pattern random value (0 to 127) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later). Is. In FIG. 12, for example, when the first starting port 20 is won in a non-time saving state, it is determined as a “big hit” in the special symbol hit determination table T1, and the fluctuation pattern random value is “111-127”, the fluctuation pattern Is shown to be determined as "P2". Further, for example, in the non-time saving state, the first starting port 20 is won, the special symbol hit determination table T1 determines "missing", the reach determination table T2 determines "no reach", and the number of reserved balls is "1". In the case of "~ 2", it is shown that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P6" regardless of the fluctuation pattern random value (any of 0 to 127). Further, for example, when the second starting port 21 is won in the time saving state and it is determined as "small hit" in the special symbol hit determination table T1, regardless of the fluctuation pattern random value (any of 0 to 127). ), It is shown that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P17". As shown in FIG. 12, if the fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is also determined. In addition, when it becomes a reach, it is also determined whether the reach becomes a normal reach or a super reach (SP reach). Also, when it comes to super reach, it is also decided whether or not there is a pseudo-ream.

FIG. 13 (A) shows a diagram for explaining the ordinary symbol hit determination table T5, and FIG. 13 (B) shows a diagram for explaining the ordinary symbol hit type determination table T6. In 13 (C), a figure for explaining a normal symbol variation pattern determination table T7 is shown. In the normal symbol hit determination table T5, the random value per normal symbol (any of 0 to 255) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "hit" or "misses". It is a table that is referred to to determine whether it is applicable. In FIG. 13 (A), in both the "non-time saving state" and the "time saving state", when the random number value per normal symbol is "0 to 254" in the lottery of the normal symbol (normal symbol), It is shown that it is determined to be "hit", and when the random value per normal symbol is "a numerical value other than 0 to 254 (255)", it is determined to be "missing".

The normal symbol hit type determination table T6 includes "hit type" and "hit type" according to the normal symbol hit type random value (any of 0 to 65535) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later). It is a table referred to for determining "type of ordinary symbol". In FIG. 13 (B), when the lottery of the normal figure in the "non-time saving state" is won, if the random value of the normal symbol hit type is "0 to 30", it is determined that the hit type is "long open 1". Then, the stop symbol (normal symbol stop symbol) of the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display 42 is determined to be "hit symbol 1". When the normal symbol hit type random value is "100 to 170", the hit type is determined to be "short open 1", and the normal symbol stop symbol is determined to be "win symbol 2". When the random value of the normal symbol per type random value is 0 to 65535 and is a numerical value other than the above, it is indicated that the hit type is determined to be "short open 2" and the normal symbol stop symbol is determined to be "win symbol 3". Has been done. On the other hand, if the player wins the lottery for the regular figure in the "time saving state", it is determined that the winning type is "long open 2" regardless of the random value of the normal symbol per type (any of 0 to 65535). It is shown that the normal symbol stop symbol is determined as "hit symbol 4". By referring to the normal symbol per type determination table T6, it is possible to specify the "normal symbol stop symbol data" (not shown) corresponding to the normal symbol stop symbol.

The normal symbol variation pattern determination table T7 is a table that the game control microcomputer 81 is referred to in the main control main process (described later) to determine the variation time of the ordinary figure according to the lottery result and the winning type of the ordinary figure. Is. In FIG. 13C, for example, when the lottery result of the normal map in the non-time saving state is "hit" and the hit type is "long open 1", the fluctuation time of the normal map is determined to be "30 seconds". It is shown that Further, for example, when the lottery result of the normal map in the time saving state is "missing", it is shown that the fluctuation time of the normal map is determined to be "1 second".

FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the electric chew opening pattern determination table T8. The electric chew opening pattern determination table T8 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 according to the normal figure stop symbol (normal figure stop symbol data) in the main control main process (described later). This is the referenced table. In FIG. 14A, for example, when the normal symbol stop symbol is “hit symbol 1”, the open pattern of the electric chew 22 is determined to be “open pattern 11”, and for example, the normal symbol stop symbol is “hit symbol”. At the time of "4", it is shown that the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 14". FIG. 14B shows the contents of the opening patterns 11 to 14. In the opening pattern 11, the electric chew 22 having an opening (OP) time of 6 seconds, an opening time of 5 seconds, and an ending (ED) time of 1 second is opened once. In the opening patterns 11 and 12, the electric chew 22 having an opening (OP) time of 0.01 seconds, an opening time of 0.02 seconds, and an ending (ED) time of 0.01 seconds is opened once. In the opening pattern 14, the electric chew 22 having an opening (OP) time of 0.01 seconds, an opening time of 3 seconds, and an ending (ED) time of 0.01 seconds is opened once. However, the opening of the electric chew 22 is closed even if the opening time remains when a predetermined number of game balls have been won (specified number of winnings, maximum of 2).

FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T9. In the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T9, in the main control main processing (described later) of the game control microcomputer 81, the first large winning opening 30 and the second large winning opening 30 and the second large winning opening are according to the special figure stop symbol (special figure stop symbol data). It is a table referred to for determining the opening pattern of a winning opening 35. In FIG. 15 (A), the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "12H", "13H", "15H", "16H", "21H", "22H", "23H", "31H", " When it is "32H" or "33H", the opening pattern of the first winning opening 30 and the second winning opening 35 is determined to be "opening pattern 21", and the special figure stop symbol data is "14H" or "14H". When it is "17H", the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 22", and when the special figure stop symbol data is "24H", "25H", "34H", "35H", "36H", or "37H". , It is shown that the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 23". FIG. 15B shows the contents of each opening pattern 21 to 23. In the opening pattern 21, after the opening (OP) for 6 seconds, the first large winning opening 30 (long opening) is opened once in the 1st to 15th rounds and the opening time is 29.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 22, after the opening (OP) for 4 seconds, the second large winning opening 35 with an opening time of 1.6 seconds is opened once in the 1st round, and the opening number is opened in the 2nd to 6th rounds. The first big winning opening 30 with an opening time of 29.5 seconds is opened once (long opening), and at the 7th to 16th rounds, the opening time is once and the opening time of the first big winning opening 30 is 0.1 seconds. Open (short open). In the opening pattern 23, after the opening (OP) for 0.01 seconds, the second large winning opening 35 having an opening number of 1 time and an opening time of 1.6 seconds is opened in the 1st round, and in the 2nd to 16th rounds, the opening pattern 23 is opened. The first large winning opening 30 is opened (long opening) once, with an opening time of 29.5 seconds. However, the opening of the 1st prize opening 30 and the 2nd prize opening 35 is possible even if the opening time remains if a predetermined number of game balls have been won (specified number of prizes, maximum 9). It will be closed.

4. Explanation of big hits, etc. In the game machine 1, there are "big hits", "small hits", and "misses" as a result of a special symbol lottery (big hit small hit lottery). In the case of "big hit", the "big hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. In the case of "small hit", the "small hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. At the time of "missing", the "missing symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. When the jackpot is won, the "big hit game (second special game)" that opens the first big winning opening 30 is executed in the opening pattern according to the type of the special symbol (the type of the big hit) that is stopped and displayed. "Small hit game (1st special game)" that opens the 2nd big prize opening 35 once with the opening pattern according to the type of special symbol (type of small hit) that is stopped and displayed when the small hit is won. Is executed. Then, when the game ball enters the V area 39 inside the second big winning opening 35 during the execution of the small hit game, the first big winning opening 30 is opened in an opening pattern according to the type of the winning small hit. The "big hit game (second special game)" to be released is executed. The jackpot game executed based on the result of the special symbol lottery being a jackpot winning is also referred to as a "type 1 jackpot game". Further, the jackpot game executed based on the passage of the game ball into the V region 39 is also referred to as a "type 2 jackpot game". In addition, big hit games and small hit games are also called "special games". This special game may include a round in which the large winning opening is opened multiple times in one round.

The jackpot game consists of multiple round games (unit open games) that open the first prize opening 30, an opening (OP) before the first round game starts, and after the final round game ends. Includes the ending (ED) of. Each round game starts with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round game and ends with the start of the next round game. The closing time (interval time) of the first winning opening 30 between round games is included in the open round game before the closing. The small hit game consists of a small hit opening game that opens the second big winning opening 35, an opening before the small hit opening game starts (interval before opening), and an ending (closed) after the small hit opening game ends. After interval) and.

There are multiple types of jackpots. Here, as the jackpot type, "15R time reduction 99 times jackpot A to E", "15R time reduction 15 times jackpot A, B", and "15R time reduction 5 times jackpot A to D" are set. Each of these jackpots is a jackpot that controls the game state to the "time saving state and high base state" described later after executing the jackpot game (type 1 jackpot game) in which the first jackpot 30 is opened over 15R. .. On the other hand, these hits differ in the number of time reductions at which the "time reduction state and high base state" after the big hit game ends. Here, the "time reduction number" is the number of variable display (variable display) of the special symbol that can be executed in the "time reduction state and high base state" after the jackpot game, and is preset for each jackpot type. For example, in "15R time reduction 99 times jackpot A to E", the number of time reductions is 99 times, and in "15R time reduction 15 times jackpot A, B", the number of time reductions is 15 times. It should be noted that the "time saving state and high base state" ends when the jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed even before the number of time reductions is achieved.

There are multiple types of small hits. Here, as the small hit types, "16R normal small hit A, B", "16R time reduction 5 times small hit A, B", "16R time reduction 10 times small hit", "16R time reduction 15 times small hit", "16R time reduction 15 times small hit", "16R time reduction 15 times small hit" 99 times small hit A, B "is set. In these small hits, first, a small hit game is executed, and when a game ball passes through the V region 39 (V passage), a big hit game (two kinds of big hit games) is executed. Therefore, in the small hit, the opening of the second big winning opening 35 as a small hit game corresponds to the first R, and the big hit game that opens the first big winning opening 30 over 15R, which is executed after the V is passed, is performed. It corresponds to the 2nd to 16th R. If there is no V passage in the small hit game, the big hit game is not executed. Here, "16R (substantially 5R) normal small hit" is a small hit that is substantially impossible to pass through V. On the other hand, "16R time reduction 5 times small hit", "16R time reduction 10 times small hit", "16R time reduction 15 times small hit", "16R time reduction 99 times small hit" are small hits that can pass V. .. Whether or not V can pass during the small hit game can be set by the operation pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 and the opening pattern of the opening / closing member 37 of the second large winning device 36. Specifically, it is as follows.

In each of the above small hits, the second big winning opening 35 is opened once for 1.6 seconds in the small hit game after winning (FIG. 15). On the other hand, the opening time in the small hit game differs depending on the small hit type. Specifically, the "16R normal small hit" (opening pattern 22) has an opening time of 4 seconds, and is "16R time reduction 5 times small hit", "16R time reduction 10 times small hit", "16R time reduction 15 times small hit". The opening time of "hit" and "16R time reduction 99 times small hit" (opening pattern 23) is 0.01 seconds. The reason why the opening time of the small hit game differs depending on the small hit type is that the opening timing of the second large winning opening 35 with respect to the V opening / closing member 71 that has been moving in a constant motion from the start of this opening is changed. Because. Here, the V opening / closing member 71 is opened for 4 seconds after the opening for 0.01 seconds when the small hit game is started. In the opening pattern 22, since the second big winning opening 35 is opened 4 seconds after the small hit game is started, the V opening / closing member 71 closes 0.01 seconds after the second big winning opening 35 is opened. become. Therefore, in the "16R normal small hit", it is substantially impossible to pass through V during the small hit game. On the other hand, in the opening pattern 23, the second big winning opening 35 and the V opening / closing member 71 are opened at the same time 0.01 seconds after the small hit game is started, and both of them continue to be opened for 1.6 seconds, and the second big winning is won. The V opening / closing member 71 closes 2.4 seconds after the mouth 35 is closed. Therefore, in "16R time reduction 5 times small hit", "16R time reduction 10 times small hit", "16R time reduction 15 times small hit", "16R time reduction 99 times small hit", V passage during the small hit game becomes possible. ing.

"16R time reduction 5 times small hit", "16R time reduction 10 times small hit", "16R time reduction 15 times small hit", "16R time reduction 99 times small hit" are big hits when the big hit game is executed after the small hit game. This is to control the game state after the game to the "time saving state and high base state" described later. "16R time reduction 5 times small hit", "16R time reduction 10 times small hit", "16R time reduction 15 times small hit", "16R time reduction 99 times small hit" have the same number of time reductions in "time reduction state and high base state", respectively. different. For example, in "16R time reduction 10 times small hit", the time reduction number is 10 times, and in "16R time reduction 15 times small hit", the time reduction number is 15 times. On the other hand, the "16R normal small hit" is a hit that controls the game state to the "non-time saving state and low base state" described later after the big hit game when the big hit game is executed. However, since the "16R normal small hit" is a small hit that is substantially impossible to pass through the V, the big hit game is rarely executed.

In addition, all the small hits in the special figure 1 lottery in the non-time saving state are "16R normal small hits" in which V passage is practically impossible. On the other hand, the distribution rate of small hits in the special figure 2 lottery in the time saving state is 50% for "16R time saving 5 times small hit", 25% for "16R time saving 10 times small hit", and "16R time saving 15 times small hit". "Is 12.5%," 16R time reduction 99 times small hit "is 12.5%, and" 16R normal small hit "is not included. Since the winning probability of the big hit does not change between the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery, the probability of winning either the "big hit" or the "small hit in which the big hit game (type 2 big hit game) is executed" is The special figure 2 lottery in the non-time saving state is higher than the special drawing 1 lottery in the non-time saving state. In this way, in the game machine 1, the game ball is hit to the second start port 21 by hitting right in the time saving state, rather than in the state where the game ball is won in the first starting port 20 by hitting the left in the non-time saving state. It is set so that it is more advantageous for the player to win the prize.

In the game machine 1, there are "win" and "loss" as a result of the ordinary symbol lottery (winning lottery). In the case of "hit", the "hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display 42. At the time of "missing", the "missing symbol" is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display 42. If a hit is won, a "hit game (normal game)" as an auxiliary game for opening the electric chew 22 is executed with an opening pattern corresponding to the type of normal symbol (type of hit) displayed as a stop. In this hit game (ordinary game), the electric chew may be opened multiple times in one round. The winning game (ordinary game) includes one round game (unit open game), an opening (OP) before the round game starts, and an ending (ED) after the round game ends. .. There are multiple types of hits. Here, "long opening 1", "long opening 2", "short opening 1", and "short opening 2" are set as the hit types. These hits have different fluctuation times, opening times, opening times, and ending times.

5. Description of game state The game control microcomputer 81 of the game machine 1 can execute "variation time reduction control" for each of the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display 41 and the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display 42. Is. Here, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 controls the fluctuation time reduction with respect to the special symbol of the special symbol display 41 is referred to as a "time reduction state", and the state in which the fluctuation time reduction control is not performed is simply a "non-time reduction state". ". In the time-saving state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the derivation display of the display result) is shorter than that in the non-time-saving state. In the game control microcomputer 81, a special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 12) is defined so that a variation pattern having a shorter variation time is often selected in the time saving state than in the non-time saving state. The fluctuation pattern is determined using. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes the fluctuation time reduction control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, the special symbol is variable as compared with the case where the fluctuation time reduction control is not executed. It becomes easier to select a short fluctuation time as the fluctuation time of the display. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure hold becomes faster, and an effective prize (a prize that can be memorized as the special figure hold) to the starting port is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game.

The game control microcomputer 81 executes the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42 in synchronization with the fluctuation time shortening control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41. That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol in the time saving state, and does not execute it in the non-time saving state. In the time-saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the non-time-saving state. In the game control microcomputer 81, a normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T7 (FIG. 13) is defined so that a fluctuation pattern having a shorter fluctuation time is often selected in the time saving state than in the non-time saving state. The fluctuation pattern is determined using. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes the fluctuation time reduction control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, the normal symbol is variable as compared with the case where the fluctuation time reduction control is not executed. It becomes easier to select a short fluctuation time as the fluctuation time of the display.

Further, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game tends to be longer than in the non-time saving state (FIG. 13). Even in the non-time saving state, if "long opening 1" is won in the normal symbol lottery, the opening pattern of the electric chew is "opening pattern 11", which is a long opening time of 5 seconds, but the winning type is "long opening". The probability of being assigned to "Open 1" is as low as 31/65536, and in most cases, even if you win, the open time will be 0.02 seconds. On the other hand, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric chew is always 3 seconds when winning, so that in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game is substantially longer than in the non-time-saving state. It can be said that it is easy to become. That is, it can be said that the game control microcomputer 81 executes the open time extension control for the electric chew 22 in the time saving state. In the situation where the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42 and the open time extension control for the electric chew 22, these controls are not executed. In comparison, the electric chew 22 is opened frequently, and the game ball frequently wins a prize at the second starting port 21. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of launched balls, becomes high. Therefore, the state in which these controls are executed is called a "high base state", and the state in which these controls are not executed is called a "low base state". In the high base state, you can aim for a big hit without significantly reducing the number of game balls you have. The high base state does not have to execute all the above controls. That is, by executing one or more of the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol and the open time extension control for the electric chew 22 of the normal symbol display 42, the electric chew 22 is more than when the control is not executed. Should be easy to open. Further, the high base state may be controlled independently without being accompanied by the time saving state.

In the game machine 1, "15R time reduction 99 times big hit A to E", "15R time reduction 15 times big hit A, B", "15R time reduction 5 times big hit A to D", "16R time reduction 99 times small hit", "16R time reduction The game state after the big hit game executed by winning "15 times small hit", "16R time reduction 10 times small hit", or "16R time reduction 5 times small hit" is "time reduction state and high base state". .. In the "time saving state and high base state", the variable display (variable display) of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (5 times, 10 times, 15 times, or 99 times), or the jackpot is won. It ends when the jackpot game is executed. The game state after the big hit game executed by winning the "16R normal small hit" is the "non-time saving state and low base state". This gaming state is also called a "normal gaming state". When playing the game machine 1 for the first time, the game state after the power is turned on is this normal game state. Here, the "time saving state and high base state" is also simply referred to as "time saving state", and the "non-time saving state and low base state" is also simply referred to as "non-time saving state".

In the high base state (time saving state), it is more advantageous to allow the game ball to enter the right game area 3B (FIG. 1) by hitting right. This is because the electric chew 22 is easier to open than in the low base state (non-time saving state), and it is easier to win the second starting port 21 than to win the first starting port 20. is there. For this reason, in the high base state, the game ball is passed through the first gate 28, which triggers the normal symbol lottery, and the game ball is hit right to the second starting port 21 to win a prize. As a result, it is possible to obtain a large number of starting prizes (winning to the starting port) rather than hitting left. In addition, in the game machine 1, the game is played by right-handed even during the big hit game. On the other hand, in the low base state, it is more advantageous to allow the game ball to enter the left game area 3A (FIG. 1) by hitting the left side. This is because the electric chew 22 is less likely to be opened as compared with the high base state, and it is easier to win the first starting port 20 than to win the second starting port 21. For this reason, in the low base state, while passing the game ball through the second gate 29, which is an opportunity for the normal symbol lottery, the game ball is left-handed to win the game ball in the first starting port 20. This allows you to get a lot of starting prizes rather than hitting right. On the other hand, even in the low base state (non-time saving state), when the "long opening 1" is won by passing the game ball to the second gate 29, the electric chew 22 is opened for 5 seconds, so that the second 2 Make a right-handed strike to get the game ball to the starting port 21. After closing the electric chew 22, left-handed again.

6. Operation of Game Control Microcomputer 81 The operation of the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 34. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. that appear in the operation description of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the main RAM 84. As described below, the game control microcomputer 81 can be used as a hit / fail determination means, a symbol control means, a hit game execution means, a game state control means, and a hit type selection means by reading a program stored in the main ROM 83. It works (see, for example, FIGS. 22, 27-29, 31, 32).

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the main control main process. When the power of the game machine 1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 reads a program for executing the main control main process from the main ROM 83. In the main control main process, the game control microcomputer 81 first makes initial settings (step S001). In the initial setting, for example, the main CPU 82 is set, various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are reset. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". The initial setting is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed after that.

After the initial setting, the game control microcomputer 81 prohibits the interrupt of the interrupt process (step S002), and performs the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (step S003). In this normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 has various random number counter values (random number value per special symbol, type random number value per special symbol, reach random number value, etc.) shown in FIG. 8 (A). The variable pattern random number value, the random number value per ordinary symbol, and the random number value per ordinary symbol) are added and updated by 1. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be randomly changed. Further, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated by using a known random number generation circuit including a counter IC or the like.

After the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 permits the interrupt of the interrupt process (step S004). While the interrupt is enabled, the main timer interrupt process (step S005) can be executed. The main timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the main CPU 82 in a predetermined cycle (for example, a 4 msec cycle). That is, the main timer interrupt process is executed every predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec cycle). Then, from the end of the main timer interrupt process to the start of the next main timer interrupt process, various counter value update processes by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process are repeatedly executed. .. If an interrupt pulse is input to the main CPU 82 in the interrupt disabled state, the main timer interrupt process is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled.

[Main timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the main timer interrupt process (FIG. 16: step S005). In the main-side timer interrupt processing, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs random number update processing (step S101). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 updates various random number counter values shown in FIG. 8A. This random number update process is the same as the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process performed in the main control main process (FIG. 16) described above. That is, the update processing of various random number counter values is performed during the execution period of the main timer interrupt processing and other periods (the period from the end of the main timer interrupt processing to the start of the next main timer interrupt processing). It is done in both.

After the random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs an input process (step S102). In the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 reads the detection signals detected by various sensors attached to the game machine 1, and outputs the payout data for paying out the prize balls according to the type of the winning opening to the main RAM 84. Set in the buffer. The various sensors are, for example, a first starting port sensor 20a, a second starting port sensor 21a, a first large winning opening sensor 30a, a second large winning opening sensor 35a, and a normal winning opening sensor 27a (FIG. 4).

After the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 has a start port sensor detection process (step S103), a normal operation process (step S104), a special operation process (step S105), a V opening / closing member control process (step S106), and a V area. The sensor detection process (step S107) is executed in order. Details of these processes will be described later. After the V-region sensor detection process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a hold ball number process (step S108). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the number of special figure 1 reserved balls, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls, and the number of ordinary symbol reserved balls stored in the main RAM 84. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the hold ball number command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84. The hold ball number command is a command for notifying the sub-control board 90 of the hold ball number, and includes information on the special figure 1 hold ball number, the special figure 2 hold ball number, and the normal symbol hold ball number. .. After setting the hold ball number command, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

After processing the number of reserved balls, the game control microcomputer 81 performs output processing (step S109). In the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the command or the like set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 to the sub control board 90 in each of the above processes. After the output processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing (step S110). In other processing, for example, the second special figure holding indicator 43b is controlled to a display mode showing the number based on the number of special figure 2 reserved balls described later, and the first special figure is based on the number of special figure 1 reserved balls. The hold indicator 43a is controlled in a display mode indicating the number.

[Starting port sensor detection process]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the start port sensor detection process (FIG. 17: step S103). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the first gate 28 or the second gate 29 (step S201). This determination is made based on whether or not the game ball is detected by the first gate sensor 28a or the second gate sensor 29a. If the game ball has not passed through either the first gate 28 or the second gate 29 (step S201: NO), the process skips to step S205. When the game ball passes through either the first gate 28 or the second gate 29 (step S201: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 has whether or not the number of normally symbol reserved balls is "1 (upper limit value)". Is determined (step S202). The number of ordinary symbol hold balls is the number of normal symbol hold balls, and more specifically, the value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 for counting the number of normal symbol hold balls. If the number of normal symbol reserved balls is "1" (step S202: YES), the process skips to step S205. When the number of normal symbol reserved balls is "0" (step S202: NO), after adding "1" to the number of normal symbol reserved balls (step S203), the normal symbol random number acquisition process is performed (step S204). Here, in the game control microcomputer 81, the value of the random number counter per ordinary symbol (FIG. 8: the value of the label-TRND-H) and the value of the type counter per the ordinary symbol (FIG. 8: the value of the label-TRND-HS). ) Is acquired, and the acquired random number value group is stored in the first storage area of the normal figure reservation storage area 86 of the main RAM 84.

In step S205, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the second starting port 21. This determination is made based on whether or not the game ball is detected by the second start port sensor 21a. If the game ball has not won a prize in the second starting port 21 (step S205: NO), the process skips to step S210. When the game ball wins a prize (step S205: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is “1 (upper limit value)” (step S206). The special figure 2 reserved ball number is the number of the second special figure reserved, and more specifically, it is the value of the counter provided in the main RAM 84 for counting the number of the second special figure reserved. If the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is “1” (step S206: YES), the process skips to step S210. When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is "0" (step S206: NO), after adding "1" to the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 (step S207), the random number acquisition process related to the special figure 2 is performed (step S208). ). Here, the value of the random number counter per special symbol (FIG. 8: the value of the label-TRND-A), the value of the random number counter of the type per special symbol (FIG. 8: the value of the label-TRND-AS), and the value of the reach random number counter (FIG. 8). FIG. 8: Label-TRND-RC value) and fluctuation pattern random number counter value (FIG. 8: Label-TRND-T1 value) are acquired. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number value group in the first storage area of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily stores the acquired random number value group in a buffer (predetermination buffer) different from the second special figure reservation storage area 85b for the special figure 2 pre-determination process described later (pre-determination buffer). Hold). After the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 2 pre-determination process (step S209). In the special figure 2 pre-determination process, the game control microcomputer 81 makes a jackpot pre-determination with reference to the jackpot determination table T1. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 uses the jackpot determination table T1 to be referred to and the jackpot random number value to predetermine whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot. When the result of the jackpot pre-determination is "big hit", the game control microcomputer 81 performs the jackpot type pre-determination. In the jackpot type pre-determination, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires the jackpot type random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs pre-determination of the jackpot type based on the acquired jackpot type random value and the jackpot type determination table T5. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the fluctuation pattern advance determination. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a variation pattern random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process, and a reach random number value. To do. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 creates a pre-determination command. The pre-judgment command includes a jackpot pre-judgment result (in the case of a jackpot, a jackpot type pre-judgment result), and a fluctuation pattern pre-judgment result. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the created pre-determination command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process.

In step S210, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 20. This determination is made based on whether or not the game ball is detected by the first start port sensor 20a. When the game ball has not won a prize in the first starting port 20 (step S210: NO), this process ends. When a game ball wins in the first starting port 20 (step S210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is "4 (upper limit value)" (step S210: YES). Step S211). The special figure 1 hold ball number is the number of the first special figure hold, and more specifically, it is the value of the counter provided in the main RAM 84 for counting the number of the first special figure hold. If the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is “4” (step S211: YES), this process ends. When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is "3" or less (step S211: NO), after adding "1" to the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 (step S212), the random number acquisition process related to the special figure 1 is performed (step). S213). Here, similarly to the above-mentioned special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (step S208), the value of the random number counter per special symbol, the value of the random number counter of the type per special symbol, the value of the reach random number counter, and the value of the variable pattern random number counter are set. get. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number value group in the storage area corresponding to the current number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 among the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily stores (holds) the acquired random number value group in a buffer (predetermination buffer) different from the first special figure reservation storage area 85a for the special figure 1 pre-determination process. Let me. After the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 1 pre-determination process (step S214). The special figure 1 pre-determination process is the same as the above-mentioned special figure 2 pre-determination process.

[Normal operation processing]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart of a normal operation process (FIG. 17: step S104). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the electric chew 22 is operating (step S501). When the electric chew 22 is operating (step S501: YES), the process proceeds to step S540. When the electric chew 22 is not in operation (step S501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the stop display of the normal symbol is in progress (whether the fluctuation stop time has elapsed) (step S502). When the stop display of the normal symbol is being displayed (step S502: YES), the process proceeds to step S531. When the stop display of the normal symbol is not in progress (step S502: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol is changing (step S503). When the normal symbol is changing (step S503: YES), the process proceeds to step S521. When the normal symbol is not changing (step S503: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0" (step S504). When the number of reserved balls is "0" (step S504: YES), this process ends. When the number of reserved balls is not "0" (step S504: NO), the number of normal symbol reserved balls is decremented by 1 (step S505). Therefore, when the game ball passes through the first gate 28 or the second gate 29 while the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0", the normal symbol is once in step S203 of the start port sensor detection process (FIG. 18). The number of reserved balls in the above becomes "1", and then in step S505, the reserved balls are digested and the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol immediately becomes "0". This also applies to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol. That is, in step S207 and step S212 of the start port sensor detection process (FIG. 18), the number of reserved special symbols is once set to "1", and then steps S1404 and step in the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21) described later. In S1410, the hold is exhausted and the number of hold balls of the special symbol becomes "0". In addition, the decrement of the number of normal symbol hold balls (digestion of the normal symbol hold) is executed together with the clear process for clearing the hold information (various random values) stored in the first storage area of the normal symbol hold storage area 86. To.

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a hit determination with reference to the normal symbol hit determination table T5 (FIG. 13 (A)) (step S506). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first has a random value per ordinary symbol as a determination value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the normal figure hold) of the normal figure hold storage area 86. Is read. Then, the random value per normal symbol, the game state (whether or not it is in the time saving state), and the normal symbol hit determination table T5 are used to determine whether or not it is a hit. For example, in the non-time saving state, when the random value per normal symbol is "0" to "254", it is determined as "hit", and when the random value per normal symbol is otherwise "255", it is "missing". (FIG. 13 (A)).

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the type of the normal symbol (normal symbol stop symbol) with reference to the normal symbol hit type determination table T6 (FIG. 13 (B)) (step S507). Specifically, when the game control microcomputer 81 wins in the hit determination in the above (step S506), first, the normal symbol hit stored in the first storage area of the normal figure reservation storage area 86 Read the type random value. Then, the hit type and the normal symbol (normal symbol stop symbol) are determined by using the normal symbol per type random value, the game state (whether or not the time is shortened), and the normal symbol hit type determination table T6. For example, in the non-time saving state, when the random value of the normal symbol per type is "0" to "30", the hit type is determined to be "long open 1", and the normal symbol is determined to be "win symbol 1". .. When the random value of the normal symbol hit type is "100" to "170", the hit type is determined to be "short open 1", and the normal symbol is determined to be "win symbol 2". When the normal symbol hit type random value is other than that, the hit type is determined to be "short open 2", and the normal symbol is determined to be "win symbol 3" (FIG. 13 (B)). On the other hand, in the case of "missing" in the above-mentioned collision determination, "missing symbol" is set as a normal symbol.

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern with reference to the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T7 (FIG. 13C) (step S508). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a normal symbol variation pattern by using a game state (whether or not it is a time saving state), a hit determination result, a hit type, and a normal symbol variation pattern determination table T7. To do. For example, in the non-time saving state, when the hit type is "long opening 1", the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "30 seconds". Further, for example, in the time saving state, when the hit determination is "missing", the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "1 second" (FIG. 13 (C)). The game control microcomputer 81 sets the normal symbol fluctuation start command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 in order to notify the sub-control board 90 of the fluctuation start and fluctuation time of the normal symbol (step S509). The normal symbol variation start command includes information on the normal stop symbol data and information on the normal symbol variation pattern. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 starts the variable display of the normal symbol and ends this process (step S510).

In step S521, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has elapsed and the game has ended. The fluctuation time of the normal symbol is the fluctuation time selected in step S508 (FIG. 13 (C)). When the fluctuation time has not ended (step S521: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. That is, the variable display of the normal symbol is continued. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time has ended (step S521: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 displays the fluctuation display of the normal symbol, and displays the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (the normal symbol that hits the normal symbol or the normal symbol that is lost). The figure is stopped at (stop symbol) (step S522). Further, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the normal symbol fluctuation stop command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 in order to notify the sub-control board 90 of the fluctuation stop of the normal symbol (step S523). After that, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the stop time of the normal symbol and finishes this process (step S524). Here, the stop time of the normal symbol is 0.5 seconds.

In step S531, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the fluctuation stop time of the normal symbol has elapsed. If the stop time has not elapsed (step S531: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. That is, the stop display of the normal symbol is continued. On the other hand, when the stop time has elapsed (step S531: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs this process when the hit determination in the above (step S506) is "missing" (step S532: NO). Finish. On the other hand, in the case of "hit" in the above-mentioned hit determination (step S532: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 hits the sub-control board 90 to notify the start of the game (normal game) opening. The command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S533). Further, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the electric chew opening pattern (step S534). The opening pattern of the electric chew 22 is selected with reference to the electric chew opening pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 14A). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the electric chew 22 by using the type of the normal symbol (normal symbol stop symbol data) determined in the above (step S507) and the electric chew opening pattern determination table T8. Select a pattern. Here, for example, when the normal symbol is "hit symbol 1", "open pattern 11" is selected, and when the normal symbol is "hit symbol 4", "open pattern 14" is selected (see FIG. 14). .. After selecting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 starts the electric chew operation so as to follow the selected opening pattern (step S535), and ends this process.

In step S501 described above, when the electric chew 22 is operating (step S501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S540). The closing condition here is that the number of winnings in the electric chew 22 reaches the specified maximum number of winnings (for example, 2), or the opening time of the electric chew 22 elapses and the electric chew 22 is closed. One of the things that has been reached is satisfied. The opening time of the electric chew 22 is an opening time corresponding to the opening pattern selected in step S534 (see FIG. 14). If the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is not satisfied (step S540: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S540: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 hits the sub-control board 90 and notifies the start of the ending of the game (normal game) by the normal symbol ending. The command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S541). Further, the game control microcomputer 81 closes (closes) the electric chew 22 to stop its operation (step S542), and ends this process.

[Special operation processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the special operation process (FIG. 17: step S105). Here, the processing related to the special symbol display 41 and the big prize device (the first big prize device 31 and the second big prize device 36) is divided into five stages, and each stage is divided into five stages, each of which is "1" of "special operation status". Called "2", "3", "4", "5". When the "special operation status" is "1" (step S1301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special symbol standby process (step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, a special symbol hit determination, a special symbol variation pattern selection, and the like are executed. When the "special operation status" is "2" (step S1301: NO, step S1303: YES), the special symbol changing process is performed (step S1304). In the special symbol change processing, the output of the change stop command is executed after the change time elapses. When the "special operation status" is "3" (step S1301, S1303: NO, step S1305: YES), the special symbol determination process is performed (step S1306). In the special symbol confirmation process, the output of the opening command or the like is executed at the time of a big hit or a small hit. When the "special operation status" is "4" (step S1301, S1303, S1305: NO, step S1307: YES), the special electric accessory process 1 (big hit game) is performed (step S1308). In the special electric accessory processing 1, a jackpot game (type 2 special game) is executed. When the "special operation status" is "5" (step S1301, S1303, S1305, step S1307: NO), the special electric accessory process 2 (small hit game) is performed (step S1309). In the special electric accessory processing 2, a small hit game (type 1 special game) is executed. Details of each of the above processes will be described later. The special operation status is "1" by default.

[Special symbol standby processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 20: step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the number of reserved balls in the second starting port 21 (reserved in special figure 2) is “0” (step S1401). When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is "0" (step S1401: YES), that is, in the second special figure reserved storage area 85b, the random number value group acquired due to the winning of the second starting port 21 If there is no memory, the process proceeds to step S1407. When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is "1" or more (step S1401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 has a special symbol hit detection process (step S1402) and a special symbol variation pattern selection process (step S1403). To execute. Details of these processes will be described later. After the special symbol variation pattern selection process, the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is decremented by one (step S1404). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 clears the hold information (various random values) stored in the first storage area of the second special figure hold storage area 85b (step S1405). By the above step, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b is shifted to the reserved digested image display area side and displayed as the reserved digested image 9C. Will be done. As a result, the player can recognize that one second special figure hold has been exhausted. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step S1406). In the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing, the fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started, and the special operation status is set to “2”. The fluctuation start command (special figure 2 fluctuation start command) set in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process includes information on the special symbol stop symbol data set in the special symbol hit detection process (step S1402) and special symbol fluctuation. Information about the fluctuation pattern set in the pattern selection process (step S1403) is included.

In step S1401, when the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 is "0" (step S1401: YES), the number of reserved balls in the first starting port 20 (special figure 1 reserved) is "0" in the game control microcomputer 81. It is determined whether or not there is (step S1407). When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is "0" (step S1407: YES), that is, in the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, the random number value group acquired due to the winning of the first starting port 20 If there is no memory, the process proceeds to step S1413. When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is "1" or more (step S1407: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 has a special symbol hit detection process (step S1408) and a special symbol variation pattern selection process (step S1409). To execute. Details of these processes will be described later. After the special variation pattern selection process, the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is decremented by one (step S1410). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the storage location of the hold information (various random values) stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure hold storage area 85a to the side read from the current position. Along with shifting by one, the hold information stored in the place farthest from the read side in the first special figure hold storage area 85a is cleared (step S1411). For example, when the hold information is stored in the first to third storage areas, the hold information stored in the third storage area is cleared, and the hold information is stored in the first to fourth storage areas. If so, the hold information stored in the fourth storage area is cleared. By the above steps, the first special figure hold is digested in the order in which it was held. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9A (the rightmost reserved image 9A among the four reserved images 9A) corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a is displayed. It shifts to the reserved digested image display area side and is displayed as the reserved digested image 9C. Further, when there is hold information in the second to fourth storage areas of the first special figure hold storage area 85a, the hold image 9B corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas (the right of the four hold images 9A). The second, third, and fourth reserved images 9A) are shifted to the right by one. As a result, the player can recognize that one of the first special figure reservations has been exhausted. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step S1412). In the special figure 1 variation start process, the variation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 to start the variation display of the first special symbol, and the special operation status is set to “2” (step S1406). The fluctuation start command (special figure 1 fluctuation start command) set in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process includes information on the special symbol stop symbol data set in the special symbol hit detection process (step S1408) and special symbol fluctuation. Information about the fluctuation pattern set in the pattern selection process (step S1409) is included.

In step S1407, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is "0" (step S1407: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is a standby screen (step S1407). S1413). The standby screen is a demo screen for waiting for customers. The game control microcomputer 81 may be determined by, for example, ON / OFF of the demo screen display flag for waiting for customers. If the screen is on standby (step S1413: YES), this process ends. If it is not the standby screen (step S1413: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the customer waiting standby command for displaying the standby scene in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 after the elapse of the predetermined standby time. (Step S1414), this process is completed. As described above, according to the special symbol standby process of the present embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol based on the first special symbol hold is executed only when the second special symbol hold is "0". That is, the digestion of the second special figure hold is executed in preference to the digestion of the first special figure hold.

[Special symbol collision detection processing]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the special symbol collision determination process (FIG. 21: steps S1402 and S1408). Since the process flow of the hit determination process (step S1402) of the special figure 2 and the hit determination process (step S1408) of the special figure 1 are the same, they will be described together. In the special symbol hit determination process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a hit determination with reference to the special symbol hit determination table T1 (FIG. 9A) (step S1502). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a random number value per special symbol as a determination value. For example, in the hit determination process of the special figure 2, the random value per special symbol stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first item of the second special figure hold) of the second special figure hold storage area 85b is read out. In the hit determination process of the special figure 1, the random value per special symbol stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first item of the first special figure hold) of the first special figure hold storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is a big hit and whether or not it is a small hit by using the reference special symbol hit determination table T1 and the read special symbol per random value. In this way, the game control microcomputer 81 functions as a "win / fail determination means".

When the result of the special symbol hit determination is "big hit" (step S1503: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the big hit flag (step S1505) and determines the big hit type (step S1507). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the type random number value per special symbol as the determination value. For example, in the hit determination process of the special figure 2, the special symbol per type random value stored in the first storage area of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read out. In the hit determination process of the special figure 1, the special symbol hit type random value stored in the first storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the jackpot type based on the read special symbol hit type random value and the special symbol hit type determination table T3 (FIGS. 10 and 11). In this way, the game control microcomputer 81 functions as a "hit type selection means". After determining the jackpot type, the special symbol stop symbol data (big hit symbol) corresponding to the specified jackpot type is set in the hit type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1509), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the result of the special symbol hit determination is not "big hit" (step S1503: NO) but "small hit" (step S1510: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the small hit flag and turns on the small hit flag. (Step S1512), the small hit type is determined (step S1514). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the special symbol per type random value as the determination value, as in the case of the jackpot type determination. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the small hit type based on the read special symbol hit type random value and the special symbol hit type determination table T3 (FIGS. 10 and 11). After determining the small hit type, the special symbol stop symbol data (small hit symbol) corresponding to the specified small hit type is set in the hit type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1516), and this process is terminated.

When the result of the special symbol hit determination is not "big hit" or "small hit" but "missing" (steps S1503, S1510: NO), special symbol stop symbol data (01H) corresponding to the lost symbol is provided in the main RAM 84. It is set in the jackpot type buffer (step S1518), and this process is terminated.

[Special symbol variation pattern selection process]
23 and 24 are flowcharts of the special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 21: steps S1403 and S1409). Since the processing flow of the variation pattern selection process (step S1403) of the special figure 2 and the variation pattern selection process (step S1409) of the special figure 1 are the same, they will be described together. In the variation pattern selection process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game state is the time saving state (step S1600). Whether or not the time saving state is determined is determined by whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When the time is shortened (step S1600: YES), the process proceeds to step S1612. When the time is not shortened (step S1600: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602).

When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 selects the variation pattern by referring to the non-time saving state jackpot table in the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 12). This is done (step S1603). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the fluctuation pattern random number value as the determination value. For example, in the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 2, the variation pattern random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first item of the second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read out. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the variation pattern random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure hold) of the first special figure hold storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern using the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 and the variation pattern random value. Here, as a table for the non-time saving state jackpot, the portion corresponding to the non-time saving state jackpot in the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4 shown in FIG. 12 (in the special figure 1, the fluctuation patterns are “P1” and “P2””. The part of, in Special Figure 2, the part where the fluctuation pattern is "P14") is referred to (the address is set). From the read variation pattern random value, either "P1" or "P2" is selected as the variation pattern in Special Figure 1, and "P14" is selected as the variation pattern in Special Figure 2 regardless of the variation pattern random value.

In step S1602, when the big hit flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the small hit flag is ON (step S1604). When the small hit flag is ON (step S1604: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the non-time saving state small hit table in the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 12) for the fluctuation pattern. Make a selection (step S1605). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the fluctuation pattern random number value as the determination value in the same manner as in step S1603 described above. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern using the portion of the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 corresponding to the small hit in the non-time saving state and the variation pattern random value. Here, in the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4, the portion corresponding to the small hit in the non-time saving state is the portion where the variation pattern is "P3" in the special figure 1 and the portion where the variation pattern is "P15" in the special figure 2. Therefore, these are selected regardless of the fluctuation pattern random value.

In step S1604, when the small hit flag is OFF (step S1604: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the reach random number value is the reach establishment random number value (step S1606). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the reach random number value as the determination value. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 2, the reach random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the second special figure hold) of the second special figure hold storage area 85b is read out. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the reach random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure hold) of the first special figure hold storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the presence or absence of reach using the reach determination table T2 (FIG. 9B) and the reach random number value. Here, since it is in the non-time saving state, the reach is set based on the non-time saving state table (the part where the reach determination value (reach establishment random number value) is “0” to “13”) in the reach determination table T2. Determine the presence or absence.

When the reach random number value is the reach establishment random number value (step S1606: YES), that is, in the case of loss with reach, the game control microcomputer 81 is in the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4, and the reach is in the non-time saving state. The fluctuation pattern is selected with reference to the table for loss (step S1607). Here, as a table for the loss with reach in the non-time saving state, the part corresponding to the loss with reach in the non-time saving state in the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4 shown in FIG. 12 (in the special figure 1, the fluctuation pattern is "P4". , "P5", and in Special Figure 2, the variation pattern is "P14"). In the special figure 1, one of “P4” and “P5” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random value. In the special figure 2, “P14” is selected as the fluctuation pattern regardless of the read fluctuation pattern random value.

When the reach random number value is not the reach establishment random number value (step S1606: NO), that is, in the case of loss without reach, the game control microcomputer 81 is used in the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 to reach in a non-time saving state. None The fluctuation pattern is selected with reference to the table for loss (step S1608). Here, as a table for non-reach loss in the non-time saving state, the portion corresponding to the non-reach loss in the non-time saving state in the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4 shown in FIG. 12 (in Special Figure 1, the fluctuation pattern is "P6". , "P7", and in Special Figure 2, the variation pattern is "P15"). In the special figure 1, one of “P6” and “P7” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) in the special figure 1. In the special figure 2, “P15” is selected as the fluctuation pattern regardless of the read fluctuation pattern random value. In the special figure 1, since the fluctuation pattern selected changes depending on the number of reserved balls, the function of shortening fluctuation according to the number of reserved balls works. That is, in Special Figure 1, when the number of reserved balls is "3" to "4", more fluctuation patterns with a shorter fluctuation time are selected than when the number of reserved balls is "1" to "2". It is supposed to be done. As a result, when the number of reserved balls is large, the digestion speed of the special figure reservation can be increased.

When it is determined in step S1600 that the game state is the time saving state, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (FIG. 24: step S1612). Hereinafter, the processing of steps S1613 to S1618 is the same as the processing of steps S1603 to S1608 described above except for the following points, and thus the description thereof will be omitted. The difference between the processes of steps S1613 to S1618 and the processes of steps S1603 to S1608 is that in steps S1613, S1615, S1617, and S1618, the portion of the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 referred to is described in steps S1603, S1605, and S1607. , Different from S1608. Specifically, in steps S1603, S1605, S1607, and S1608, the table for the non-time saving state in the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 is referred to, whereas in steps S1613, S1615, S1617, and S1618, The table for the time saving state is referenced. For example, in the case of step S1615, in the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4, the portion corresponding to the small hit in the time saving state (the variation pattern is "P9" in the special figure 1 and the variation pattern is "P17" in the special figure 2). Part) is referred to. Further, for example, in the case of step S1617, in the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4, the portion corresponding to the loss with reach in the time saving state (the portion where the fluctuation pattern is “P10” in the special figure 1 and the fluctuation pattern in the special figure 2). The part of "P18") is referred to.

After selecting the variation pattern as described above, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected variation pattern (step S1630) and ends this process. The set fluctuation pattern information is included in the fluctuation start command and transmitted to the sub-control board 90 in the output process (FIG. 17: step S109). As a result, the variable display of the special symbol is started.

[Processing during special symbol change]
FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the special symbol changing process (FIG. 20: step S1304). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the special symbol variation time has elapsed and the game has ended (step S1701). The fluctuation time of the special symbol is a fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in the above-mentioned special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (FIGS. 23 and 24) (see FIG. 12). If the fluctuation time has not ended (step S1701: NO), this process ends. That is, the variation display of the special symbol started in step S1406 or S1412 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21) is continued. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time has ended (step S1701: YES), the fluctuation stop command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S1702), and the special operation status is set to "3" (step S1703). .. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing associated with the suspension of fluctuation (step S1704). For example, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbol of the special symbol display 41 at a symbol corresponding to the set special symbol stop symbol data (stop display of the special symbol). In this way, the game control microcomputer 81 functions as a "design control means". The stop display time of the special symbol can be arbitrarily set according to the lottery result of the special figure 1 or the lottery result of the special figure 2. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 finishes this process.

[Special symbol confirmation process]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the special symbol determination process (FIG. 20: step S1306). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed (step S1800). If the stop time has not elapsed (step S1800: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, when the stop time has elapsed (step S1800: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the game state management process (step S1801). The game state management process is a process for switching the game state according to the number of changes of the special symbol executed during the time saving state, and the contents will be described later. After the game state management process, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802).

When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the opening pattern of the jackpot according to the type of winning jackpot (step S1803). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the opening pattern of the large winning opening from the special figure stop symbol data with reference to the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T9 (FIG. 15), and determines the opening pattern of the determined opening opening. set. Here, regardless of the jackpot type (regardless of whether the special figure stop symbol data is 11H to 13H, 15H, 16H, 21H to 23H, 31H to 33H), the opening pattern of the winning opening is "opening pattern 21". "Is set. Set the value of the round counter together with the set of the opening pattern of the big winning opening to the number of rounds according to the type of winning big hit. The round counter counts the number of unit opening games (round games) executed during the jackpot game. Here, “15” is set in the round counter regardless of the jackpot type (FIG. 15 (B)).

After setting the open pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON (step S1804), and if it is ON (step S1804: YES), switches it to OFF (step S1805). As a result, the non-time saving state is set during the execution of the type 1 jackpot game. After that, in order to start the type 1 jackpot game, the opening command of the type 1 jackpot game is set (step S1806), and the opening of the jackpot game is started (step S1807). After that, the special operation status is set to "4" (step S1808), and this process is completed. When the special operation status is set to "4", the process shifts to the special electric accessory process 1 (big hit game).

In step S1802, when the big hit flag is OFF (step S1802: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the small hit flag is ON (step S1810). When the small hit flag is ON (step S1810: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the opening pattern of the large winning opening according to the type of the winning small hit (step S1811). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the opening pattern of the large winning opening from the special figure stop symbol data by referring to the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T9 in the same manner as in step S1803 described above. Set the open pattern. Here, for example, when the small hit type is "16R normal small hit A" (the special figure stop symbol data is "14H"), the "opening pattern 22" is set as the opening pattern of the winning opening. Further, for example, when the small hit type is "16R time reduction 5 times small hit A" (special figure stop symbol data is "24H"), "opening pattern 23" is set as the opening pattern of the winning opening. Set the value of the round counter together with the set of the opening pattern of the big winning opening to the number of rounds according to the type of winning small hit. Here, “16” is set in the round counter regardless of the small hit type (FIG. 15 (B)).

After setting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the V opening / closing member operation flag to ON (step S1812). The V opening / closing member operation flag is a flag indicating that it is a period for operating the V opening / closing member 71. In the V opening / closing member control process (FIG. 33), when the V opening / closing member operation flag is ON, the V opening / closing member 71 is operated in a predetermined operation pattern. Here, in any of the small hit games, the V opening / closing member 71 is closed as an opening for 0.01 seconds after the small hit game, then opened for 4 seconds, and then closed. When the small hit flag is ON, unlike the case where the big hit flag is ON, it is not switched to OFF even if the time saving flag is ON. After that, in order to start the small hit game, the small hit opening command is set (step S1813), and the opening of the small hit game is started (step S1814). After that, the special operation status is set to "5" (step S1815), and this process is completed. When the special operation status is set to "5", the processing shifts to the special electric accessory processing 2 (small hit game).

In step S1810, when the small hit flag is OFF (step S1810: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "1" (step S1820), and ends this process. As a result, neither the big hit game nor the small hit game is started, and the process proceeds to the special symbol standby process (FIG. 20: step S1302) again, and the special symbol hit determination for the next hold is executed.

[Game status management process]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the game state management process (FIG. 26: step S1801). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When the time saving flag is OFF (step S2005: NO), that is, in the non-time saving state, the process skips to step S2040. When the time saving flag is ON (step S2005: YES), that is, when the time saving state is set, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the change is a change of the second special symbol (step S2010). When the fluctuation is a fluctuation of the second special symbol (step S2010: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the values of the first time reduction counter C1 and the second time reduction counter C2 by one (step). S2015). The "first time saving counter C1" counts the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol executed during the time saving state. The "second time saving counter C2" counts the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed during the time saving state (the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol). The initial values set in the first time saving counter C1 and the second time saving counter C2 are determined in the game state setting process (FIG. 29) described later based on the setting table of FIG. 30. On the other hand, when the fluctuation is the fluctuation of the first special symbol (step S2010: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements only the value of the second time reduction counter C2 (step S2020).

The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not at least one of the values of the first time saving counter C1 and the second time saving counter C2 becomes "0" as a result of step S2015 or step S2020 (step). S2030). If neither the value of the first time saving counter C1 nor the value of the second time saving counter C2 is "0" (step S2030: NO), the process skips to step S2040. When at least one value of the first time saving counter C1 and the second time saving counter C2 is "0" (step S2030: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2035). As a result, the gaming state can be switched from the time saving state to the non-time saving state. That is, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed in the time saving state reaches the number of times shown in FIG. 30, the gaming state is switched to the non-time saving state.

In step S2040, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state designation command includes information on the currently set current game state (whether or not it is in the time saving state, the respective values of the first time saving counter and the second time saving counter, and the like).

[Special electric accessory processing 1 (big hit game)]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the special electric accessory process 1 (FIG. 20: step S1308). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200). The "big hit end flag" is a flag indicating that all the opening of the first big winning device 31 based on the opening pattern has been completed in the big hit game currently being executed. When the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the process proceeds to step S2230. When the jackpot end flag is OFF (step S2200: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the first jackpot 30 is open (step S2202). If it is open (step S2202: YES), the process proceeds to step S2210.

When the first big winning opening 30 is not open (step S2202: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is the time (timing) to open the first big winning opening 30 (step S2203). .. The time (timing) for opening the first prize opening 30 is, for example, when the opening time of the jackpot game elapses and the opening time in the first round game is reached, or when the opening is temporarily closed after opening. This includes the time when the interval time (closing time) until the first large winning opening 30 is opened again has elapsed and the time for starting the opening again has been reached. If it is not the time (timing) to open the first large winning opening 30 (step S2203: NO), the process proceeds to step S2220.

When it is time (timing) to open the first special winning opening 30 (step S2203: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the large winning opening opening process (step S2207). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the first large winning opening 30 according to the opening pattern (FIG. 15B) according to the hit type (big hit type or small hit type). When the type 1 jackpot game is being executed, the first jackpot 30 is opened according to the opening pattern 21 regardless of the jackpot type. When the two-kind big hit game is being executed, the first big winning opening 30 is opened according to the opening pattern 22 or the opening pattern 23 according to the small hit type. After the large winning opening opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round designation command (step S2208). The round designation command includes information on the number of rounds of the special game (small hit game and big hit game) being executed, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84. To do. As a result, the number of rounds of the special game can be notified to the sub control board 90. In this embodiment, the first large winning opening 30 is not opened a plurality of times during one round game. However, as another embodiment, when the first large winning opening 30 is opened a plurality of times during one round game, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the first large winning opening 30 by 1. It may be determined whether or not it is the first opening in the round, and the round designation command may be set only in the case of the first opening. After setting the round specification command, this process ends.

In step S2202 described above, when the first large winning opening 30 is open (step S2202: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the first large winning opening 30 is satisfied. This is done (step S2210). The closing condition here is that the number of winnings in the first large winning opening 30 in the round game has reached the specified maximum number of winnings (for example, 9 per round), or the first large winning opening 30 is used. It means that one of the times when the closing time is reached (that is, a predetermined opening time (for example, 29.5 seconds) has elapsed since the opening of the first large winning opening 30) is satisfied. Then, when the closing condition of the first special winning opening 30 is not satisfied (step S2210: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the first prize opening 30 is satisfied (step S2210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (closes) the first prize opening 30 (step S2211), and then the present Finish the process.

In step S2203 described above, if it is not the time (timing) for opening the first large winning opening 30, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is completed (step S2220). Here, one round ends after a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed from the closing of the first large winning opening 30. This is because, as described above, the closing time (interval time) of the first large winning opening 30 between the round games is included in the open round game before the closing. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is completed depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time has elapsed since the first large winning opening 30 was closed. If the round game is not completed (step S2220: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

When the round game is completed (step S2220: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the value of the round counter by 1 (step S2221), and whether or not the value of the round counter becomes "0". Is determined (step S2226). If the value of the round counter is not "0" (step S2226: NO), that is, if the specified number of round games has not yet been exhausted, this process ends in order to start the next round game. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter is "0" (step S2226: YES), the ending command of the jackpot game is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 as the jackpot end process for ending the jackpot game (step S2227). , The ending of the jackpot is started (step S2228). The ending command includes information on the special symbol stop symbol data set in the special symbol hit detection process (FIG. 21). After the start of the jackpot ending, the jackpot end flag is set to ON (step S2229) to end this process.

In step S2200 described above, when the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the final round has ended, so that the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot ending time has elapsed. This is done (step S2230). If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2230: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the ending time has elapsed (step S2230: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the jackpot end flag (step S2231), turns off the jackpot flag (step S2232), and sets the special operation status. Is set to "1" (step S2233). As a result, in the next special operation process, the special symbol standby process (FIG. 20: step S1302) is executed again. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the game state setting process (step S2234) described later, and ends this process. The game state setting process (FIG. 29) sets the game state (time saving state or non-time saving state) after the big hit game, and in the case of the time saving state, the first time saving counter C1 and the second time saving according to the hit type. This is a process of setting an initial value (number of time reductions) in the counter C2.

[Game status setting process]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the game state setting process (FIG. 28: step S2234). The game control microcomputer 81 functions as a "game state control means" by executing the above-mentioned game state management process (FIG. 27) and the game state setting process. In the game control microcomputer 81, first, the jackpot game executed this time is a time saving hit (that is, "15R time saving 5 times big hit", "15R time saving 15 times big hit", "15R time saving 99 times big hit", "16R time saving 5 times small". It is determined whether or not the game is a big hit game executed with the "hit", "16R time reduction 10 times small hit", "16R time reduction 15 times small hit", "16R time reduction 99 times small hit") as an opportunity (step S2301). .. If the time saving hit is not the trigger (step S2301: NO), that is, if the current jackpot game is executed triggered by the normal hit (that is, "16R normal small hit"), the process skips to step S2309. On the other hand, when the current jackpot game is executed with the time saving hit as an opportunity (step S2301: YES), the time saving flag is turned ON (step S2302), and the game control microcomputer 81 uses the first time saving counter C1 and the second time saving. The set values shown in the setting table (FIG. 30) described later are set in the counter C2 (step S2303). As a result, the game state after the big hit game this time is set to the "time saving state and high base state". This "time saving state and high base state" is a condition that the variable display of the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times, or that the next jackpot (1st class jackpot or 2nd class jackpot) is won. It ends with the establishment of. In step S2309, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state designation command includes information on the currently set game state (whether or not it is in the time saving state, the respective values of the first time saving counter C1 and the second time saving counter C2, and the like).

FIG. 30 is a diagram for explaining a setting table of the first time saving counter C1 and the second time saving counter C2. This setting table is referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in step S2303 of the game state setting process (FIG. 29) described above. In FIG. 30, for example, when the jackpot game executed this time is executed with the trigger of "15R time reduction 99 times jackpot" or "16R time reduction 99 times small hit" (special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "12H"". , "15H", "25H", "37H"), "99" is set in each of the first time saving counter C1 and the second time saving counter C2. Further, for example, when the big hit game executed this time is executed with "16R time reduction 10 times small hit" as an opportunity (when the special figure stop symbol data is "35H"), "10" is set in the first time reduction counter C1. It is set, and "15" is set in the second time reduction counter C2.

[Special electric accessory processing 2 (small hit game)]
31 and 32 are flowcharts of the special electric accessory process 2 (FIG. 20: step S1309). The game control microcomputer 81 functions as a "hit game execution means" by executing the above-mentioned special electric accessory process 1 (big hit game: FIG. 28) and the special electric accessory process 2 (small hit game). To do. The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the small hit end flag is ON (step S2400). The "small hit end flag" is a flag indicating that the opening of the second large winning device 36 based on the opening pattern has been completed in the small hit game being executed. When the small hit end flag is ON (step S2400: YES), the process proceeds to step S2420. When the small hit end flag is OFF (step S2400: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the second large winning opening 35 is open (step S2402). If it is open (step S2402: YES), the process proceeds to step S2410.

When the second big winning opening 35 is not open (step S2402: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is time (timing) to open the second big winning opening 35 (step S2404). .. The time (timing) for opening the second large winning opening 35 is when the opening time of the small hit has elapsed and the opening start time has been reached. The opening time of the small hit is 4 seconds in the case of the opening pattern 22 and 0.01 seconds in the case of the opening pattern 23. If it is not the time (timing) to open the second large winning opening 35 (step S2404: NO), this process ends. When it is time (timing) to open the second special winning opening 35 (step S2404: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the large winning opening opening process (step S2406). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the second large winning opening 35 according to the opening pattern (FIG. 15B) according to the small hit type. After the large winning opening opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round designation command (step S2408). The round designation command includes information on the number of rounds of the special game being executed, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84. As a result, the number of rounds of the special game can be notified to the sub control board 90. After setting the round specification command, this process ends.

In step S2402 described above, when the second large winning opening 35 is open (step S2402: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the second large winning opening 35 is satisfied. This is done (step S2410). The closing conditions here are that the number of winnings in the second major winning opening 35 has reached the specified maximum number of winnings (for example, 10), or that it is time to close the second major winning opening 35. (That is, a predetermined opening time (for example, 1.5 seconds) has elapsed since the opening of the second special winning opening 35) is satisfied. When the closing condition of the second special winning opening 35 is not satisfied (step S2410: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the second special winning opening 35 is satisfied (step S2410: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (closes) the second special winning opening 35, so that the large winning opening closing process is performed. This is done (step S2412). Here, as a small hit end process for ending the small hit game, the ending command of the small hit game is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84. After the big winning opening closing process, the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the value of the round counter by 1 (step S2414). This is because the small hit game corresponds to the 1st round. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the small hit end flag to ON (step S2416), and ends this process.

In step S2400 described above, when the small hit end flag is ON (step S2400: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the interval time (ending time) after closing has elapsed (step S2420). ). If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2420: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the ending time has elapsed (step S2420: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the small hit end flag to OFF (step S2422) and switches the small hit flag to OFF (step S2424). After that, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the V flag is ON (step S2430). The “V flag” is a flag indicating that the game ball has passed through the V region 39 during the execution of the small hit game, and is a flag that is turned ON in the V region sensor detection process (FIG. 34) described later. .. When the V flag is OFF (step S2430: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 does not execute the two-kind jackpot game, so the round counter is set to "0" (step S3432) and the special operation status is set to "1". (Step S2434), and this process is completed. As a result, in the next special operation process, the special symbol standby process (FIG. 20: step S1302) is executed again.

In step S2430 described above, when the V flag is ON (step S2430: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the V flag to OFF (step S2436), and the jackpot flag is used to execute the two-kind jackpot game. Is switched to ON (step S2437), and the special operation status is set to "4" (step S2438). When the special operation status is set to "4", the process shifts to the special electric accessory process 1 (big hit game) in the next special operation process (FIG. 20). After setting the special operation status, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON (step S2440), and if it is ON (step S2440: YES), switches it to OFF (step S2442). As a result, the non-time saving state is set during the execution of the two-kind jackpot game. After that, in order to start the jackpot game, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the opening command of the two types of jackpot games (step S2444), and starts the opening of the jackpot game (step S2446). As a result, the small hit game in which the second big winning opening 35 is opened for a short time is shifted to the two-kind big hit game.

[V opening / closing member control process]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the V opening / closing member control process (FIG. 17: step S106). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the V opening / closing member operation flag is ON (step S2500). When the V opening / closing member operation flag is OFF (step S2500: NO), this process ends. When the V opening / closing member operation flag is ON (step S2500: YES), the "V opening / closing member operation process" for operating the V opening / closing member 71 in a predetermined operation pattern is performed (step S2502), and in a predetermined period (timing). Perform the "V validity period setting process" in which the V passage of the game ball is regarded as valid (step S2504). When the V opening / closing member operation flag is ON, the opening of the small hit game is started (FIGS. 26: steps S1812 and S1814). Therefore, the V opening / closing member operation process and the V validity period setting process are performed according to the small hit game. It will be done.

In the V opening / closing member operation processing, a timer for measuring the operating time of the V opening / closing member 71 is set, and based on the timer, the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is turned on when the opening timing of the V opening / closing member 71 comes. , When the closing timing of the V opening / closing member 71 comes, the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is turned off. As a result, the V opening / closing member 71 moves in a constant motion from the start of the opening of the small hit game. Specifically, the V opening / closing member 71 is first controlled to the passage blocking state (closed state) for 0.01 seconds from the start of the opening of the small hit game, and then to the passing allowable state (open state) for 4 seconds. Then, it is controlled to the passage blocking state (closed state) for 6 seconds.

In the V validity period setting process, the V validity period is set for the constant operation of the V opening / closing member 71 as described above. The "V valid period" is a period in which when the V region sensor 39a detects a game ball, the detection is regarded as valid and the V flag is turned on. The V valid period is from the start of opening the V region 39 (when the control of the V opening / closing member 71 is started to allow passage) to the elapse of a predetermined time. The predetermined time is set to be longer than the opening time of the V region 39 (the time for controlling the V opening / closing member 71 to pass through) (here, the opening time of the V region 39 + 1 second). This is because the time lag until the game ball that has passed the arrangement position of the V opening / closing member 71 reaches the V region 39 is taken into consideration. In the V valid period setting process, a timer for measuring the V valid period is set, and based on the timer, the V valid flag is turned ON when it is time to enable the V area 39, and the V area 39 is set. When it is time to disable it, the V valid flag is turned off. In the V region sensor detection process (FIG. 34) described later, it is determined whether or not the V valid period is in effect depending on whether or not the V valid flag is ON.

After the V opening / closing member operation processing and the V validity period setting processing, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the operation of the V opening / closing member 71 is completed (step S2506). Specifically, the total operating time (0.01 seconds + 4 seconds + 6 seconds) from the start to the end of the constant operation of the V opening / closing member 71 based on the timer set in the V opening / closing member operation processing (step S2502). ) Has passed. When the operation of the V opening / closing member 71 is not completed (step S2506: NO), this process is completed. On the other hand, when the operation of the V opening / closing member 71 is completed (step S2506: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the V opening / closing member operation flag to OFF (step S2508), and ends this process.

Here, the relationship between the operation pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 and the opening pattern of the second large winning opening 35 (opening / closing member 32) in the small hit game will be described. As described above, the V opening / closing member 71 is closed for 0.01 seconds from the start of the opening of the small hit game, then opened for 4 seconds, and then closed for 6 seconds. In the "16R normal small hit" (opening pattern 22), the second big winning opening 35 is closed for 4 seconds from the start of the small hit game opening, then opened for 1.6 seconds, and then 4.41. Closed for seconds. Therefore, in the opening pattern 22 of "16R normal small hit", the V opening / closing member 71 closes 0.01 seconds after the second big winning opening 35 is opened, and the V passing of the game ball during the small hit game. Is virtually impossible. On the other hand, in "16R time reduction 5 times small hit", "16R time reduction 10 times small hit", "16R time reduction 15 times small hit", "16R time reduction 99 times small hit" (open pattern 23), the second big winning opening 35 Is closed for 0.01 seconds from the start of the small hit game opening, then opened for 1.6 seconds, and then closed for 3 seconds. Therefore, in the opening pattern 23, the second big winning opening 35 and the V opening / closing member 71 are opened at the same time 0.01 seconds after the small hit game is started, and both of them continue to be opened for 1.6 seconds, and the second big winning is won. The V opening / closing member 71 closes 2.4 seconds after the mouth 35 is closed. Therefore, no matter what timing the game ball wins in the second large winning opening 35, the game ball can pass through the V region 39. Here, if the game ball is continuously fired by hitting right, the game ball will always win the second prize opening 35 during the opening period of the second prize opening 35. Each device such as the grand prize device 36 is arranged. Further, the time required for the game ball passing through the second special winning opening 35 to reach the arrangement position of the V opening / closing member 71 is configured to be shorter than 2 seconds. From this, in "16R time reduction 5 times small hit", "16R time reduction 10 times small hit", "16R time reduction 15 times small hit", "16R time reduction 99 times small hit", right-handed during the small hit game If the game ball is continuously fired, the game ball always passes through V.

[V area sensor detection process]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the V region sensor detection process (FIG. 17: step S107). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the game ball has been detected by the V region sensor 39a (step S2601). If the V-region sensor 39a does not detect the game ball (step S2601: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if there is detection (step S2601: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is in the V valid period (step S2602). The V valid period is a period set by the V valid period setting process (step S2504) of the V opening / closing member control process (FIG. 33). The V valid period is set to a few seconds (ball brush period) when the V opening / closing member 71 is opened or closed. Here, 1 second is set as the ball brush period. If it is not during the V valid period (step S2602: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, when the V valid period is in effect (step S2602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the V flag (step S2603) and sets the V pass command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2602: YES). Step S2604), this process is completed. The "V passage command" is a command for notifying the sub control board 90 of V passage.

7. Operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 The operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 (FIG. 5) will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 43. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. that appear in the operation description of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the sub RAM 94. As described below, the effect control microcomputer 91 functions as an effect execution means by reading the program stored in the sub ROM 93.

[Sub-control main processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the sub-control main process. When the power of the game machine 1 is turned on, the effect control microcomputer 91 reads a program for executing the sub control main process from the sub ROM 93. In the sub-control main process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first performs the CPU initialization process (step S4000). In the CPU initialization process, for example, the sub CPU 92 is set, various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are reset. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". The CPU initialization process is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed after that.

After the CPU initialization process, the effect control microcomputer 91 prohibits the interrupt of the interrupt process (step S4015) and performs the random number update process (step S4020). In this random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 updates by adding 1 to the various random number counter values shown in FIG. 8 (B). When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be randomly changed. Further, the random value may be added by 2 or more in addition to being added by 1. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number.

After the random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 permits the interrupt of the interrupt process (step S4025). While the interrupt is enabled, the sub-timer interrupt process (step S4035) can be executed. The sub-side timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the sub CPU 92 at a predetermined cycle. That is, the sub-side timer interrupt processing is executed at predetermined intervals. Then, the random number update process is repeatedly executed from the end of the sub-side timer interrupt process to the start of the next sub-side timer interrupt process.

[Sub-timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the sub-side timer interrupt process (FIG. 35: step S4035). The effect control microcomputer 91 first performs a reception command analysis process (step S4300). The details of the received command analysis process (FIG. 37) will be described later. After the received command analysis process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a switch process (step S4310). In the switch processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the display contents of the display screen 7a based on the switch data (edge data and level data) output based on the detection signal from the effect button detection switch 63a. .. After the switch processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a command transmission processing (step S4315). In the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets various commands set in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub RAM 94 in the received command analysis process (FIG. 37) or the like in the image control board 100, the voice control board 106, and the like. It is transmitted to the lamp control board 107. The image control board 100 that has received various commands uses the image display device 7 to execute a display effect according to the received commands. Further, the voice control board 106 that has received various commands executes a voice effect that outputs voice from the speaker 67 in response to the received commands. The lamp control board 107 that has received various commands executes a lamp effect that controls light emission of the panel lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 in response to the received commands. After the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processes (step S4320), and ends this process. In other processing, for example, random number update processing and the like are performed.

[Received command analysis processing]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the received command analysis process (FIG. 36: step 4300). The effect control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not a pre-determination command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4415). When receiving (step S4415: YES), the look-ahead effect determination process is performed (step S4420). The “look-ahead effect determination process” is a process for determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect and the look-ahead effect pattern when the look-ahead effect is executed. In the look-ahead effect determination process, the look-ahead effect execution determination for determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect and the look-ahead effect pattern selection are performed. Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the counter value of the look-ahead effect random number, and refers to the acquired random number value and the look-ahead effect pattern determination table T55 stored in the sub ROM 93 to perform the look-ahead effect. Determine whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect, and determine the look-ahead effect pattern when performing the look-ahead effect. When it is determined that the look-ahead effect is executed, the selected look-ahead effect pattern is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c.

On the other hand, when the pre-determination command is not received from the main control board 80 (step S4415: NO), the pre-reading effect determination process described above is skipped. The look-ahead effect is an effect that suggests that the hold information newly stored in the special figure hold storage area 85 is likely to include a jackpot, and is executed during the variable effect.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4445). When receiving (step S4445: YES), hold display processing is performed (step S4450). In the hold display process, the counter set area 94d of the sub RAM 94 is provided based on the information regarding the special figure 1 hold ball number, the special figure 2 hold ball number, and the normal symbol hold ball number included in the hold ball number command. The values of the first special figure hold effect counter, the second special figure hold effect counter, and the normal figure hold effect counter are updated. As a result, information on the number of reserved balls can be held not only on the main control board 80 side but also on the sub control board 90 side. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 has a hold image 9A displayed on the display screen 7a based on the values of the first special figure hold effect counter, the second special figure hold effect counter, and the normal figure hold effect counter. Update 9B. On the other hand, when the hold ball number command has not been received (step S4445: NO), the above-mentioned hold display process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a fluctuation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4455). When receiving (step S4455: YES), the variation effect start process (FIG. 38) is performed (step S4460). The "variation effect start process" is a process of selecting a variation effect pattern (content) to be executed during the special symbol variation. The details of the variable effect start processing will be described later.
On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4455: NO), the above-mentioned variation effect start process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4465). When receiving (step S4465: YES), the variation effect end process (FIG. 39) is performed (step S4470). The “variation effect end process” is a process for stopping the variation effect, and the details will be described later. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4465: NO), the above-mentioned variation effect end process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the opening command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4475). When receiving (step S4475: YES), the opening effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4480). The "opening effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an opening effect pattern (content) to be executed at the start of a special game (big hit game or small hit game). In the opening effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the opening command, and substituting the information regarding the special figure stop symbol data included in the opening command and set at the time of winning determination for the big hit or the small hit. Set in RAM 94. Then, the effect pattern of the opening effect set in advance corresponding to the hit type indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and the opening effect start command for starting the selected opening effect is set in the effect command set area of the sub RAM 94. Set to 94b. When the opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step 4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 outputs a predetermined opening effect image to the ROM 103. Is read from the image display device 7 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (for example, FIG. 45). If the opening command has not been received in step S4475 (step S4475: NO), the above-mentioned opening effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a round designation command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4485). When receiving (step S4485: YES), the round effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4490). The "round effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an open game effect pattern (content) to be executed during the opening of the big winning opening or during the interval between openings in the special game (big hit game or small hit game). In the round effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the round designation command, and sets the information regarding the special figure stop symbol data and the information regarding the number of rounds included in the round designation command in the sub RAM 94. To do. Then, a preset round effect effect pattern is selected according to the hit type and the number of rounds indicated by the special figure stop symbol data, and a round effect start command for starting the selected round effect is issued by the sub RAM 94. Set in the command set area 94b. When the round effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined round effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. If the round designation command has not been received in step S4485 (step S4485: NO), the above-mentioned round effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the ending command of the jackpot game has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4495). When receiving (step S4495: YES), the ending effect pattern determination process (FIG. 40) is performed (step S4500). The "ending effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an ending effect pattern (content) to be executed during the ending of the jackpot game. The details of the ending effect pattern determination process will be described later. When the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the ending command of the small hit game from the main control board 80, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a process different from the above-mentioned ending effect pattern determination process. If the ending command of the jackpot game has not been received in step S4495 (step S4495: NO), the above-mentioned ending effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a normal symbol variation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4505). If it has been received (step S4505: YES), the normal symbol variation effect start process is performed (step S4510). The "normal symbol variation effect start process" is a process of selecting a normal symbol variation effect pattern (content) to be executed during the normal symbol variation. In the normal symbol variation effect start process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first sets the information about the normal symbol stop symbol data included in the normal symbol variation start command and the information about the normal symbol variation pattern (FIG. 13) in the sub RAM 94. To do. The set information includes game state information indicating the current game state, symbol information indicating a symbol as a determination result of the hit determination process of the normal figure, and the like. The game state information and the symbol information acquired here can be appropriately referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91. The effect control microcomputer 91 selects a preset normal symbol variation effect pattern corresponding to the normal symbol variation pattern, and issues a normal symbol variation effect start command for starting the selected normal symbol variation effect in the sub RAM 94. It is set in the effect command set area 94b. When the normal symbol variation effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined normal symbol variation effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. Here, when the hit type is "long opening 1" or "short opening 1" in the non-time saving state, the effect control microcomputer 91 executes the "expected effect of V" (FIG. 44) described later. .. If the normal symbol variation start command is not received in step S4505 (step S4505: NO), the above-mentioned normal symbol variation effect start process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a normal symbol fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4515). If it has been received (step S4515: YES), the normal symbol variation effect end process is performed (step S4520). The "normal symbol variation effect end process" is a process for stopping the normal symbol variation effect. In the normal symbol variation effect end process, the effect control microcomputer 91 analyzes the normal symbol variation stop command and sets the normal symbol variation effect end command for ending the normal symbol variation effect in the effect command set area 94b. .. If the normal symbol variation stop command is not received in step S4515 (step S4515: NO), the above-mentioned normal symbol variation effect end process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a normal symbol opening command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4525). When receiving (step S4525: YES), the normal symbol opening effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4530). The "ordinary symbol opening effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting a normal game effect pattern (content) to be executed at the time of a hit game (ordinary game) accompanying the winning of the ordinary symbol. The normal game effect selected here includes an opening effect executed during the opening and an open game effect executed during the opening of the electric chew 22. In the normal symbol opening effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the normal symbol opening command, and relates to the normal symbol stop symbol data included in the normal symbol opening command and set at the time of winning determination of the normal symbol. The information is set in the sub RAM 94. Then, the effect pattern of the opening effect set in advance corresponding to the hit type indicated by the normal symbol stop symbol data is selected, and the effect command of the sub RAM 94 is the normal symbol opening effect start command for starting the selected opening effect. Set in the set area 94b. When the normal symbol opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step 4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 sends a predetermined opening effect image. Is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. If the normal symbol opening command has not been received in step S4525 (step S4525: NO), the above-mentioned normal symbol opening effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a normal symbol ending command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4535). When receiving (step S4535: YES), the normal symbol ending effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4540). The "ordinary symbol ending effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an ending effect pattern (content) to be executed during the ending of the winning game (ordinary game) accompanying the winning of the ordinary symbol. In the normal symbol ending effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the normal symbol ending command, and sets the information related to the normal symbol stop symbol data included in the normal symbol ending command in the sub RAM 94. Then, the effect pattern of the ending effect set in advance corresponding to the hit type indicated by the normal symbol stop symbol data is selected, and the normal symbol ending effect start command for starting the selected ending effect is the effect command of the sub RAM 94. Set in the set area 94b. When the normal symbol ending effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step 4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 sends a predetermined ending effect image. Is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. If the normal symbol ending command has not been received in step S4535 (step S4535: NO), the above-mentioned normal symbol ending effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4545). In other processing, for example, when the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the game state designation command, the information regarding the game state included in the game state designation command (whether or not it is in the time saving state, the first time saving counter and the second time saving) (Each value of the counter, etc.) is held in the sub RAM 94. Further, when the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the V pass command, the RAM 94 holds the V pass information. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs processing based on commands other than the above (customer waiting standby command, advance determination command, RAM clear notification command, etc.), and ends this processing. The effect control microcomputer 91 functions as an “effect execution means” by executing the variable effect end process (step S4470) and the opening effect pattern determination process (step S4480).

[Variation production start processing]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the variation effect start process (FIG. 37: step S4460). The effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the fluctuation start command (step S5000). Here, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the information regarding the special figure stop symbol data included in the fluctuation start command and the information regarding the fluctuation pattern in the sub RAM 94. The set information includes game state information indicating the current game state, symbol information indicating a symbol as a determination result of the hit determination process of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, and the like. The game state information and the symbol information acquired here can be appropriately referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 refers to the mode status M (step S5005). The "mode status M" indicates the effect mode to be executed. The effect mode here is a mode of effect in the image display device 7, and if the effect mode is different, the images (characters and items appearing, background images, etc.) displayed on the image display device 7 are different, and the effect is variable. Is also executed in a mode according to the effect mode. Here, "1" and "2" are set as the mode status M, "1" corresponds to the non-time saving state, and "2" corresponds to the time saving state. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether the mode status M is “1” or “2”.

When the mode status M is "2" (step S5010: YES), that is, in the time saving state, the effect control microcomputer 91 refers to the time saving effect scenario (step S5025). The "time saving effect scenario" is the time saving remaining number displayed on the image display device 7 in the "countdown effect" (FIG. 47) described later, which is executed in the time saving state after the jackpot game (hereinafter, "display time saving remaining number"). Shows the change scenario of. The time saving effect scenario is determined in the ending effect pattern determination process (FIG. 40) described later. Here, the "remaining number of time reductions" is the remaining number of fluctuation displays of the second special symbol that can be executed in the time reduction state after the jackpot game, and the number of fluctuation displays of the second special symbol that has already been executed in the time reduction state is It is the remaining number of times until the number of time reductions set according to the hit type is reached. The number of remaining time reductions corresponds to the value of the first time reduction counter C1 on the main control unit side. When the number of remaining time reductions reaches "0", the game state is switched from the time reduction state to the non-time reduction state (FIG. 27: steps S2030 and S2035). The game machine 1 of the present embodiment performs an effect of making the remaining number of display time reductions displayed on the image display device 7 different from or matching the actual remaining number of time reductions, based on the time reduction effect scenario. A specific embodiment will be described later. Here, the effect control microcomputer 91 specifies the number of remaining display time reductions to be displayed on the image display device 7 this time by referring to the time reduction effect scenario. Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 specifies the number of remaining display time reductions to be displayed this time from the value of the first time reduction effect counter JC1 and the time reduction effect scenario, which will be described later. When the mode status M is "1" (step S5010: NO), that is, in the non-time saving state, the effect control microcomputer 91 skips the reference to the time saving effect scenario.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a variation effect pattern determination process (step S5015). In the variation effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first acquires the variation effect pattern random value for effect determination. Then, from the variation effect pattern determination table T51 stored in the sub ROM 93, the mode status M, the variation pattern indicated by the variation start command, the variation effect pattern random value, the number of remaining display time reductions specified at the time reduction, and the special effect flag. Set the variable effect pattern corresponding to ON / OFF of. The "special effect flag" is a flag indicating whether or not to execute the "one-time effect of crying" (FIG. 48), which will be described later, and is set in the flag set area of the sub RAM 94. When the special effect flag is ON, the effect control microcomputer 91 switches it to OFF and executes "one-time effect of crying" as a variable effect. On the other hand, when the special effect flag is OFF and the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation start command is "P12" to "P15", that is, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol in the non-time saving state is the fluctuation, the "V card" described later "Shuffle production" (Fig. 44 (G)) is performed. When the mode status M is "2", the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a "countdown effect" (FIG. 47) described later. Since the effect control microcomputer 91 performs this countdown effect, it functions as a "number display effect execution means".

The effect control microcomputer 91 is further stopped by referring to the contents of the so-called step-up advance notice effect, the chance-up advance notice effect, and the stop symbol pattern determination table T52 based on the variable effect pattern random value. The combination of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R to be displayed is determined. From these, what kind of production is performed as a variable production is determined.

The effect control microcomputer 91 sets the variation effect start command in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub RAM 94 so that the variation effect based on the variation effect pattern determined in step S5015 is realized (step S5020). ), End this process. When the variation effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b of the subRAM 94 is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step 4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 causes a predetermined variation effect. The image is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Fluctuating production end processing]
FIG. 39 is a flowchart of the variation effect end process (FIG. 37: step S4470). The effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the fluctuation stop command (step S5100) and refers to the mode status M (step S5105). When the mode status M is "1" (step S5110: YES), the process skips to step S5140. When the mode status M is "2" (step S5110: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the fluctuation is a fluctuation of the second special symbol (step S5115). The effect control microcomputer 91 can determine whether the fluctuation is the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the fluctuation of the second special symbol from the information about the fluctuation pattern set in the sub RAM 94. When the fluctuation is a fluctuation of the second special symbol (step S5115: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the values of the first time reduction effect counter JC1 and the second time reduction effect counter JC2 by one. (Step S5120). The "first time saving effect counter JC1" counts the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol executed during the time saving state on the sub control unit side, and is used as the "first time saving counter C1" on the main control unit side. It corresponds. The "second time saving effect counter JC2" is the number of times the special symbol changes (the total number of times the first special symbol changes and the number of times the second special symbol changes) executed during the time saving state on the sub-control unit side. It counts and corresponds to the "second time reduction counter C2" on the main control unit side. The initial values set in the first time saving effect counter JC1 and the second time saving effect counter JC2 are determined by the ending effect pattern determination process (FIG. 40) described later. On the other hand, when the fluctuation is a fluctuation of the first special symbol (step S5115: NO), only the value of the second time saving effect counter JC2 is decremented by 1 (step S5125).

The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not at least one of the values of the first time saving effect counter JC1 and the second time saving effect counter JC2 becomes "0" as a result of step S5120 or step S5125. (Step S5130). If neither the value of the first time saving effect counter JC1 nor the value of the second time saving effect counter JC2 is "0" (step S5130: NO), the process skips to step S5140. When at least one value of the first time saving effect counter JC1 and the second time saving effect counter JC2 is "0" (step S5130: YES), the mode status M is switched to "1" (step S5135). When the mode status M is switched to "1", the effect control microcomputer 91 also determines whether or not there is a special figure 2 hold, and if there is a special figure 2 hold, sets a special effect flag. Switch to ON. As a result, if there is a special figure 2 hold when shifting from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state, the "one-time crying effect" (FIG. 48) described later is executed as the first variation effect in the non-time-saving state. .. In step S5130, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether the time saving state or the non-time saving state is determined from the information about the game state held in the sub RAM 94, and in the non-time saving state, the mode status M is set to "" in S5135. It may be configured to switch to "1". The information regarding the game state held in the sub RAM 94 is updated when the game state designation command is received from the main control board 80. In step S5140, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a variation effect end command for ending the variation effect. As a result, the changing decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. After that, this process ends.

[Ending effect pattern determination process]
FIG. 40 is a flowchart of the ending effect pattern determination process (FIG. 37: step S4500). The effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the ending command (step S5500). The effect control microcomputer 91 sets the information regarding the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command in the sub RAM 94. Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a mode status setting process (step S5505). The "mode status setting process" is a process of determining the effect mode after the jackpot game. In the mode status setting process, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the mode status M using the mode status M setting table described below.

FIG. 41 is a diagram for explaining the mode status setting table T53. The mode status setting table T53 is a table referred to for determining the mode status M according to the hit type (special figure stop symbol data). The effect control microcomputer 91 determines the mode status from the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command and the mode status setting table T53. For example, when determining the ending effect pattern of the two-kind jackpot game after winning the "16R normal small hit A", the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command is 14H, so the mode status M is "1". Is selected. Further, for example, when determining the ending effect pattern of the type 1 jackpot game after winning the "15R time reduction 99 times jackpot E", the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command is 33H, so it is set as the mode status M. "2" is selected.

Returning to FIG. 40, when the mode status M set in step S5505 is “1” (step S5510: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 skips the process to step S5525. On the other hand, when the set mode status M is "2" (step S5510: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 corresponds to the first time reduction effect counter JC1 and the second time reduction effect counter JC2 (special figure stop symbol data). The set values corresponding to each are set (step S5515). The set value set in the first time saving effect counter JC1 is the same as the value set in the first time saving counter C1 on the main control unit side. Further, the set value set in the second time saving effect counter JC2 is the same as the value set in the second time saving counter C2 on the main control unit side. A setting table similar to the setting table of FIG. 30 is stored in the sub ROM 93, and the effect control microcomputer 91 refers to the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command and this setting table to shorten the first time. It is possible to specify the set value to be set in the effect counter JC1 and the second time saving effect counter JC2. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "99" is set in the first time saving effect counter JC1 and the second time saving effect counter JC2, respectively. Further, for example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "35H", "10" is set in the first time saving effect counter JC1 and "15" is set in the second time saving effect counter JC2. After setting the set values in the time saving effect counters JC1 and JC2, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs the time saving effect scenario determination process (step S5520). The "time saving effect scenario determination process" is executed in the time saving state after the big hit game, and is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the later-described "countdown effect" (FIG. 47). ) Is a process for determining a change scenario. In the time-saving effect scenario determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the time-saving effect scenario using the time-saving effect scenario determination table T54 described below.

FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining the time saving effect scenario determination table T54. The time saving effect scenario determination table T54 is a table referred to for determining the time saving effect scenario according to the hit type (special figure stop symbol data) and the time saving effect scenario random value. The effect control microcomputer 91 first acquires a time-saving effect scenario random value. Then, the time saving effect scenario is determined from the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command, the acquired random number value, and the time saving effect scenario determination table T54. For example, in the case of the ending of the two-kind big hit game after winning "16R time saving 99 times small hit A" (special figure stop symbol data 25H), if the acquired time saving effect scenario random number value is "0 to 63". "Scenario B" is selected as the time saving effect scenario, and if the time saving effect scenario random value is "64 to 95", "scenario C" is selected as the time saving effect scenario, and the time saving effect scenario random value is "96 to 127". If there is, "Scenario D" is selected as the time saving production scenario. Further, for example, in the case of the ending of the type 1 jackpot game after winning the "15R time saving 5 times jackpot D" (special figure stop symbol data 31H), the time saving effect scenario is as a time saving effect scenario regardless of the acquired time saving effect scenario random value. "Scenario H" is selected.

FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining the specific contents of the time saving effect scenario. FIG. 43 shows the time saving displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the “countdown effect” (FIG. 47) executed in the time saving state after the big hit game in each time saving effect scenario (scenarios A to H). The correspondence between the remaining number of times (remaining number of times of display time reduction) and the value of the first time reduction effect counter JC1 is shown. For example, in "Scenario A", the effect control microcomputer 91 displays the same value as the value of the first time reduction effect counter JC1 on the display screen 7a as the number of remaining display time reductions. In "Scenario B", when the value of the first time reduction effect counter JC1 is "99", "5" is displayed on the display screen 7a as the number of remaining display time reductions, and then the value of the first time reduction effect counter JC1 is "96". The number of remaining display time reductions is reduced as the value of the first time reduction effect counter JC1 decreases. That is, when the value of the first time reduction effect counter JC1 changes from "99" to "96", the number of remaining display time reductions changes from "5" to "2". Then, when the first time reduction effect counter JC1 is "95", the display time reduction remaining number is set to "1", and a display suggesting that the display time reduction remaining number is increased by 94, for example, "+94" is displayed. Then, until the first time saving effect counter JC1 changes from "94" to "1", the same value as the value of the first time saving effect counter JC1 is displayed as the number of remaining display time reductions. In "Scenario E", when the value of the first time reduction effect counter JC1 is "15", "5" is displayed on the display screen 7a as the number of remaining display time reductions, and then the value of the first time reduction effect counter JC1 is "12". The number of remaining display time reductions is reduced as the value of the first time reduction effect counter JC1 decreases. That is, when the value of the first time reduction effect counter JC1 changes from "15" to "12", the number of remaining display time reductions changes from "5" to "2". Then, when the first time reduction effect counter JC1 is "11", the display time reduction remaining number is set to "1", and a display suggesting that the display time reduction remaining number is increased by 10, for example, "+10" is displayed. Then, until the first time saving effect counter JC1 changes from "10" to "1", the same value as the value of the first time saving effect counter JC1 is displayed as the number of remaining display time reductions. In this way, by making the number of remaining display time reductions different from the actual number of remaining time reductions, that is, the value of the first time reduction effect counter JC1, the player is expected that the number of remaining display time reductions may increase in the middle. be able to.

Returning to FIG. 40, in step S5525, the effect control microcomputer 91 refers to the mode status M and determines the ending effect pattern (step S5530). A plurality of types of ending effect patterns are prepared, and the ending effect pattern is determined based on the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command. The effect control microcomputer 91 sets the ending effect start command in the output buffer of the sub RAM 94 so that the ending effect based on the determined ending effect pattern is realized (step S5535), and ends this process.

8. Production example of this embodiment [Expected production of V (when a normal symbol is won in a non-time saving state)]
FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the expected effect of V. This expected effect of V is when the normal symbol is won while the special figure 1 is changing or stopped in the non-time saving state, and the hit type is "long opening 1" or "short opening 1" (see FIG. 13). Is executed. The expected effect of V is an effect that suggests whether or not the electric chew 22 is opened for a long time, and further suggests the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 2 when the game ball enters the electric chew 22. is there.

The expected effect of V is during the variable effect of special figure 1 as shown in FIG. 44 (A) using the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 when left-handed in a non-time saving state (here, a decorative pattern is used). It is executed when the game ball passes through the second gate 29 while the player is in the reach state) and is elected with a normal symbol and the hit type is selected as "long opening 1" or "short opening 1". That is, the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the normal symbol variation start command from the main control board 80 (FIG. 37: step S4505: YES), and is included in this command in the normal symbol variation effect start process (FIG. 37: step S4510). It is determined that the hit type is "long open 1" or "short open 1" from the information about the normal stop symbol data, and the variation pattern corresponding to the expected effect of V is selected to execute the command. As the expected effect of V, first, as shown in FIG. 44 (B), the display area of the variable effect corresponding to the special figure 1 is reduced and displayed in the display area HR1, and the variable effect of the special figure 1 is displayed until then. Using the region that has been performed, the expected cut-in effect of V that displays the image GA1 suggesting that the expected effect of V is started is executed. The display area HR1 is provided in one corner of the display screen 7a. In the effect of the display area HR1, the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the variation start command from the main control board 80 (FIG. 37: step S4455: YES), and in the variation start process (FIG. 37: step S4460), the variation effect start command (FIG. 38: Step S5020) is set to be executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 44 (C), a V-level challenge effect that displays an image GA2 that prompts the player to press the effect button 63 and an image GA3 that indicates an indicator capable of expressing an increase in points is executed. .. In this V level challenge effect, the player can raise the point of the indicator of the image GA3 by pressing the effect button 63 to raise the V level. In this V-level challenge effect, as shown in FIG. 44 (C), the variable effect corresponding to the special figure 1 is shown following the display area HR1.

When the hit type of the normal symbol is "Short opening 1", the indicator is displayed as shown in FIG. V that lowers the point and displays the image GA4 that suggests that the V level is down and the V level could not reach a certain level, and the image GA5 that the V level is down and suggests that the jackpot cannot be expected this time. Perform a level-down effect. In this V level down effect, as shown in FIG. 44 (D), a variable effect corresponding to the special figure 1 is shown following the display area HR1.

On the other hand, when the hit type of the normal symbol is "long opening 1", then, with the long opening of the electric chew 22 for 5 seconds (FIG. 14), as shown in FIG. 44 (E), the indicator Image GA6 that raises the point and suggests that the V level has risen and the V level has reached a certain level, and suggests that the V level has risen and moves to the next stage, and that a big hit can be expected. A V level-up effect for displaying the image GA7 is executed. In this V level-up effect, as shown in FIG. 44 (E), a variable effect corresponding to the special figure 1 is shown following the display area HR1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 44 (F), for the transition to the next stage, the image GA8 for urging the player to hit right for entering the game ball into the electric chew 22 is displayed on the right. Perform a hitting suggestion effect. In this right-handed suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 44 (F), the variation effect of the special figure 1 is shown following the display area HR1. This right-handed suggestion effect is executed until the variation effect corresponding to the special figure 1 displayed in the display area HR1 is completed. This right-handed suggestion effect is executed based on the normal symbol opening command (FIG. 37: step S4525) received from the main control board 80 by the effect control microcomputer 91.

If no ball has entered the electric chew 22, the V level down effect shown in FIG. 44 (D) described above is executed after the right-handed suggestion effect. This V level down effect is executed based on the normal symbol ending command (FIG. 37: step S4535) received from the main control board 80 by the effect control microcomputer 91. On the other hand, when one or more balls enter the electric chew 22, after the above-mentioned right-handed suggestion effect, as a variable effect of special figure 2, as shown in FIG. 44 (G), the back side in which the V card and the lost card are mixed. Shuffle the facing card Perform a V-card shuffle effect that displays the image GA9. In this case, the display area HR2 provided in one corner of the display screen 7a shows the fluctuating state of the decorative symbol. The V-card shuffle effect and the effect of the display area HR2 are executed based on the fluctuation start command received from the main control board 80 by the effect control microcomputer 91 when the second start port 21 is won.

If the result of the hit / fail judgment in Special Figure 2 is a big hit or a small hit, after the V-card shuffle effect, then, as shown in FIG. 44 (H), the three shuffled by the V-card shuffle effect. One of the cards is selected and turned over, and a V card selection effect is executed to display an image GA10 indicating that the turned card is a V card. In the display area HR2, after the reach state using the decorative symbol is shown, the doublet symbol arrangement suggesting a small hit or a type 1 big hit is stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 44 (I), the expected success effect of V that displays the image GA11 suggesting that the jackpot game is executed and the right-handed suggestion image GA12 prompting right-handed is executed. This expected success production of V suggests that the expected production of V is successful and the expectation of the jackpot (1 type jackpot or 2 type jackpot) is high, in other words, the expectation that the jackpot game is executed is high. It is a production that suggests that. This expected success effect of V is started in the display area HR2 after a predetermined time (for example, 0.01 second) has elapsed from the stop display of the doublet symbol arrangement. That is, the timing (time) from when the small hit symbol is confirmed and displayed on the special symbol display 41 until the expected success effect of V is started, and after the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed, the expected success effect of V is started. It is configured so that the timing (time) until the time is equal to. "Equal" here does not mean an exact match, and there may be an error in timing as long as the player feels that they are equal. As an error, for example, about ± 2 seconds can be exemplified. In the case of a small hit, after the expected success production of this V, the small hit game is executed, and when the player passes V by right-handed hit, two types of big hits are obtained, and the game shifts to the big hit game. As described above, in the present embodiment, when a small hit is made, the fluctuation effect is stopped, and the effect suggesting that the big hit (type 2 big hit) game is executed even though the V has not passed (FIG. 44). (I)) is started. Then, at the time of the small hit game, the effect suggesting the small hit game and the effect suggesting the passage of V are not performed. With this configuration, even in the case of a small hit, the player does not notice the small hit game and can make him think that he has won one kind of big hit. Further, in the present embodiment, when the variable effect is stopped, the same effect (FIG. 44 (I)) is started in the case of the big hit and the case of the small hit. With this configuration, it is possible to make it more difficult to distinguish between the 1st type jackpot and the 2nd type jackpot. Even if the numbers of doublets that are stopped and displayed in the display area HR2 are different between the case of a big hit and the case of a small hit, these are naturally included in the same effect. Further, in the case of the big hit and the case of the small hit, the expected success effect of V may be started before the small hit symbol or the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed.

On the other hand, if the result of the hit / fail judgment in Special Figure 2 is a loss, after the V card shuffle effect, then one of the three cards shuffled by the V card shuffle effect as shown in FIG. 44 (J). A lost card selection effect is executed in which a card is selected and turned over, and an image GA13 indicating that the flipped card is a lost card is displayed. In the display area HR2, the reach state using the decorative pattern is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 44 (K), the expected failure effect of V displaying the image GA14 suggesting that the expected effect of V is a failure, and the big hit game is not executed due to a loss without becoming a big hit or a small hit. To execute. In this case, in the display area HR2, a symbol arrangement suggesting a loss is shown using a decorative symbol. If there is a hold of special figure 2, after the expected failure effect of V, the process shifts to the V card shuffle effect (see FIG. 44 (G)) again. If there is no hold of the special figure 2, the production shifts to the normal special figure 1.

The variation effect of the special figure 2 shown in FIGS. 44 (G), (H), and (I) is an example of the effect executed when the variation pattern "P13" (FIG. 12) is selected. The variation effect of the special figure 2 shown in FIGS. 44 (G), (J), and (K) is an example of the effect executed when the variation pattern “P14” (FIG. 12) is selected.

Further, a V level challenge effect (FIG. 44 (C)), a V level down effect (FIG. 44 (D)), a V level up effect (FIG. 44 (E)), and a right-handed suggestion effect (FIG. 44 (F)). In), the variation effect of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 44 (A) is shown in the display area HR1, but there is a hold of the special figure 1 even when the variation effect corresponding to the special figure 1 is completed. In that case, the variation effect corresponding to the next special figure 1 is continuously displayed.

Further, in the expected effect of V shown in FIG. 44, the display of the reserved images 9A and 9B and the reserved digested image 9C is omitted. Further, in the effects shown in FIGS. 45 to 48 and 50 described later, the display of the reserved images 9A and 9B and the reserved digested image 9C is similarly omitted.

[Hit game production]
FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a winning game effect when the special drawing 2 lottery is won. This winning game effect is executed when a big hit or a small hit is made in the lottery of Special Figure 2. Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the opening command of the big hit game or the small hit game from the main control board 80 (FIG. 37: step S4475: YES), and in the opening effect pattern determination process (FIG. 37: step S4480). , When it is determined from the information about the special figure stop symbol data included in this command that it is a big hit or a small hit of special figure 2, it is executed by setting the corresponding opening effect start command. This hit game effect: FIG. 45 (A) shows, for example, an effect suggesting that a big hit game is executed (V expected success effect: FIG. 44 (I), V roulette success effect: FIG. 46 (C), target. Successful guessing effect: It is executed after FIG. 48 (C).

First, at the start of the big hit game associated with the type 1 big hit, or at the start of the small hit game associated with the small hit, as shown in FIG. The suggestion image GB1 and the right-handed suggestion image GB2 are displayed. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 45 (B), an image GB3 suggesting that the jackpot game is executed using a predetermined character or the like and a right-handed suggestion image GB2 are displayed.

The effects of FIGS. 45 (A) and 45 (B) are continued from the start of the jackpot game until a predetermined period (hereinafter, also referred to as “first game period”) elapses in the type 1 jackpot game. Further, in the small hit game, the small hit game is continued from the start of the small hit game until the first game period elapses. That is, in both the type 1 big hit game and the small hit game, the same content (similar) is produced during the first game period. The first game period is at least the opening time (here, 0.01 seconds) of the small hit game (opening pattern 23) and the opening time of the second big winning opening 35 (here, 1.6). It is a time equal to or longer than the total time (1.61 seconds) with (seconds). Here, the first game period is the period from the start of the small hit game to the end of the small hit game (opening time (0.01 seconds) + opening time of the second big winning opening 35 (1.6 seconds)). + Ending time (3 seconds)) of 4.61 seconds is set. When the first game period elapses from the start of the jackpot game associated with the first type jackpot, or when the first game period elapses from the start of the small hit game and the second type jackpot by passing V is confirmed. As shown in FIG. 45 (C), an image GB4 that clearly suggests that the jackpot game is in progress and a right-handed suggestion image GB2 are displayed. That is, when two types of big hits are made after the small hit game, the effects of FIGS. 45 (A), (B), and (C) are executed in the same manner as when one type of big hit is made.

On the other hand, when the first game period has elapsed from the start of the small hit game accompanying the small hit and the non-execution of the big hit game is confirmed by non-passage of V, FIG. 45 (D) is shown instead of the image GB4. As shown, the image GB5 suggesting that the jackpot game is not executed is displayed.

In the hit game production in the present embodiment, the production during the type 1 big hit game, the small hit game accompanying the small hit, and the production during the type 2 big hit game are the same (FIGS. 45 (A), (B), (Fig. 45)). C)) is configured to be. In other words, the effect from the start of the type 1 jackpot game to the end of the jackpot game and the effect from the start of the small hit game to the end of the type 2 jackpot game are configured to be the same effect. Even if the two types of big hits are not executed after the small hits associated with the small hits, at least during the small hits game, the same effect as in the case of the one type big hits (FIGS. 45 (A) and 45 (B)). ) Is performed, and after the lapse of the first game period, an effect (FIG. 45 (D)) different from that in the case of the type 1 jackpot is performed. The "similar (same) production" here means that the content should be close enough to make it difficult for the player to distinguish between the big hit and small hit productions, and the productions do not have to be exactly the same. .. For example, when some characters are different, when a part of a predetermined character's mode (for example, clothes, clothes color, equipment) is different, or when the appearance timing of a predetermined character is slightly different. Naturally, it is included in the same production. Further, in the hit game production in the present embodiment, when two types of big hits are obtained after the small hit game, the big hit game production (FIGS. 45 (A) and (B)) is started based on the fact that the V is passed by the small hit game. Instead of doing so, it is configured to start the big hit game effect at the start of the small hit game (that is, based on the final display of the small hit symbol). In other words, in the present embodiment, in the case of a small hit, an effect suggesting a small hit game (for example, an effect instructing the player to aim at V) is not performed during the small hit game. With this configuration, even in the case of a small hit, the player does not notice the small hit game and can make him think that he has won one kind of big hit. Further, in the present embodiment, the timing (time) from the confirmation display of the small hit symbol on the special symbol display 41 to the start of the small hit game effect (FIGS. 45 (A), (B), (C)). ) And the timing (time) from the confirmation display of the jackpot symbol to the start of the jackpot game effect (FIGS. 45 (A), (B), (C)) are configured to be equal. .. As is clear from the above, the series of effects suggesting that the jackpot game is executed (expected success effect of V: FIG. 44 (I) → FIG. 45 (A) → FIG. 45 (B)) is small. In the case of a hit and the case of a type 1 jackpot, the same content (similar effect) is obtained for a predetermined period from the start of a series of effects. The predetermined period is a period equal to or longer than the period from the start of the expected success effect of V to the end of the small hit game at the time of winning the small hit. For example, when the expected success production time of V is 5 seconds and the small hit game time is 4.61 seconds, the predetermined period is 9.61 seconds. In addition, a series of effects suggesting that the jackpot game is executed are as follows: V roulette success effect: FIG. 46 (C), targeting success effect: FIG. 48, instead of V's expected success effect: FIG. 44 (I). (C)) may be used. Here, the V roulette success production time and the targeting success production time are both 5 seconds.

[Special figure 2 Fluctuation effect at the time of lottery (when the time is shortened)]
FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the variation effect at the time of the special drawing 2 lottery. This variation effect at the time of the special figure 2 lottery is executed at the time of the small hit of the special figure 2, the big hit of the special figure 2, or the loss of the special figure 2 in the time saving state. Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 receives a variation start command from the main control board 80 (FIG. 37: step S4455: YES), and in the variation effect start process (FIG. 37: step S4460, FIG. 38), this command is used. When it is determined from the information about the included fluctuation pattern that the fluctuation pattern is "P16" to "P19" (FIG. 12), it is executed by setting the corresponding variation effect start command (FIG. 38: step). S5020).

In the variable effect at the time of the special drawing 2 lottery, first, as shown in FIG. 46 (A), the V roulette effect that displays the image GC1 showing how the roulette having the loss zone and the V zone rotates is executed. In this case, the display area HR3 provided in one corner of the display screen 7a shows the fluctuating state of the decorative symbol.

If the result of the hit / fail judgment in Special Figure 2 is a big hit or a small hit, after the V roulette effect, as shown in FIG. 46 (B), the roulette that was rotating in the V roulette effect stops. The V zone selection effect for displaying the image GC2 indicating that the stop zone is the V zone is executed. In the display area HR3, after the reach state using the decorative symbol is shown, the doublet symbol arrangement suggesting a small hit or a type 1 big hit is stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 46 (C), a V roulette success effect that displays the image GC3 suggesting that the jackpot game is executed and the right-handed suggestion image GC4 is executed. This V roulette success production suggests that the V roulette production is successful and the expectation of the jackpot (1 type jackpot or 2 type jackpot) is high, in other words, the expectation that the jackpot game will be executed is high. It is a suggestive production. Similar to the expected success effect of V (FIG. 44 (I)), this V roulette success effect is performed after a predetermined time (for example, 0.01 second) has elapsed from the stop display of the doublet symbol arrangement in the display area HR2. To be started. That is, the timing (time) from the confirmation display of the small hit symbol on the special symbol display 41 to the start of the V roulette success effect, and the period from the confirmation display of the big hit symbol to the start of the V roulette success effect. Is configured to be equal to the timing (time) of. In the case of a small hit, after this V roulette success production, a small hit game is executed, and when the player passes V by hitting the right side, two types of big hits are made and the game shifts to the big hit game. As described above, in the present embodiment, when a small hit is made, the variable effect is stopped, and the effect suggesting that the big hit (two types of big hit) game is executed regardless of whether or not the player has passed V (FIG. 46). (C)) is started. Then, at the time of the small hit game, the effect suggesting the small hit game and the effect suggesting the passage of V are not performed. With this configuration, even in the case of a small hit, the player does not notice the small hit game and can make him think that he has won one kind of big hit. Further, in the present embodiment, when the variable effect is stopped, the same effect (FIG. 46 (C)) is started in the case of the big hit and the case of the small hit. With this configuration, it is possible to make it more difficult to distinguish between the 1st type jackpot and the 2nd type jackpot. Even if the numbers of doublets that are stopped and displayed in the display area HR2 are different between the case of a big hit and the case of a small hit, these are naturally included in the same effect. Further, in the case of the big hit and the case of the small hit, the expected success effect of V may be started before the small hit symbol or the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed.

On the other hand, if the result of the hit / fail judgment in Special Figure 2 is a loss, after the V roulette effect, as shown in FIG. 46 (D), the roulette that was rotating in the V roulette effect stops, and the stop zone becomes the loss zone. The loss zone selection effect for displaying the image GC5 indicating that the image is GC5 is executed. In the display area HR3, the reach state using the decorative pattern is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 46 (E), the V roulette failure effect for displaying the image GC6 indicating that the V roulette effect is a failure and the jackpot game is not executed due to a loss is executed. In the display area HR3, a symbol arrangement suggesting a loss is shown using a decorative symbol. If there is a hold of special figure 2, after the V roulette failure effect, the process shifts to the V roulette effect (see FIG. 46 (A)) again.

In the time saving state, the hit / fail judgment is made in Special Figure 1 and a big hit (Fig. 12: when the fluctuation pattern "P8" is selected) or a small hit (Fig. 12: when the fluctuation pattern "P9" is selected). In the same manner as in the case of a big hit or a small hit in the special figure 2, the effects of FIGS. 46 (A) to 46 (C) are executed. Further, in the case of a loss (FIG. 12: when the fluctuation pattern “P10” is selected) in the case of the loss in the special figure 1, the same as in the case of the loss in the special figure 2, FIGS. , (E) is executed. Further, in the time saving state, when the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 2 is lost (FIG. 12: when the fluctuation pattern "P19" is selected), or when the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 is lost (FIG. 12: fluctuation pattern). (When "P11" is selected), a variable effect for quickly notifying the loss is executed using a decorative pattern.

[Countdown effect (during time-saving fluctuation effect)]
FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the countdown effect. This countdown effect is an effect of displaying an image of the number of remaining time reductions on the display screen 7a during each variation effect during the time reduction state. The countdown effect is shortened after the jackpot game and starts from the first change of the special symbol. Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the variation start command from the main control board 80 (FIG. 37: step S4455: YES), and in the variation effect start process (FIG. 37: step S4460, FIG. 38), the mode status M Is "2", it is executed by setting the corresponding variation effect start command (FIG. 38: step S5020). The "remaining number of times of time reduction of the countdown effect" indicated by the image is determined with reference to the time reduction effect scenario (see FIG. 43) determined based on the time reduction effect scenario determination table T56 (see FIG. 42). Therefore, the "display time saving remaining number" indicated by the time saving remaining number image is the same number of times as the actual time saving remaining number (actual remaining time saving number of times) until the time saving state ends, or the number of times less than the actual time saving remaining number of times. Is shown as a pseudo time saving remaining number. The countdown effect shown in FIG. 47 is an example of the effect corresponding to “Scenario C”.

In the countdown effect based on the "scenario C", first, the countdown effect A is displayed as shown in FIG. 47 (A). In this countdown effect A, in the first fluctuation after the time reduction state is set, the time reduction remaining number image GDA with the "display time reduction remaining number" set to 5 is displayed, and the second to fifth fluctuations are the previous fluctuations. The displayed time-saving remaining number image GDA representing the number of times obtained by subtracting one from the displayed time-saving remaining number is displayed. For example, in the countdown effect A, the time-saving remaining number image GDA with the "display time-saving remaining number" set to 4 times is displayed for the second variation, and the "display time-saving remaining number" is set to 1 for the fifth variation. Time saving Remaining number of times Display the image GDA.

When the display of the time saving remaining number image GDA of the fifth variation in the countdown effect A is completed, the charge effect A is then executed during the variation effect of the fifth variation, as shown in FIG. 47 (B). In this charge effect A, a charge image CHA suggesting that the "display time reduction remaining number" is charged (increased) about 10 times is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 47 (C), the countdown effect B is executed. In this countdown effect B, in the sixth variation, which is the next variation of the charge effect A, the charge amount (10 times) is subtracted by one from the remaining number (1 time) in the previous variation (fifth variation). The number of times (10 times) increased by the number of times (10 times) is set as the "display time reduction remaining number". The time saving remaining number image GDB is displayed, and the 7th to 15th fluctuations are one from the remaining number shown in the previous fluctuation. The time saving remaining number image GDB showing the subtracted remaining number is displayed. For example, in the countdown effect B, the time saving remaining number image GDB with the "display time saving remaining number" set to 10 is displayed at the 6th variation, and the time saving remaining number with the "display time saving remaining number" set to 9 times at the 7th variation. The remaining number of times image GDB is displayed, and at the 15th variation, the time saving remaining number of times image GDB with the "display time saving remaining number of times" as one is displayed.

When the display of the time saving remaining number image GDB of the 15th variation in the countdown effect B is completed, the charge effect B is then executed during the variation effect of the 15th variation, as shown in FIG. 47 (D). In this charge effect B, a charge image CHB suggesting that the "display time reduction remaining number" is charged (increased) by about 84 times is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 47 (E), the countdown effect C is executed. In this countdown effect C, in the 16th variation which is the next variation of the charge effect B, the charge amount (84 times) is subtracted by 1 from the remaining number (1 time) in the previous variation (15th variation). The number of times (84 times) increased by the number of times (84 times) is set as the "display time reduction remaining number". The time saving remaining number image GDC is displayed, and the 17th to 99th fluctuations are one from the remaining number shown in the previous fluctuation. The time saving remaining number image GDC showing the subtracted remaining number is displayed. For example, in the countdown effect C, the time saving remaining number image GDC with the "display time saving remaining number" set to 84 is displayed at the 16th variation, and the time saving remaining number with the "display time saving remaining number" set to 83 times at the 17th variation. The remaining number of times The image GDC is displayed.

The countdown effect is executed at a predetermined timing of each variation effect in the time saving state. For example, it may be executed at the start timing of each variation effect, or may be executed at the end timing of each variation effect. Further, during each variation effect, the image of the remaining number of times of shortening the time may be continuously displayed.

[One-time production of crying (production of the first fluctuation (special figure 2) after the end of the time saving state)]
FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a one-time production of crying. This one-time effect of crying is a variation effect executed in the next variation of the variation when the hold of the special figure 2 is held in the last variation of the time reduction state, that is, the first after the time reduction state It is a fluctuation effect of the special figure 2 in the non-time saving state. Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the variation start command from the main control board 80 (FIG. 37: step S4455: YES), and in the variation effect start process (FIG. 37: step S4460, FIG. 38), the special effect flag When is ON, it is executed by setting the corresponding variation effect start command (FIG. 38: step S5020).

In the one-time production of crying, first, as shown in FIG. 48 (A), the image GE1 showing how the "target" consisting of the hit zone and the loss zone is rotating, and the state advantageous to the player are the last. The targeting start effect of displaying the image GE2 indicating that the image is GE2 is executed. In this case, the display area HR4 provided in one corner of the display screen 7a shows the fluctuating state of the decorative symbol.

If the result of the hit / fail judgment in Special Figure 2 is a big hit or a small hit, the arrow hits the hit zone as shown in FIG. 48 (B) after the hit start effect. A hit effect for displaying the image GE3 indicating that is executed. In the display area HR4, after the reach state using the decorative symbol is shown, the doublet symbol arrangement suggesting a small hit or a type 1 big hit is stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 48 (C), the image GE4 suggesting that the jackpot game is executed and the right-handed suggestion image GE5 prompting right-handed are displayed, and the target is successful and the jackpot ( A successful targeting effect is performed, which suggests that the expectation of the 1st type jackpot or the 2nd type jackpot is high, in other words, the expectation that the jackpot game is executed is high. Similar to the expected success effect of V (FIG. 44 (I)), this target success effect is performed after a predetermined time (for example, 0.01 second) has elapsed from the stop display of the doublet symbol arrangement in the display area HR2. To be started. That is, the timing (time) from when the small hit symbol is confirmed and displayed on the special symbol display 41 until the successful targeting effect is started, and from when the large hit symbol is confirmed and when the successful targeting effect is started. Is configured to be equal to the timing (time) of. In the case of a small hit, a small hit game is executed after this successful hitting effect, and when the player passes V by right-handed hit, two types of big hits are made, and the game shifts to the big hit game. As described above, in the present embodiment, when a small hit is made, the variable effect is stopped, and the effect suggesting that the big hit (two types of big hit) game is executed regardless of whether or not the player has passed V (FIG. 48). (C)) is started. Then, at the time of the small hit game, the effect suggesting the small hit game and the effect suggesting the passage of V are not performed. With this configuration, even in the case of a small hit, the player does not notice the small hit game and can make him think that he has won one kind of big hit. Further, in the present embodiment, when the variable effect is stopped, the same effect (FIG. 48 (C)) is started in the case of the big hit and the case of the small hit. With this configuration, it is possible to make it more difficult to distinguish between the 1st type jackpot and the 2nd type jackpot. Even if the numbers of doublets that are stopped and displayed in the display area HR2 are different between the case of a big hit and the case of a small hit, these are naturally included in the same effect. Further, in the case of the big hit and the case of the small hit, the expected success effect of V may be started before the small hit symbol or the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed.

On the other hand, if the result of the hit / fail judgment in Special Figure 2 is a loss, after the targeting start effect, then, as shown in FIG. 48 (D), the image GE6 showing that the arrow hits the target loss zone. Perform a target loss effect to display. In the display area HR4, the reach state using the decorative pattern is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 48 (E), the target hit failure effect of displaying the image GE7 suggesting that the target hit is a failure, the hit is lost without a big hit or a small hit, and the big hit game is not executed is executed. .. In the display area HR4, a symbol arrangement suggesting a loss is shown by using a decorative symbol.

The effect shown in FIGS. 48 (A) to 48 (C) in the one-time effect of crying is when the variation pattern P13 (see FIG. 12) is selected in the first variation from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state. In the first variation of the transition from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state, the effect shown in FIGS. 48 (A), (D), and (E) is the variation pattern P14 (see FIG. 12). ) Is an example of the effect executed when is selected.

9. Operation of the board movable body The movement of the board movable body (first movable accessory 14 and second movable accessory 15) will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 58. The effect control microcomputer 91 performs drive control to operate the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 during the game effect (display effect) or in the initial operation when the power is turned on. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 causes the image display device 7 to display a specific image during the game effect (display effect), the initial operation when the power is turned on, or the like, or the first movable accessory 14 or the second movable accessory 14 or the second movable accessory. Display / light emission control is performed such that 15 is made to emit light in a specific mode.

The operation of the first movable accessory 14 will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 54. FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the movement of the first movable accessory 14 in the advancing direction (movement in the advancing direction). FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the first movable accessory 14. FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a combination effect of the first movable accessory 14 and the image display device 7. FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the rotational operation of the first movable accessory 14. 53 and 54 are explanatory views illustrating the light emitting mode of the first movable accessory 14.

As shown in FIG. 49, the first movable accessory 14 includes a left movable accessory 14L and a right movable accessory 14R. The left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are configured to be movable in the left-right direction, respectively, and half of the ring-shaped decorative portion (left decorative portion and right decorative portion) is attached to the tip side. That is, the left side decoration part and the right side decoration part each have an arc shape that is half of the ring shape. As shown in FIG. 1, the first movable accessory 14 is at a retracted position (home position) in which the left movable accessory 14L is stored on the left side of the display screen 7a and the right movable accessory 14R is stored on the right side of the display screen 7a. It can be stationary (first aspect). At this time, a part of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R can be visually recognized. In the first movable accessory 14, as shown in FIG. 49, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R advance toward the center of the display screen 7a (in a direction close to each other) from the state of FIG. By moving, at the advance position (deployment position) shown in FIG. 50, the left side decoration part and the right side decoration part are united to form one decorative member (combination accessory) (second aspect). Here, the coalesced accessory forms the contour of the face. In this second aspect, the united accessory in which the left side decoration part and the right side decoration part are united covers a part near the center of the display screen 7a on the front surface of the image display device 7, and is displayed from the opening formed in the center. The screen 7a stands still in a visible state. That is, the united accessory is configured so that only the outline of the face is formed, there is no central portion of the face, and the display screen 7a can be visually recognized instead. Then, as shown in FIG. 51, the face image is displayed on the display screen 7a corresponding to the opening formed in the center of the united accessory, so that the human face is completed as a whole. That is, a combination effect of the character and the image that completes one object (for example, a human face) by displaying the missing part (for example, the central part of the face) in the combined character as an image on the display screen 7a. Can be executed. The target completed by the first movable accessory 14 and the display screen 7a is not limited to the human face. For example, it may be the entire human body, a robot, or the like. That is, the head, body, right arm, and both legs may be completed by the combined accessory, and the left arm may be displayed on the display screen 7a. The first movable accessory 14 can move (evacuate) from the advance position of FIGS. 50 and 51 to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1 by moving (evacuating) via the state of FIG. 49, and stands still there. be able to.

As shown in FIG. 52, the combined accessory can rotate vertically in front of the display screen 7a. That is, the united accessory can be rotated around an axis parallel and horizontal to the display screen 7a as a rotation axis, and can be stopped at an arbitrary tilted angle. At this time, the central opening of the united accessory gradually becomes an elliptical shape narrow in the vertical direction when viewed from the player. On the display screen 7a, the image of the human face to be displayed is deformed according to the deformation of the opening into an elliptical shape. As a result, for example, the first movable accessory 14 and the display screen 7a can be used to create an effect in which a person's face is bowed.

As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, the first movable accessory 14 is configured to be capable of emitting light. Specifically, a plurality of LEDs are arranged side by side on the surface of the united accessory (decorative member), and each of them can be switched on and off. For example, as shown in FIG. 53, the right movable accessory 14R can emit light in conjunction with (corresponding to) the light emission of the frame lamp 66. Further, as shown in FIG. 54, the right movable accessory 14R and the left movable accessory 14L can be interlocked with each other to emit light.

The operation of the second movable accessory 15 will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the second movable accessory 15. FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the rotational operation of the second movable accessory 15. The second movable accessory 15 is provided with a rectangular decorative portion described as "OARO", and is configured to be vertically movable and left and right rotationally movable. As shown in FIG. 1, the second movable accessory 15 can be stationary at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a (first aspect). At this time, a part of the second movable accessory 15 becomes difficult to see. The second movable accessory 15 can move downward from the state of FIG. 1 toward the center of the display screen 7a and stand still at the advance position (deployment position) shown in FIG. 55 (second aspect). .. In this second aspect, the decorative portion is stopped on the front surface of the image display device 7 so as to cover the vicinity slightly above the center of the display screen 7a. Further, as shown in FIG. 56, the decorative portion can be rotated clockwise and counterclockwise (rotated clockwise in the drawing) in front of the display screen 7a, and can be stopped at an arbitrary tilted angle. The second movable accessory 15 can move (retract) upward from the advance position shown in FIGS. 55 and 56 to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1, and can be stationary there.

A combination effect of the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58. FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a first combination effect by the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15. FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second combination effect by the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15. As shown in FIG. 57, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 can both perform the first combination effect by being in the second mode. That is, when both the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 move to the advance position, the second movable accessory 15 is in a state of covering a part of the upper part of the first movable accessory 14. In other words, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 can be stationary in a partially overlapped and combined state. Further, as shown in FIG. 58, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 are first in a state where the second movable accessory 15 covers a part of the upper part of the first movable accessory 14. It is possible to perform a second combination effect in which the movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 are tilted at a predetermined angle, respectively. In this second combination effect, after the first combination effect, two movable accessories are formed by rotating (tilting) together, and each of them moves to the advance position in a tilted state and overlaps with each other. In some cases, the second combination effect is directly performed without going through the one combination effect.

10. Other production examples, effect examples, modification examples, and mode examples of the present embodiment Each production example (display production example, accessory movable production example) of the present embodiment will be described below. In addition, an example of effect, an example of modification, and an example of mode for the effect example will also be described. As described above, the effect described below is based on various information (hit determination information, hit type information, fluctuation pattern information, advance determination information, etc.) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81, and the effect control microcomputer 91 ( This is an effect realized by the image control microcomputer 101). The following display effect example is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, although the hold display (hold icon) may be omitted in the display effect example, it is actually displayed unless otherwise specified.

The fluctuation timing change effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 59 to 61. This variation timing change effect can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the variation timing change effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7. Further, when the lamp control board 107 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the variation timing change effect, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory are included. 15 is driven.

[Fluctuating timing change production A]
FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining the variation timing change effect A. In the variation timing change effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 59 (A), two sets of decorative symbols are variedly displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r and the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in a variable mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction. The first decorative symbol includes a left decorative symbol 8l, a middle decorative symbol 8c, and a right decorative symbol 8r, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by combining these stop symbols. The second decorative symbol includes a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by combining these stop symbols. The white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Three hold icons 9A are displayed in the first hold display area on the left side of the hold display position. A black spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position on the far right. A star-shaped hold icon 9A is displayed at the second hold display position, which is the second from the right. A white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the third hold display position, which is the third from the right (here, the leftmost). Here, the hold icon of the same color and shape is displayed at the third hold display position and the hold display position. The difference in the shape and color of the hold icon represents the difference in the degree of expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the hold icon. Here, of the three hold icons 9A, the star-shaped hold icon, the black spherical hold icon, and the white spherical hold icon, the star-shaped hold icon has the highest expectation of winning, and the black spherical hold icon is 2. The second highest hit expectation, the white spherical hold icon has the lowest hit expectation.

As shown in FIG. 59 (A), in the variation in which the hold icon of the white sphere is in the hold display position, the hold icon of the white sphere reaches the hold display position from the first hold display position, and at the same time, two decorative symbols ( The first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol) start variable display. That is, when the hold icon reaches the hold display position, the variation effect corresponding to the reached hold icon (the hold icon) is started. After that, as shown in FIG. 59 (B), the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r and the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed at the same time. At this time, at the same time, the effect that the hold icon 9C disappears (disappears) is executed. That is, in the lottery corresponding to the white spherical holding icon 9C having a relatively low expectation of winning, the two decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) start to change at the same time and are stopped and displayed at the same time. Will be done.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (C), the hold icon 9A of the black sphere at the first hold display position moves toward the hold display position. At this time, the stop display is maintained for the two decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol). As shown in FIG. 59 (D), at the same time when the hold icon 9A of the black sphere reaches the hold display position, the two decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) start variable display. That is, when the hold icon reaches the hold display position, the variation effect corresponding to the reached hold icon (the hold icon) is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (E), the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, and 8r are stopped and displayed while the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue the variable display. After that, as shown in FIG. 59 (F), the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed. That is, when the hold icon 9C is a hold icon of a black sphere, the stop display of the two decorative symbols is not displayed at the same time, but the timing of the stop display is shifted. In the present embodiment, the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r are stopped and displayed before the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, but the opposite may be true. In addition, which one is stopped and displayed first may change each time it changes (it may be random). In this way, in the lottery corresponding to the black spherical reserved icon 9C having a relatively medium hit expectation, the two decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) start to fluctuate at the same time. , The stop display is not simultaneous, but the timing is off. As shown in FIG. 59 (F), at the same time as the stop display of the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the effect that the hold icon 9C disappears (disappears) is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (G), the star-shaped hold icon 9A at the first hold display position moves toward the hold display position. At this time, of the two decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol), the second decorative symbol starts variable display. The stop display is maintained for the first decorative symbol. That is, in the second decorative symbol, the hold icon 9A at the first hold display position starts moving, and the variable display starts before reaching the hold display position. Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (H), at the same time when the star-shaped hold icon 9A reaches the hold display position, the first decorative symbol starts the variable display. In the present embodiment, the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R start to change before the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r, but the opposite may be true. Also, which one starts the fluctuation first may change (may be random) for each fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (I), the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, and 8r are stopped and displayed while the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue the variable display. After that, as shown in FIG. 59 (J), the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed. In the present embodiment, the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r are stopped and displayed before the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, but the opposite may be true. In addition, which one is stopped and displayed first may change each time it changes (it may be random). In this way, in the lottery corresponding to the star-shaped hold icon 9C with a relatively high expectation of winning, the fluctuation start timing of the two decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol) and the stop display are displayed. The timings are different. After FIG. 59 (J), the hold icon 9A of the white sphere at the first hold display position moves toward the hold display position. In the variation in which the hold icon of the white sphere is in the hold display position, as shown in FIG. 59 (A), the hold icon of the white sphere reaches the hold display position from the first hold display position, and at the same time, two decorative symbols ( The first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol) start variable display. After that, as shown in FIG. 59 (B), the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r and the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed at the same time. At this time, at the same time, the effect that the hold icon 9C disappears (disappears) is executed.

[Fluctuating timing change production B]
FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation timing change effect B. In the variation timing change effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 60A, three sets of decorative symbols are variedly displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r, the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the third decorative symbols 8ml, 8mc, 8mr are displayed in a variable manner. The first decorative symbol includes a left decorative symbol 8l, a middle decorative symbol 8c, and a right decorative symbol 8r, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by combining these stop symbols. The second decorative symbol includes a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by combining these stop symbols. The third decorative symbol includes a left decorative symbol 8 ml, a middle decorative symbol 8 mc, and a right decorative symbol 8 mr, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by combining these stop symbols. The white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Three hold icons 9A are displayed in the first hold display area on the left side of the hold display position. A black spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position on the far right. A star-shaped hold icon 9A is displayed at the second hold display position, which is the second from the right. A white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the third hold display position, which is the third from the right (here, the leftmost). Here, the hold icon of the same color and shape is displayed at the third hold display position and the hold display position. The difference in the shape and color of the hold icon represents the difference in the degree of expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the hold icon. Here, of the three hold icons 9A, the star-shaped hold icon, the black spherical hold icon, and the white spherical hold icon, the star-shaped hold icon has the highest expectation of winning, and the black spherical hold icon is 2. The second highest hit expectation, the white spherical hold icon has the lowest hit expectation.

As shown in FIG. 60 (A), in the variation in which the hold icon of the white sphere is in the hold display position, the hold icon of the white sphere reaches the hold display position from the first hold display position, and at the same time, three decorative symbols ( The first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol) start variable display. That is, when the hold icon reaches the hold display position, the variation effect corresponding to the reached hold icon (the hold icon) is started. After that, as shown in FIG. 60B, the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r, the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the third decorative symbols 8ml, 8mc, 8m are stopped and displayed at the same time. To. At this time, at the same time, the effect that the hold icon 9C disappears (disappears) is executed. That is, in the lottery corresponding to the white spherical reserved icon 9C having a relatively low expectation of winning, the three decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol, and third decorative symbol) start to change at the same time. At the same time, the stop display is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (C), the hold icon 9A of the black sphere at the first hold display position moves toward the hold display position. At this time, the stop display is maintained for the three decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol). As shown in FIG. 60 (D), at the same time when the hold icon 9A of the black sphere reaches the hold display position, the three decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol, and third decorative symbol) are displayed in a variable manner. To start. That is, when the hold icon reaches the hold display position, the variation effect corresponding to the reached hold icon (the hold icon) is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (E), the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r are in a state where the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the third decorative symbols 8ml, 8mc, 8m continue to be variablely displayed. Is stopped and displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 60 (F), the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the third decorative symbols 8 ml, 8 mc, 8 mr are stopped and displayed at the same time. That is, when the hold icon 9C is a hold icon of a black sphere, the stop display of the three decorative symbols is not simultaneous, and the stop timing of the first decorative symbol is the stop of the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol. It is configured to be out of sync with the timing. In the present embodiment, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed before the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol, but the opposite may be true. In addition, which one is stopped and displayed first may change each time it changes (it may be random). Further, the timing at which each of the three decorative symbols stops may be different. In this way, in the lottery corresponding to the reserved icon 9C, which is a black spherical icon with a relatively medium hit expectation, three decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol, and third decorative symbol) are simultaneously displayed. While the fluctuation starts, the timing of the stop display is not all at the same time, but at least in part. As shown in FIG. 60 (F), at the same time as the stop display of the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol, the effect that the hold icon 9C disappears (disappears) is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (G), the star-shaped hold icon 9A at the first hold display position moves toward the hold display position. At this time, of the three decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol, and third decorative symbol), two decorative symbols (second decorative symbol and third decorative symbol) start variable display. The stop display is maintained for the first decorative symbol. That is, the two decorative symbols (the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol) start moving and the variable display starts before the hold icon 9A at the first hold display position reaches the hold display position. To do. Then, as shown in FIG. 60 (H), at the same time when the star-shaped hold icon 9A reaches the hold display position, the first decorative symbol starts the variable display. In the present embodiment, the two decorative symbols (the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol) start to change before the first decorative symbol, but they may be opposite. Also, which one starts the fluctuation first may change (may be random) for each fluctuation. Further, the timing at which the three decorative symbols start to fluctuate may be different from each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (I), the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, and 8r are stopped and displayed while the two decorative symbols (the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol) continue to be displayed in a variable manner. To. After that, as shown in FIG. 60 (J), the two decorative symbols (the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol) are stopped and displayed. In the present embodiment, the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, and 8r are stopped and displayed before the two decorative symbols (second decorative symbol and third decorative symbol), but the opposite may be true. In addition, which one is stopped and displayed first may change each time it changes (it may be random). Further, the timing at which each of the three decorative symbols stops may be different. As described above, in the lottery corresponding to the star-shaped reserved icon 9C having a relatively high expectation of winning, at least a part of the three decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol, and third decorative symbol). In, the fluctuation start timing and the stop display timing are different from each other.
After FIG. 60 (J), at the same time that the hold icon of the white sphere reaches the hold display position from the first hold display position, three decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol, and third decorative symbol) are displayed. Start variable display. After that, as shown in FIG. 60 (B), the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r, the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the third decorative symbols 8ml, 8mc, 8m are stopped and displayed at the same time. To. At this time, at the same time, the effect that the hold icon 9C disappears (disappears) is executed.

[Fluctuating timing change production C]
FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation timing change effect C. FIGS. 61 (A) and 61 (B) of the variation timing change effect C are the same as FIGS. 60 (F) and 60 (G) of the variation timing change effect B. That is, FIGS. 60 (A) to 60 (E) are executed before FIG. 61 (A) of the variation timing change effect C. In FIG. 61 (A), the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r are stopped and displayed, and then the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the third decorative symbols 8 ml, 8mc, 8r are stopped and displayed at the same time. .. The first decorative symbol includes a left decorative symbol 8l, a middle decorative symbol 8c, and a right decorative symbol 8r, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by combining these stop symbols. The second decorative symbol includes a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by combining these stop symbols. The third decorative symbol includes a left decorative symbol 8 ml, a middle decorative symbol 8 mc, and a right decorative symbol 8 mr, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by combining these stop symbols. At this time, at the same time, the effect that the black spherical hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a disappears (disappears) is executed. Two hold icons 9A are displayed in the first hold display area on the left side of the hold display position. A star-shaped hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position on the far right. A white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the second hold display position, which is the second from the right (here, the leftmost). The difference in the shape and color of the hold icon represents the difference in the degree of expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the hold icon. Here, of the three hold icons 9A, the star-shaped hold icon, the black spherical hold icon, and the white spherical hold icon, the star-shaped hold icon has the highest expectation of winning, and the black spherical hold icon is 2. The second highest hit expectation, the white spherical hold icon has the lowest hit expectation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (B), the star-shaped hold icon 9A at the first hold display position moves toward the hold display position. At this time, of the three decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol, and third decorative symbol), two decorative symbols (second decorative symbol and third decorative symbol) start variable display. The stop display is maintained for the first decorative symbol. That is, the two decorative symbols (the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol) start moving and the variable display starts before the hold icon 9A at the first hold display position reaches the hold display position. To do. Then, as shown in FIG. 61 (C), the second movable accessory 15 advances downward, stands still in the second mode, and then moves to the retracted position (first mode). The first decorative symbol disappears from the display as the second movable accessory 15 moves without starting to change. This suggests that the pseudo-continuous production starts. After that, as shown in FIG. 61 (D), the three decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol, and third decorative symbol) are displayed in a variable manner. Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (E), the first decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. The two decorative symbols (the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol) continue to be displayed in a variable manner. After that, as shown in FIG. 61 (F), the first decorative symbol starts to change again, and all three decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol, and third decorative symbol) are displayed in a variable manner. Further, as shown in FIG. 61 (G), the first decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed again. The two decorative symbols (the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol) continue to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, after that, as shown in FIG. 61 (H), the first decorative symbol starts to change again, and all three decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol) are displayed in a variable manner. To. Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (I), the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the hit "555". The two decorative symbols (the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol) continue to be displayed in a variable manner. After that, as shown in FIG. 61 (J), the two decorative symbols (the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol) are stopped and displayed at the same hit as the second decorative symbol.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the fluctuation timing change effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 59 (D) to (H), 60 (D) to (H), and 61 (D) to (H), the first decorative symbol is After the stop display, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and after the first effect, the first decorative symbol has not started the next variable display, and the second decorative symbol is next. It is possible to execute the second effect of starting the variable display. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59 (G), in the second effect, the hold icon is changed to the hold icon in the second decorative symbol before the hold icon arrives at the hold display position by the shift movement. The corresponding fluctuation is started. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 60 and 61.
[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60 (D) to (H) and FIGS. 61 (D) to (H), in the first effect, after the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the first effect is displayed. 3 The decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and in the second effect, the third decorative symbol starts the next variable display while the first decorative symbol has not started the next variable display. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 59 (H) to (J), (A), and FIGS. 61 (H) to (J), (A), after the first effect, the second It is possible to execute the third effect in which the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol simultaneously start the next variable display without performing the effect of. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the hold icon is a star as shown in FIGS. 59 (D) to (H), 60 (D) to (H), and 61 (D) to (H). , After the first effect, the second effect is performed, and when the hold icon is a white sphere, the third effect is performed after the first effect. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the variation timing change effect.
[Modification 1]
The first variation of FIGS. 59 (A) and 59 (B), the second variation of FIGS. 59 (C) to (F), and the third variation of FIGS. 59 (G) to (J) are executed in any order. May be done. For example, the third variation, the second variation, and the first variation may be executed in this order. Also, the same type of variation may be performed repeatedly. For example, the third variation, the third variation, and the first variation may be executed in this order. The same applies to FIGS. 60 and 61. The type of the hold icon is not limited to the above embodiment.

[Modification 2]
The relative positional relationship and size of the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol are not limited to the above. These positions and sizes can be arbitrary. As long as the first decorative symbol 2l, the second decorative symbol 8L, and the third decorative symbol 8ml are symbols displayed on the image display device 7, the type, shape, and display method of the symbols are not limited to the above.

[Modification 3]
The first decorative symbol 2l, the second decorative symbol 8L, and the third decorative symbol 8ml are not limited to the above in the mode of variable display indicating that they are changing. For example, the variable display may be in a mode that is not displayed on the image display device 7. Further, the numbers may be displayed in a mode in which the numbers move at a high speed and the numbers cannot be discriminated, or they may move at a discriminating speed. Further, the fluctuation speed may change on the way.

[Modification example 4]
The first decorative symbol is supposed to start changing when the hold icon reaches the hold display position. However, it may be immediately before or after that. Immediately before and after here is, for example, a range of a few seconds before and after.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of first decorative symbols capable of notifying whether or not the image is a hit.
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of second decorative symbols capable of notifying whether or not the image is a hit.
After the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the first effect that the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed and
After the first effect, it is possible to execute a second effect in which the second decorative symbol starts the next variable display while the first decorative symbol has not started the next variable display.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A1-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A1-1.
One of the plurality of types of images is a hold icon.
In the second effect, the variation corresponding to the hold icon is started in the second decorative symbol before the hold icon arrives at the hold display position by the shift movement.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A1-3]
A game machine according to the aspect A1-1 or the aspect A1-2.
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of third decorative symbols capable of notifying whether or not the image is a hit.
In the first effect, after the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the third decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.
In the second effect, the third decorative symbol starts the next variable display while the first decorative symbol has not started the next variable display.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-1 to A1-3.
After the first effect, it is possible to execute a third effect in which the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol simultaneously start the next variable display without performing the second effect.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-4, which is subordinate to aspect A1-2.
When the hold icon is the first aspect, the second effect is performed after the first effect.
When the hold icon is the second aspect, the third effect is performed after the first effect.
A game machine characterized by that.

The symbol direction change effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 62 to 64. This symbol direction change effect can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the symbol direction change effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7. Further, when the lamp control board 107 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the symbol direction change effect, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory are included. 15 is driven.

[Design direction change effect A]
FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining the symbol direction change effect A. In the symbol direction change effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 62 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L among the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. .. At this time, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are not displayed. In other words, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are changing, but are not in a visible state. The left decorative symbol 8L frame-in from the vicinity of the upper center of the display screen 7a and moves diagonally downward to the left. At this time, each number constituting the left decorative symbol 8L moves in a state where the direction (posture) of the number is tilted to the right. That is, each number is tilted in the direction along the fluctuation direction, and the bottom of each number is displayed facing the traveling direction (lower left direction). The speed of the variable display gradually decreases, and a specific number (here, "2") temporarily stops at the first position near the lower left of the display screen 7a. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are also referred to as a first decorative symbol, a second decorative symbol, and a third decorative symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (B), the specific image CHA is displayed above the specific number (left decorative symbol 8L). The specific image CHA represents a specific object. Here, the specific image CHA represents a smiley face. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. The specific image CHA covers a part of the upper part of the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L), and a part of the specific number is difficult to see. The orientation (posture) of this specific image CHA is also tilted in the same manner as the specific number (left decorative symbol 8L). The specific image CHA and the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) are oriented in the same direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (C), an effect is performed in which a specific number (left decorative symbol 8L) and a specific image CHA bounce. As a result, the display position and orientation of the specific number (left decorative symbol 8L) and the specific image CHA change while maintaining the positional relationship with each other. Specifically, the specific number (left decorative symbol 8L) and the specific image CHA move to the second position in the upper left direction of the display screen 7a, and the orientation is along the vertical direction (straight). The second position is located above the first position in the vertical direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 62 (D), the specific number (left decorative symbol 8L) and the specific image CHA move downward while maintaining the direction along the vertical direction, and at the third position. Stop is displayed. .. The third position is located on the lower side in the vertical direction from the second position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (E), the right decorative symbol 8R is variablely displayed while the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed. At this time, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is not displayed. In other words, the decorative symbol 8C is changing, but not in a visible state. The right decorative symbol 8R frame-in from the vicinity of the upper center of the display screen 7a and moves diagonally downward to the right. That is, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed in a variable direction different from the variable direction. At this time, each number constituting the right decorative symbol 8R moves in a state where the direction (posture) of the number is tilted to the left. That is, each number is tilted in the direction along the fluctuation direction, and the bottom of each number is displayed facing the traveling direction (lower right direction). The speed of the variable display gradually decreases, and when a specific number (here, "2") is located near the lower right of the display screen 7a, it temporarily stops. Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (F), the specific image CHA is displayed above the specific number (right decorative symbol 8R). The specific image CHA represents a specific object. Here, the specific image CHA is the same as that displayed on the left decorative symbol 8L, but may be an image having different contents. The specific image CHA covers a part of the upper part of the specific number (right decorative symbol 8R), and a part of the specific number is difficult to see. This specific image CHA is also tilted in the same direction as the specific number.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (G), an effect is performed in which a specific number (right decorative symbol 8R) and a specific image CHA bounce. As a result, the display position and orientation of the specific number (right decorative symbol 8R) and the specific image CHA change while maintaining the positional relationship with each other. Specifically, the specific number (right decorative symbol 8R) and the specific image CHA move in the upper left direction of the display screen 7a, and the orientation is along the vertical direction (straight). Then, as shown in FIG. 62 (H), the specific number (right decorative symbol 8R) and the specific image CHA move downward while maintaining the direction along the vertical direction, and stop display at that position. Will be done.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (I), the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is variably displayed while the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed. In other words, the variation of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C becomes visible. The intermediate decorative symbol 8C frame-in from the vicinity of the upper center of the display screen 7a and moves downward in the vertical direction. That is, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable direction different from the variable direction. At this time, each number constituting the intermediate decorative symbol 8C moves in a state in which the direction (posture) of the number is along the vertical direction (straight state). In other words, each number is oriented along the direction of fluctuation, and the bottom of each number is displayed facing the direction of travel (downward). The speed of the variable display gradually decreases, and when a specific number (here, "2") is located near the lower center of the display screen 7a, it temporarily stops. Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (J), the specific image CHA is not displayed above the specific number (intermediate decorative symbol 8C), but is stopped and displayed. As a result, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are fixedly stopped and displayed.

[Design direction change effect B]
FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining the symbol direction change effect B. In the symbol direction change effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 63 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L among the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. .. At this time, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are not displayed. In other words, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are changing, but are not in a visible state. The left decorative symbol 8L frame-in from the vicinity of the upper left corner of the display screen 7a and moves diagonally downward to the right. At this time, each number constituting the left decorative symbol 8L moves in a state where the direction (posture) of the number is tilted to the left. That is, each number is tilted in the direction along the fluctuation direction, and the bottom of each number is displayed facing the traveling direction (lower right direction). The speed of the variable display gradually decreases, and a specific number (here, "2") temporarily stops at the first position near the lower center of the display screen 7a. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are also referred to as a first decorative symbol, a second decorative symbol, and a third decorative symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (B), the specific image CHA is displayed above the specific number (left decorative symbol 8L). The specific image CHA represents a specific object. Here, the specific image CHA represents a smiley face. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. The specific image CHA covers a part of the upper part of the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L), and a part of the specific number is difficult to see. The orientation (posture) of this specific image CHA is also tilted in the same manner as the specific number (left decorative symbol 8L). The specific image CHA and the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) are oriented in the same direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (C), an effect is performed in which a specific number (left decorative symbol 8L) and a specific image CHA bounce. As a result, the display position and orientation of the specific number (left decorative symbol 8L) and the specific image CHA change while maintaining the positional relationship with each other. Specifically, the specific number (left decorative symbol 8L) and the specific image CHA move to the second position in the upper left direction of the display screen 7a, and the orientation is along the vertical direction (straight). The second position is located above the first position in the vertical direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 63 (D), the specific number (left decorative symbol 8L) and the specific image CHA move downward while maintaining the direction along the vertical direction, and at the third position. Is stopped and displayed. The third position is located on the lower side in the vertical direction from the second position.

In parallel with the stop display, the right decorative symbol 8R is variablely displayed. At this time, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is not displayed. In other words, the decorative symbol 8C is changing, but not in a visible state. The right decorative symbol 8R frame-in from the vicinity of the upper center of the display screen 7a and moves diagonally downward to the right. That is, the left decorative symbol 8L is variablely displayed in the same variable direction as the variable direction. At this time, each number constituting the right decorative symbol 8R moves in a state where the direction (posture) of the number is tilted to the left. That is, the left decorative symbol 8L moves in a state of being tilted to the same degree as the tilt of the number when it fluctuates. Each number is tilted in the direction of fluctuation, and the bottom of each number is displayed facing the traveling direction (lower right direction). The speed of the variable display gradually decreases, and when a specific number (here, "2") is located near the lower right of the display screen 7a, it temporarily stops.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (E), the specific image CHA is displayed above the specific number (right decorative symbol 8R). The specific image CHA represents a specific object. Here, the specific image CHA is the same as that displayed on the left decorative symbol 8L, but may be an image having different contents. The specific image CHA covers a part of the upper part of the specific number (right decorative symbol 8R), and a part of the specific number is difficult to see. This specific image CHA is also tilted in the same direction as the specific number.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (F), an effect is performed in which a specific number (right decorative symbol 8R) and a specific image CHA bounce. As a result, the display position and orientation of the specific number (right decorative symbol 8R) and the specific image CHA change while maintaining the positional relationship with each other. Specifically, the specific number (right decorative symbol 8R) and the specific image CHA move in the upper left direction of the display screen 7a, and the orientation is along the vertical direction (straight). Then, as shown in FIG. 63 (G), the specific number (right decorative symbol 8R) and the specific image CHA move downward while maintaining the direction along the vertical direction, and stop display at that position. Will be done. With the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R stopped and displayed, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is displayed in a variable manner. In other words, the variation of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C becomes visible. The intermediate decorative symbol 8C frame-in from the vicinity of the upper left of the display screen 7a and moves diagonally downward to the right. That is, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed in the same variable direction as the variable direction. At this time, each number constituting the intermediate decorative symbol 8C moves in a state where the direction (posture) of the number is tilted to the left. That is, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R move in a state of being tilted to the same degree as the tilt of the numbers when they are changed. Each number is tilted in the direction of fluctuation, and the bottom of each number is displayed facing the traveling direction (lower right direction). The speed of the variable display gradually decreases, and when a specific number (here, "2") is located near the center of the display screen 7a, it temporarily stops.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (H), the specific image CHA is displayed above the specific number (intermediate decorative symbol 8C). The specific image CHA represents a specific object. Here, the specific image CHA is the same as that displayed on the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R, but may be images having different contents. The specific image CHA covers a part of the upper part of the specific number (intermediate decorative pattern 8C), and a part of the specific number is difficult to see. The orientation (posture) of this specific image CHA is also tilted in the same manner as the specific number (intermediate decorative pattern 8C). The specific image CHA and the specific number (intermediate decorative pattern 8C) are oriented in the same direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (I), an effect is performed in which a specific number (intermediate decorative symbol 8C) and a specific image CHA bounce. As a result, the display position and orientation of the specific number (intermediate decorative symbol 8C) and the specific image CHA change while maintaining the positional relationship with each other. Specifically, the specific number (intermediate decorative symbol 8C) and the specific image CHA move in the upper left direction of the display screen 7a, and the orientation is along the vertical direction (straight). Then, as shown in FIG. 63 (J), the specific number (intermediate decorative symbol 8C) and the specific image CHA move downward while maintaining the direction along the vertical direction, and stop display at that position. Will be done. As a result, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are fixedly stopped and displayed.

[Design direction change effect C]
FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining the symbol direction change effect C. In the symbol direction change effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 64 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L among the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is variablely displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. .. At this time, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are not displayed. In other words, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are changing, but are not in a visible state. The left decorative symbol 8L frame-in from the vicinity of the upper left corner of the display screen 7a and moves diagonally downward to the right. At this time, each number constituting the left decorative symbol 8L moves in a state where the direction (posture) of the number is tilted to the left. That is, each number is tilted in the direction along the fluctuation direction, and the bottom of each number is displayed facing the traveling direction (lower right direction). The speed of the variable display gradually decreases, and a specific number (here, "2") temporarily stops at the first position near the lower center of the display screen 7a. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are also referred to as a first decorative symbol, a second decorative symbol, and a third decorative symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (B), the specific image CHA is displayed below the specific number (left decorative symbol 8L). The specific image CHA represents a specific object. Here, the specific image CHA represents a smiley face. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. The specific image CHA covers a part of the lower part of the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L), and a part of the specific number is difficult to see. The orientation (posture) of this specific image CHA is also tilted in the same manner as the specific number (left decorative symbol 8L). The specific image CHA and the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) are oriented in the same direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (C), an effect is performed in which a specific number (left decorative symbol 8L) and a specific image CHA bounce. As a result, the display position and orientation of the specific number (left decorative symbol 8L) and the specific image CHA change while maintaining the positional relationship with each other. Specifically, the specific number (left decorative symbol 8L) and the specific image CHA move to the second position in the upper left direction of the display screen 7a, and the orientation is along the vertical direction (straight). The second position is located above the first position in the vertical direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 64 (D), the specific number (left decorative symbol 8L) and the specific image CHA move downward while maintaining the direction along the vertical direction, and at the third position. Stop is displayed. The third position is located on the lower side in the vertical direction from the second position.

In parallel with the stop display, the right decorative symbol 8R is variablely displayed. At this time, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is not displayed. In other words, the decorative symbol 8C is changing, but not in a visible state. The right decorative symbol 8R frame-in from the vicinity of the upper center of the display screen 7a and moves diagonally downward to the right. That is, the left decorative symbol 8L is variablely displayed in the same variable direction as the variable direction. At this time, each number constituting the right decorative symbol 8R moves in a state where the direction (posture) of the number is tilted to the left. That is, the left decorative symbol 8L moves in a state of being tilted to the same degree as the tilt of the number when it fluctuates. Each number is tilted in the direction of fluctuation, and the bottom of each number is displayed facing the traveling direction (lower right direction). The speed of the variable display gradually decreases, and when a specific number (here, "2") is located near the lower right of the display screen 7a, it temporarily stops.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (E), the specific image CHA is displayed below the specific number (right decorative symbol 8R). The specific image CHA represents a specific object. Here, the specific image CHA is the same as that displayed on the left decorative symbol 8L, but may be an image having different contents. The specific image CHA covers a part of the lower part of the specific number (right decorative symbol 8R), and a part of the specific number is difficult to see. This specific image CHA is also tilted in the same direction as the specific number.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (F), an effect is performed in which a specific number (right decorative symbol 8R) and a specific image CHA bounce. As a result, the display position and orientation of the specific number (right decorative symbol 8R) and the specific image CHA change while maintaining the positional relationship with each other. Specifically, the specific number (right decorative symbol 8R) and the specific image CHA move in the upper left direction of the display screen 7a, and the orientation is along the vertical direction (straight). Then, as shown in FIG. 64 (G), the specific number (right decorative symbol 8R) and the specific image CHA move downward while maintaining the orientation in the direction along the vertical direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 64 (H), the stop display is displayed at that position. After that, as shown in FIG. 64 (I), the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is variablely displayed while the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed. In other words, the variation of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C becomes visible. The intermediate decorative symbol 8C frame-in from the vicinity of the upper center of the display screen 7a and moves downward in the vertical direction. That is, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable direction different from the variable direction. At this time, each number constituting the intermediate decorative symbol 8C moves in a state in which the direction (posture) of the number is along the vertical direction (straight state). In other words, each number is oriented along the direction of fluctuation, and the bottom of each number is displayed facing the direction of travel (downward). The speed of the variable display gradually decreases, and when a specific number (here, "2") is located near the center of the display screen 7a, it temporarily stops. Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (J), the specific image CHA is not displayed above the specific number (intermediate decorative symbol 8C), but is stopped and displayed. As a result, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are fixedly stopped and displayed.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the design direction change effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 62 (A) and 62 (B), the left decorative symbol is oriented along the first direction and is oriented along the first direction (for example, diagonally to the right). After the first effect and the first effect, which are variably displayed in the direction), as shown in FIGS. 62 (C) to 62 (E), the left decorative symbol is in a second direction different from the first direction (direction). For example, it is possible to execute a second effect in which the stop display is displayed in the direction along the vertical direction. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 63 and 64.
[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 62 (A), in the second effect, the left decorative symbol reaches the first position in the direction along the first direction (for example, the diagonally right direction). Later, as shown in FIG. 62 (C), the direction is along the second direction (for example, the vertical direction) while moving toward the second position located above the first position in the vertical direction. After reaching the second position, as shown in FIG. 62 (D), the third position is located on the lower side in the vertical direction from the second position while maintaining the orientation along the second direction. Move towards position. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 63 and 64.
[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 62 (B) and 62 (C), in the second effect, the left decorative symbol moves toward the second position after reaching the first position. At that time, a part of the specific image CHA becomes difficult to see. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 63 and 64.
[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 63 (D), after the second effect, the right decorative symbol is newly moved to the first direction (for example, diagonally to the right) from the state where it is not displayed. After the third effect, which is variablely displayed in the direction along the first direction, and as shown in FIG. 63 (G), the right decorative symbol is along the second direction. It is possible to execute the fourth effect, which is stopped and displayed in the vertical direction. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 64 (I), after the fourth effect, the intermediate decorative symbol is oriented in a third direction (for example, a vertical direction) different from the first direction. It is possible to execute the fifth effect which is variablely displayed in the direction along the third direction. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 62, the first direction is a direction oblique to the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the second direction is a vertical direction. The direction is along. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the design direction change effect.
[Modification 1]
The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are specific numbers, but they do not have to be numbers. It may be a character graphic symbol. Although it is assumed that only one set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed on the display screen 7a, a plurality of sets of decorative symbols may be displayed.

[Modification 2]
In FIG. 62, the left decorative symbol 8L bounces and follows the vertical direction after the variation is displayed, but if the direction is different from the variation direction, the left decorative symbol 8L may be in a direction other than the vertical direction. Good. For example, the left decorative symbol 8L may be tilted to the left side to be stopped and displayed, or may be tilted sideways to be stopped and displayed after bouncing. Further, the left decorative symbol 8L may be stopped and displayed by changing its direction without bouncing after the variable display.

[Modification 3]
In the symbol direction change effects A, B, and C, the fluctuation of the right decorative symbol may be visible (variation display is displayed) before the left decorative symbol is stopped, or after the left decorative symbol is stopped. Fluctuations may be visible (variation display is displayed). The same applies to the decorative design.

[Modification example 4]
The contents of the symbol direction change effects A, B, and C may be combined as appropriate. For example, in the symbol direction change effects A and B, the display position of the specific image CHA may be set to the symbol direction change effect C. Further, for example, in the symbol direction change effects A and B, the change direction and the stop mode of the intermediate decorative symbol may be set to the symbol direction change effect C.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A2-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a first decorative pattern.
The first effect in which the first decorative symbol is variably displayed in the direction along the first direction in the direction along the first direction, and the first effect.
After the first effect, a second effect in which the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a direction along a second direction different from the first direction can be executed.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A2-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A2-1.
In the second effect, after the first decorative symbol reaches the first position in the direction along the first direction, the second decorative symbol is located on one side in the vertical direction from the first position. While moving toward the position, the direction becomes the direction along the second direction, and after reaching the second position, the direction is maintained along the second direction and is more vertical than the second position. Move towards a third position located on the other side of the direction,
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A2-3]
A game machine according to the aspect A2-1 or the aspect A2-2.
One of the plurality of types of images is a specific image.
In the second effect, when the first decorative symbol reaches the first position and then moves toward the second position, a part of the first decorative symbol becomes difficult to see due to the specific image.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A2-1 to A2-3.
One of the plurality of types of images is a second decorative symbol that constitutes a set of decorative symbols that can notify whether or not the image is hit, together with the first decorative symbol.
After the second effect, the second decorative symbol is newly displayed in a direction along the first direction from an undisplayed state in a direction along the first direction. And the production of
After the third effect, a fourth effect in which the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the direction along the second direction can be executed.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A2-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A2-4.
One of the plurality of types of images is a third decorative symbol that constitutes a set of decorative symbols that can notify whether or not the image is hit, together with the first decorative symbol.
After the fourth effect, a fifth effect in which the third decorative symbol is varied and displayed in a direction along the third direction different from the first direction. Is feasible,
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A2-1 to A2-5.
The first direction is a direction oblique to the display means.
The second direction is a direction along the vertical direction.
A game machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the accessory symbol cooperation effects A to C will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 67. This accessory symbol cooperation effect can be executed during a variable effect of the decorative symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the accessory symbol cooperation effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7. Further, when the lamp control board 107 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the accessory symbol cooperation effect, the first movable accessory 14 or the second movable accessory 14 or the second movable combination Drive the object 15.

[Character design cooperation production A]
FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining the accessory symbol cooperation effect A. The character symbol cooperation effect A is one of the variation pattern effects including the pseudo continuous effect, and FIGS. 65 (A) to 65 (J) are executed with one variation. In the accessory symbol cooperation effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 65 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction. The decorative symbol includes a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by combining these stop symbols. The white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Four hold icons 9A are displayed in the first hold display area on the left side of the hold display position.

After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (B), after the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed (including the temporary stop display), the pseudo-continuous start suggestion effect shown in FIG. 65 (C) is executed. In the pseudo-continuous start suggestion effect, the second movable accessory 15 moves (advances) downward toward the center of the display screen 7a from the retracted position (FIG. 1) above the image display device 7, and is a part of the display screen 7a. It stands still at the advance position in front of it. The shapes of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the display screen 7a change (deform) as the second movable accessory 15 moves to the advanced position. Here, the shapes of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are gradually collapsed in conjunction with the downward movement of the second movable accessory 15. That is, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are deformed so as to be crushed and distorted by the second movable accessory 15. Since the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed are crushed and distorted by the second movable accessory 15, the player does not determine the stopped and displayed symbols, and the fluctuation is executed again. That is, you can notice that the pseudo-ream is executed. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (D), an image corresponding to the character "OARO" in the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, in a state where the second movable accessory 15 is stationary at the advanced position, a plurality of the same characters (that is, "OARO") as the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15 are displayed. The image displayed on the display screen 7a may be an image related to a specific object (characters, figures, symbols, etc.) displayed in the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15, and is completely the same. It doesn't have to be a color or shape. At this time, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed, and an image having the same contents as the decorative part of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a, which is a special effect for the player. You can make an impression and improve your interest.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (E), the variable display is started again. After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (F), after the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed (including the temporary stop display), the pseudo-continuous continuation suggestion effect shown in FIG. 65 (G) is executed. The pseudo-ream continuation suggestion effect is the same as the pseudo-ream start suggestion effect described above. That is, the second movable accessory 15 moves to the advance position. With the movement to the advance position, the shapes of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the display screen 7a change (deform). Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R gradually collapse in shape in conjunction with the downward movement of the second movable accessory 15. That is, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are deformed so as to be crushed and distorted by the second movable accessory 15. The mode of modification may be different from the pseudo-continuous start suggestion effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (H), an image corresponding to the character "OARO" in the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, in a state where the second movable accessory 15 is stationary at the advanced position, a plurality of the same characters (that is, "OARO") as the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15 are displayed. The image displayed on the display screen 7a may be an image related to a specific object (characters, figures, symbols, etc.) displayed in the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15, and is completely the same. It doesn't have to be a color or shape. At this time, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (I), the variable display is started again. After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as fixed stops. Here, the stop is displayed in the mode of a big hit.

[Character design cooperation production B]
FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining the accessory symbol cooperation effect B. The character symbol cooperation production B is one of the fluctuation pattern productions including the pseudo-continuous production. FIGS. 66 (A) to (B) are the previous one fluctuations, and FIGS. 66 (C) to (J) are. It is the next one variation including the pseudo-continuous production. First, as shown in FIG. 66 (A), two sets of decorative symbols are variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r are displayed in a variable mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction. The first decorative symbol includes a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by combining these stop symbols. The second decorative symbol includes a left decorative symbol 8l, a middle decorative symbol 8c, and a right decorative symbol 8r, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by combining these stop symbols. The white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 66 (B), the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r are simultaneously stopped and displayed (including the fixed stop display). At this time, at the same time, the effect that the hold icon 9C disappears (disappears) is executed. Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (C), the hold icon 9A at the first hold display position moves toward the hold display position. At this time, of the two decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol), the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r start variable display. The stop display is maintained for the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. That is, in the second decorative symbol, the hold icon 9A at the first hold display position starts moving, and the variable display starts before reaching the hold display position.

Next, the pseudo-continuous start suggestion effect shown in FIG. 66 (D) is executed. In the pseudo-continuous start suggestion effect, first, in the state where the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, and 8r continue the variable display, the first decoration that continues to stop at the previous fixed stop display roll "123". The display of the symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R disappears temporarily, and instead, the pseudo-continuous start suggestion display of "I'm going !!!" is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 66 (E), the second movable accessory 15 moves (advances) downward from the retracted position (FIG. 1) above the image display device 7 toward the center of the display screen 7a to be displayed. It stands still at the front advance position that covers a part of the screen 7a. After the pseudo-continuous start suggestion display, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the display screen 7a again change (deform) in shape as the second movable accessory 15 moves to the advanced position. To do. Here, the shapes of the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are gradually collapsed in conjunction with the downward movement of the second movable accessory 15. That is, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are deformed so as to be crushed and distorted by the second movable accessory 15. Since the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed are crushed and distorted by the second movable accessory 15, the player does not determine the stopped and displayed symbols, and the fluctuation is executed again. You can notice that, that is, the pseudo-ream is executed. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (F), an image corresponding to the character "OARO" in the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, in a state where the second movable accessory 15 is stationary at the advanced position, a plurality of the same characters (that is, "OARO") as the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15 are displayed. The image displayed on the display screen 7a may be an image related to a specific object (characters, figures, symbols, etc.) displayed in the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15, and is completely the same. It doesn't have to be a color or shape. At this time, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are not displayed, while the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r continue to be variablely displayed. Here, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed, and an image having the same contents as the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a, which is a special effect for the player. You can impress that and improve your interest.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (G), in a state where the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r continue the variable display, the variable display of the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started. As a result, both the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r are displayed in a variable manner. After that, as shown in FIG. 66 (H), in a state where the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r continue the variable display, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped display (including the temporary stop display). After that, as shown in FIG. 66 (I), the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start the variable display again. That is, the pseudo-continuous production is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 66 (J), both the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r are fixedly stopped and displayed. Here, the stop is displayed in the mode of a big hit.

[Character design cooperation production C]
FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining the accessory symbol cooperation effect C. The character symbol cooperation production C is one of the fluctuation pattern productions including the pseudo continuous production. FIGS. 67 (A) to (B) are the previous one fluctuations, and FIGS. 67 (C) to (J) are. It is the next one variation including the pseudo-continuous production. First, as shown in FIG. 67 (A), two sets of decorative symbols are variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r are displayed in a variable mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction. The first decorative symbol includes a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by combining these stop symbols. The second decorative symbol includes a left decorative symbol 8l, a middle decorative symbol 8c, and a right decorative symbol 8r, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by combining these stop symbols. The white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 67 (B), the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r are simultaneously stopped and displayed (including the fixed stop display). At this time, at the same time, the effect that the hold icon 9C disappears (disappears) is executed. Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (C), the hold icon 9A at the first hold display position moves toward the hold display position. At this time, of the two decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol), the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r start variable display. The stop display is maintained for the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. That is, in the second decorative symbol, the hold icon 9A at the first hold display position starts moving, and the variable display starts before reaching the hold display position.

Next, the pseudo-continuous start suggestion effect shown in FIG. 67 (D) is executed. In the pseudo-continuous start suggestion effect, first, in the state where the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, and 8r continue the variable display, the first decoration that continues to stop at the previous fixed stop display roll "123". The display of the symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R disappears temporarily, and instead, the pseudo-continuous start suggestion display of "I'm going !!!" is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 67 (E), the second movable accessory 15 moves (advances) downward from the retracted position (FIG. 1) above the image display device 7 toward the center of the display screen 7a to be displayed. A part of the screen 7a is covered, and a rotation operation is executed at that position. As a result, after the pseudo-continuous start suggestion display, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the display screen 7a again change in shape as the second movable accessory 15 moves downward and rotates. (Deform. Here, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are cracked in conjunction with the downward movement of the second movable accessory 15, and the shape is gradually crushed. That is, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are crushed by the second movable accessory 15, and are distorted and deformed so as to be cracked. In the player, the stop-displayed first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are crushed by the second movable accessory 15, distorted, and cracked. You can notice that it is executed, that is, the pseudo-ream is executed. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (F), an image corresponding to the character "OARO" in the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, in a state where the second movable accessory 15 has returned to the retracted position, one large character (that is, "OARO") similar to the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. .. The image displayed on the display screen 7a may be an image related to a specific object (characters, figures, symbols, etc.) displayed in the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15, and is completely the same. It doesn't have to be a color or shape. At this time, neither the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r are displayed. Here, both the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r are not displayed, and an image having the same contents as the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a. By doing so, it is possible to impress the player that it is a special production, and it is possible to improve the interest.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (G), the variable display of both the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r is started again. After that, as shown in FIG. 67 (H), in a state where the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r continue the variable display, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped display (including temporary stop display). After that, as shown in FIG. 67 (I), the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start the variable display again. That is, the pseudo-continuous production is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 67 (J), both the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r are fixedly stopped and displayed. Here, the stop is displayed in the mode of a big hit.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the character symbol cooperation effect.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 65 (F), the first effect in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed, and as shown in FIG. 65 (G), the first effect. After the production of 1, the second production in which the shapes of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change as the second movable accessory 15 moves to the advancing position that covers a part of the display screen 7a. Can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 66 and 67.
[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 65 (G), in the second effect, the shapes of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are distorted with the movement of the second movable accessory 15. .. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 66 and 67.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 65 (G), the second movable accessory 15 has a decorative portion represented by “OARO”, and is shown in FIG. 65 (H). As shown, after the second effect, a third effect in which "OARO" is displayed on the display screen 7a can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 66 and 67.
[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 66 (C) to (J) and 67 (C) to (J), the first effect and the second effect are during one variation. It is executed, and in the first effect, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode in which the first effect is stopped and displayed after the change immediately before the changed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 66 (G) to (J) and 67 (G) to (J), a pseudo continuous effect is executed after the third effect. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 66 (C) and 67 (C), one of the plurality of types of images is a second image different from the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. It is a decorative pattern, and in the first effect, the second decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the character symbol cooperation effect.
[Modification 1]
In the character symbol cooperation effect A, it is assumed that FIGS. 65 (A) to (J) are executed with one variation. However, FIGS. 65 (A) to (B) and FIGS. 65 (C) to (J) may have different variations. Further, in the character symbol cooperation effects B and C, FIGS. 66 (A) to (B) and FIGS. 67 (A) to (B) are changed by one, and FIGS. 66 (C) to (J) and FIGS. 67. It is assumed that (C) to (J) are the following one variation. However, FIGS. 66 (A) to (J) and FIGS. 67 (A) to 67 (J) may be executed with one variation.

[Modification 2]
The modes of deformation of the decorative symbols illustrated in the accessory symbol cooperation effects A to C are examples thereof, and are not limited to these modes. That is, the deformation of the decorative symbol when the second movable accessory 15 advances is not limited to the distorted mode. For example, the decorative design may collapse and fall apart, or may have the same shape and be smaller in size.

[Modification 3]
In the accessory symbol cooperation production A, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are set to specific numbers, but they do not have to be numbers. It may be a character graphic symbol. Although it is assumed that only one set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed on the display screen 7a, a plurality of sets of decorative symbols may be displayed. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may temporarily disappear from the variable display during fluctuation, or may not be continuously displayed as variable. Here, the variable display means a state in which the variable mode is visually displayed.

[Modification example 4]
The contents of the character symbol cooperation effects A to C may be combined as appropriate. For example, in FIG. 66 (E) of the character symbol cooperation effect B, the effect of FIG. 67 (E) of the character symbol cooperation effect C may be performed. Further, for example, in the pseudo-continuous production of FIGS. 66 (G) to (J) of the character symbol cooperation effect B, the pseudo-continuous effect of the character symbol cooperation effect A may be executed.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A3-1]
A display means that can display multiple types of images,
A gaming machine including a movable accessory that can be moved in front of the display means.
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern.
The first effect that the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, and
After the first effect, it is possible to perform a second effect in which the shape of the decorative symbol changes as the movable accessory moves to the advance position that covers a part of the display means. ,
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-1.
In the second effect, the game machine is characterized in that the shape of the decorative pattern is distorted with the movement of the movable accessory.
◇ [Aspect A3-3]
A game machine according to aspect A3-1 or aspect A3-2.
The movable accessory has a decorative portion on which a specific object is represented.
After the second effect, a third effect in which the specific object is displayed on the display means can be executed.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A3-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-3.
After the third effect, a pseudo-continuous effect is executed.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A3-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A3-1 to A3-4.
The first effect and the second effect are executed during one variation.
In the first effect, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed after the change immediately before the change in which the first effect is executed.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A3-1 to A3-5.
One of the plurality of types of images is a second decorative symbol different from the decorative symbol.
In the first effect, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner.
A game machine characterized by that.

The specific image symbol cooperation effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 68 to 70. This specific image symbol cooperation effect can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the specific image symbol cooperation effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7. Further, when the lamp control board 107 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the specific image symbol cooperation effect, the first movable accessory 14 or the second movable accessory 14 or the second movable accessory Drive the object 15.

[Specific image symbol cooperation production A]
FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining the specific image symbol cooperation effect A. In the specific image symbol cooperation effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 68A, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction. The decorative symbol includes a symbol image of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by combining these stop symbols. The white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Four hold icons 9A are displayed in the first hold display area on the left side of the hold display position.

After that, as shown in FIG. 68 (B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed (including the temporary stop display) at "123", which is an outlier. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. Here, "lined up in the horizontal direction" includes not only those lined up strictly in the horizontal direction but also those lined up almost horizontally. That is, all the items that can be recognized by those skilled in the art as being arranged in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a are included in those that are arranged in the horizontal direction.

After that, the pseudo-continuous start suggestion effect shown in FIG. 68 (C) is executed. In the pseudo-continuous start suggestion effect, the specific image CHA is newly displayed by the frame-in from above the display screen 7a, and moves downward on the display screen 7a. The specific image CHA represents a specific object. Here, the specific image CHA represents a smiley face. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist.

After that, as shown in FIG. 68 (D), the specific image CHA moves to a position where it overlaps the stop-displayed decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and then reciprocates along the horizontal direction. Here, "moving back and forth along the horizontal direction" includes not only those that move strictly in the horizontal direction but also those that move in a substantially horizontal direction. That is, all those that can be recognized by those skilled in the art as moving in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a are included in those that are moving in the horizontal direction. Since the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R in the stop display are arranged along the horizontal direction, the specific image CHA reciprocates along the arrangement direction of the decorative symbols. At this time, the specific image CHA is displayed on the front side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Here, when an image is "displayed on the front side" with respect to another image, it is displayed as if it is located on the front side (front side) when the two images are displayed overlapping. Specifically, it means a state in which an image is displayed without being chipped in an overlapping portion of two images. On the contrary, when two images are displayed overlapping, they are displayed as if they are located on the back side (rear side), and the image is missing and displayed in the overlapping part of the two images. , The image is said to be "displayed on the back side" with respect to other images.

As shown in FIG. 68 (D), the specific image CHA overlaps both the intermediate decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R by reciprocating in the horizontal direction, and the mode displayed on the front side thereof and FIG. 68 As shown in (E), both the intermediate decorative symbol 8C and the left decorative symbol 8L are overlapped with each other, and the mode displayed on the front side thereof is repeated. After that, as shown in FIG. 68 (F), the specific image CHA is displayed on the back side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R which are stopped and displayed, and reciprocates in the horizontal direction on these back sides. Due to the reciprocating movement on the back side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 68 (G), both the intermediate decorative symbol 8C and the left decorative symbol 8L are overlapped, and the mode displayed on the back side thereof is repeated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (H), a fade-out effect is performed. Specifically, in the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the specific image CHA, the specific image CHA is located on the back side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the image is gradually thinned so as to gradually become thinner. It becomes difficult to see (fade out). As a result, the player gradually becomes difficult to see the stop-displayed decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, so that the stop-displayed symbols are not fixed, and the fluctuation is executed again. You can notice that, that is, the pseudo-ream is executed. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (I), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start the variable display again. After that, as shown in FIG. 68 (J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped and displayed. Here, the stop is displayed in the mode of a big hit.

[Specific image symbol cooperation production B]
FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining the specific image symbol cooperation effect B. In the specific image symbol cooperation effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 69 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R after the variable display are displayed as "789". Stop display (including temporary stop display) is displayed. The decorative symbol includes a symbol image of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by combining these stop symbols. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. Here, "lined up in the horizontal direction" includes not only those lined up strictly in the horizontal direction but also those lined up almost horizontally. That is, all the items that can be recognized by those skilled in the art as being arranged in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a are included in those that are arranged in the horizontal direction. The white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Four hold icons 9A are displayed in the first hold display area on the left side of the hold display position.

After that, the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 69 (B) and 69 (C) is executed. In the pseudo-continuous start suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 68 (C) of the specific image symbol cooperation effect A, the specific image CHA is newly displayed by the frame-in from above the display screen 7a and moves downward on the display screen 7a. To do. The specific image CHA represents a specific object. Here, the specific image CHA represents a smiley face. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist.

After that, as shown in FIG. 69 (B), the specific image CHA moves to a position where it overlaps the stop-displayed decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and then reciprocates along the horizontal direction. Here, "moving back and forth along the horizontal direction" includes not only those that move strictly in the horizontal direction but also those that move in a substantially horizontal direction. That is, all those that can be recognized by those skilled in the art as moving in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a are included in those that are moving in the horizontal direction. Since the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R in the stop display are arranged along the horizontal direction, the specific image CHA reciprocates along the arrangement direction of the decorative symbols. At this time, the specific image CHA is displayed on the front side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Here, when an image is "displayed on the front side" with respect to another image, it is displayed as if it is located on the front side (front side) when the two images are displayed overlapping. Specifically, it means a state in which an image is displayed without being chipped in an overlapping portion of two images. On the contrary, when two images are displayed overlapping, they are displayed as if they are located on the back side (rear side), and the image is missing and displayed in the overlapping part of the two images. , The image is said to be "displayed on the back side" with respect to other images.

As shown in FIG. 69 (B), the specific image CHA overlaps both the intermediate decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R by reciprocating in the horizontal direction, and the mode displayed on the front side thereof and the specific image As shown in FIG. 68 (E) of the symbol cooperation effect A, both the intermediate decorative symbol 8C and the left decorative symbol 8L are overlapped, and an effect of repeating the mode displayed on the front side thereof is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 69 (C), the specific image CHA is displayed on the back side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R which are stopped and displayed, and reciprocates in the horizontal direction on these back sides. As shown in FIG. 69 (C), due to the reciprocating movement of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the back side, both the middle decorative symbol 8C and the left decorative symbol 8L are overlapped with each other, and the mode displayed on the back side thereof. As shown in FIG. 68 (F) of the specific image symbol cooperation effect A, both the intermediate decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are overlapped, and an effect of repeating the mode displayed on the back side thereof is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (H) of the specific image symbol cooperation effect A, a fade-out effect is performed. Specifically, in the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the specific image CHA, the specific image CHA is located on the back side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the image is gradually thinned so as to gradually become thinner. It becomes difficult to see (fade out). As a result, the player gradually becomes difficult to see the stop-displayed decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, so that the stop-displayed symbols are not fixed, and the fluctuation is executed again. You can notice that, that is, the pseudo-ream is executed. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (D), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start the variable display again. Specifically, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction. After that, as shown in FIG. 69 (E), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as fixed stops. Here, the stop is displayed in the mode of a big hit.

After that, as shown in FIG. 69 (F), the specific image CHA and the jackpot confirmation suggestion image CHB are displayed. The jackpot confirmation suggestion image CHB is an image that suggests to the player that the jackpot has been confirmed, and here, the characters "I did it!" Are displayed. Here, two jackpot confirmation suggestion image CHBs are displayed. Both the specific image CHA and the jackpot confirmation suggestion image CHB are newly displayed by frame-in from above the display screen 7a, and move downward on the display screen 7a. The specific image CHA and the jackpot confirmation suggestion image CHB move to positions overlapping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed at the jackpot. Both the specific image CHA and the jackpot confirmation suggestion image CHB are displayed on the front side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the jackpot confirmation suggestion image CHB is displayed on the front side of the specific image CHA. That is, the specific image CHA is displayed on the front surface of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the jackpot confirmation suggestion image CHB is further displayed on the front surface of the specific image CHA. In this way, by overlapping a plurality of a plurality of images, it is possible to produce a three-dimensional effect in the depth direction, and it is possible to improve the interest.

After that, as shown in FIG. 69 (G), the jackpot confirmation suggestion image CHB disappears from the display screen 7a, and the specific image CHA is stopped and displayed along the horizontal direction while overlapping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Move back and forth. Since the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R in the stop display are arranged along the horizontal direction, the specific image CHA reciprocates along the arrangement direction of the decorative symbols. At this time, the specific image CHA is continuously displayed on the front side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. As shown in FIG. 69 (G), the specific image CHA overlaps both the intermediate decorative symbol 8C and the left decorative symbol 8L by the reciprocating movement in the horizontal direction, and the mode displayed on the front side thereof and FIG. 69 As shown in (B), both the intermediate decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are overlapped with each other, and the mode displayed on the front side thereof is repeated. After that, as shown in FIG. 69 (H), the specific image CHA is displayed on the back side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R which are stopped and displayed, and reciprocates in the horizontal direction on these back sides. As shown in FIG. 69 (H), due to the reciprocating movement on the back side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, both the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are overlapped, and the mode displayed on the back side thereof. As shown in FIG. 69 (C), both the intermediate decorative symbol 8C and the left decorative symbol 8L are overlapped with each other, and the mode displayed on the back side thereof is repeated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (I) of the specific image symbol cooperation effect A, a fade-out effect is performed. Specifically, in the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the specific image CHA, the specific image CHA is located on the back side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the image is gradually thinned so as to gradually become thinner. It becomes difficult to see (fade out). As a result, the player can notice that the jackpot game is started after that, since the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R of the jackpot displayed as stopped gradually become difficult to see. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest. After that, as shown in FIG. 69 (J), the right-handed image MGU is displayed, and then the jackpot game is executed.

[Specific image symbol cooperation production C]
FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining the specific image symbol cooperation effect C. In the specific image symbol cooperation effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 70 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction. The decorative symbol includes a symbol image of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by combining these stop symbols. The white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Four hold icons 9A are displayed in the first hold display area on the left side of the hold display position. The specific image CHA is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are displayed in a variable manner. The specific image CHA is newly displayed by frame-in from above the display screen 7a, and moves to a position overlapping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R on the display screen 7a. The specific image CHA is displayed on the front side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are variablely displayed. The specific image CHA represents a specific object. Here, the specific image CHA represents a smiley face. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist.

After that, as shown in FIG. 70 (B), the specific image CHA reciprocates along the horizontal direction in a state of overlapping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are displayed in a variable manner. Here, "moving back and forth along the horizontal direction" includes not only those that move strictly in the horizontal direction but also those that move in a substantially horizontal direction. That is, all those that can be recognized by those skilled in the art as moving in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a are included in those that are moving in the horizontal direction. At this time, the moving specific image CHA is displayed on the front side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Here, when an image is "displayed on the front side" with respect to another image, it is displayed as if it is located on the front side (front side) when the two images are displayed overlapping. Specifically, it means a state in which an image is displayed without being chipped in an overlapping portion of two images. On the contrary, when two images are displayed overlapping, they are displayed as if they are located on the back side (rear side), and the image is missing and displayed in the overlapping part of the two images. , The image is said to be "displayed on the back side" with respect to other images.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (C), the fluctuation speed of the left decorative symbol 8L among the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R slows down, and the numbers start to fluctuate (move) in the vertical direction in a visible state. .. Since the specific image CHA continues to move back and forth in the horizontal direction, it overlaps with a plurality of moving numerical images constituting the left decorative symbol 8L. Also at this time, the specific image CHA is displayed on the front side of the numerical image constituting the left decorative symbol 8L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (D), the fluctuation speed of the right decorative symbol 8R among the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R slows down, and the numbers start to fluctuate (move) in the vertical direction in a visible state. .. On the other hand, the fluctuation speed of the left decorative symbol 8L is further reduced, and the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed at a specific number (here, "1"). Since the specific image CHA continues to move back and forth in the horizontal direction, it overlaps with a plurality of moving numerical images constituting the right decorative symbol 8R. It also overlaps with the left decorative symbol 8L during the stop display. Also at this time, the specific image CHA is displayed on the front side of the numerical image constituting the right decorative symbol 8R. In addition, it is displayed on the front side of the left decorative symbol 8L during the stop display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (E), the fluctuation speed of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C among the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R slows down, and the numbers start to fluctuate (move) in the vertical direction in a visible state. .. On the other hand, the fluctuation speed of the right decorative symbol 8R is further reduced, and the display is stopped at a specific number (here, "7"). Since the specific image CHA continues to move back and forth in the horizontal direction, it overlaps with a plurality of moving numerical images constituting the intermediate decorative symbol 8C. It also overlaps with the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R during the stop display. Also at this time, the specific image CHA is displayed on the front side of the numerical image constituting the intermediate decorative symbol 8C. Further, it is displayed on the front side of each of the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R during the stop display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (F), after the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed at the outlier "167", a change effect in which the shape of the specific image CHA is changed is executed. Here, as one of the change effects, an effect of increasing the specific image CHA is performed, but the mode of change is not limited to this. For example, in the specific image CHA, the content of the image may be changed to a different content. Even during the change effect, the specific image CHA reciprocates on the front side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are continuously displayed as stopped. By this change effect, it is possible to make the player expect that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed at the wrong eye will change again, and it is possible to improve the interest.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (G), a pluralization effect in which a plurality of specific image CHAs are displayed is executed. Here, as one of the pluralization effects, an effect in which one new specific image CHA is additionally displayed is performed, but the mode of the pluralization is not limited to this. For example, two or more specific image CHAs may be additionally displayed. Even during the pluralization effect, the specific image CHA before being added is continuously reciprocating on the front side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed. The newly added specific image CHA reciprocates on the back side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed. With this multiple effect, it is possible to further raise the expectation that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed at the wrong eye will change again, and it is possible to improve the interest.

After that, as shown in FIG. 70 (H), the effect of frame-out of the two specific image CHAs is performed. Here, one of the two specific image CHAs moves upwards, the other moves downwards, and is framed out at the same time. After that, as shown in FIG. 70 (I), a pseudo-ream suggestion image NKM suggesting that the re-variation of the decorative symbol is started (start of pseudo-ream) is displayed. Here, the pseudo-ream suggestion image NKM represents the characters "second time !!" indicating the number of pseudo-reams. At this time, the display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R disappears. After that, as shown in FIG. 70 (J), when the pseudo-continuous suggestion image NKM disappears, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner again.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the specific image symbol cooperation effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 68 (D) to 68 (E), the first effect in which the specific image CHA is displayed on the front side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the drawing. As shown in 68 (F) to (G), after the first effect, the second effect in which the specific image CHA is displayed on the back side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R can be executed. .. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 68 (D) to 68 (G), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in the first effect and the second effect. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 68, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R that can notify whether or not they are hit. A symbol image is included, and in the first effect, as shown in FIG. 68 (D), the specific image CHA is one or more of the symbol images of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. As shown in FIG. 68 (E), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed overlapping the other one or more of the symbol images. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 68 (B) to 68 (G), in the first effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. , The specific image CHA reciprocates along the horizontal direction. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (B), in the first effect, after the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed in a state where the specific image CHA is not displayed. As shown in FIGS. 68 (C) to 68 (D), the specific image CHA includes an effect of being newly displayed on the front side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R by frame-in. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (H), after the second effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the specific image CHA become difficult to see due to fading out. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the specific image symbol cooperation effect.
[Modification 1]
In the specific image symbol cooperation effects A and B, the specific image CHA is assumed to overlap at the same time as the two symbol images. However, the specific image CHA may sequentially overlap with only one symbol image, or may overlap with three symbol images at the same time.

[Modification 2]
In the specific image symbol cooperation effects A to C, the specific image CHA is assumed to move along the horizontal direction. However, the specific image CHA may be arcuate or meandering. Further, it may move left and right while swinging in the vertical direction. Further, it may be stopped in the middle.

[Modification 3]
In the specific image symbol cooperation effects A to C, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are set to specific numbers, but they do not have to be numbers. It may be a character graphic symbol. Although it is assumed that only one set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed on the display screen 7a, a plurality of sets of decorative symbols may be displayed. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may temporarily disappear from the variable display during fluctuation, or may not be continuously displayed as variable. Here, the variable display means a state in which the variable mode is visually displayed.

[Modification example 4]
The contents of the specific image symbol cooperation effects A to C may be combined as appropriate. For example, after FIGS. 68 (A) to 68 (I), FIGS. 70 (A) to (J) may be executed. Further, for example, after FIGS. 70 (A) to (J), FIGS. 69 (D) to (J) may be executed.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A4-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern.
One of the plurality of types of images is a specific image.
The first effect in which the specific image is displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern, and
After the first effect, a second effect in which the specific image is displayed on the back side of the decorative pattern can be executed.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A4-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A4-1.
In the first effect and the second effect, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A4-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A4-2.
The decorative symbol includes a plurality of symbol images capable of notifying whether or not it is a hit.
In the first effect, the specific image is displayed so as to overlap one or more of the plurality of symbol images, and then displayed so as to overlap the other one or more of the plurality of symbol images.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A4-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A4-3.
In the first effect, the symbol images are stopped and displayed side by side in the first direction, and the specific image reciprocates along the first direction.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A4-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A4-1 to A4-4.
The first effect includes an effect in which the specific image is newly displayed on the front side of the decorative symbol by frame-in after the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a state where the specific image is not displayed. Yes,
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A4-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A4-1 to A4-5.
After the second effect, the decorative pattern and the specific image become difficult to see due to fading out.
A game machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the decorative pattern mode change effects A to C will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 73. This decorative pattern mode change effect can be executed during the decorative pattern variation effect. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the decorative pattern mode change effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main image is read. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

[Decorative pattern mode change effect A]
FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern mode change effect A. In the decorative symbol mode change effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 71 (A), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol variation effect is performed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. Variable display) is performed. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner at such a high speed that the numbers cannot be visually recognized. After the variable display is performed at high speed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R may or may not disappear once.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (B), an effect in which the left decorative symbol 8L appears is performed. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L moves along a curved trajectory that draws an arc so as to bend to the right from the front side to the back side of the display screen 7a while the moving speed becomes slow. While it is displayed fluctuatingly. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L is gradually displayed smaller as it moves toward the back side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (C), the moving speed of the left decorative symbol 8L becomes even slower, and one of the left decorative symbols 8L (the image of the number "9" in this embodiment) becomes the left decorative symbol. 8L rotates sideways at the stop display position where the stop display is displayed. The rotation direction of the left decorative symbol 8L is not limited to the horizontal direction, and may be a vertical direction or an oblique direction. Further, the number of rotations of the left decorative symbol 8L may be one time or a plurality of times.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (D), after the left decorative symbol 8L is rotated laterally at the stop display position, the mode of the image of the number "9" is changed. Specifically, in the left decorative pattern 8L, the image of the number "9" becomes slightly smaller and the character image is attached to the lower right of the image of the number "9" from the aspect of the image of the number "9". It changes to the above mode. Then, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed in a state where the mode is changed at the stop display position. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L other than the left decorative symbol 8L at the stop display position disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (E), an effect in which the right decorative symbol 8R appears is performed. Specifically, the right decorative symbol 8R moves along a curved trajectory that draws an arc so as to bend leftward from the back side to the front side of the display screen 7a while moving at a slower speed. It is displayed in a variable manner. That is, the right decorative symbol 8R is variablely displayed while moving in a direction different from that of the left decorative symbol 8L. At this time, the right decorative symbol 8R is gradually displayed larger as it moves toward the front side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (F), the moving speed of the right decorative symbol 8R is further slowed down, and one of the right decorative symbols 8R (the image of the number "5" in this embodiment) is the right decorative symbol. 8R rotates horizontally at the stop display position where the stop display is displayed. At this time, the rotation direction of the right decorative symbol 8R is not limited to the horizontal direction, and may be a vertical direction or an oblique direction. Further, the number of rotations of the right decorative symbol 8R may be once or may be a plurality of times.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (G), after the right decorative symbol 8R is rotated laterally at the stop display position, the mode of the image of the number “5” is changed. Specifically, in the right decorative symbol 8R, the image of the number "5" becomes slightly smaller and the character image is attached to the lower right of the image of the number "5" from the aspect of the image of the number "5". It changes to the above mode. Then, the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed in a state where the mode is changed at the stop display position. At this time, the right decorative symbol 8R other than the right decorative symbol 8R at the stop display position disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (H), an effect in which the intermediate decorative symbol 8C appears is performed. Specifically, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is displayed in a variable manner while moving downward from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a along a linear trajectory while the moving speed is slowed down. That is, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is displayed in a variable manner while moving in a direction different from that of the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, the size of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C does not change with movement. The intermediate decorative symbol 8C may be displayed gradually larger or smaller as it is moved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (I), the moving speed of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is further reduced, and one of the intermediate decorative symbols 8C (the image of the number "3" in the present embodiment) is the intermediate decorative symbol. 8C rotates horizontally at the stop display position where the stop display is displayed. At this time, the rotation direction of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is not limited to the horizontal direction, and may be a vertical direction or an oblique direction. Further, the number of rotations of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C may be once or may be a plurality of times.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (J), after the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is rotated laterally at the stop display position, the mode of the image of the number "3" is changed. Specifically, in the intermediate decorative pattern 8C, the image of the number "3" becomes slightly smaller and the character image is attached to the lower right of the image of the number "3" from the aspect of the image of the number "3". It changes to the above mode. Then, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed in a state where the mode is changed at the stop display position. At this time, the intermediate decorative symbols 8C other than the intermediate decorative symbol 8C at the stop display position disappear. In this way, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed in a lost mode (missing symbol). The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R that are stopped and displayed may have the same position in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a or may be different.

[Decorative pattern mode change production B]
FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern mode change effect B. In the decorative symbol mode change effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 72 (A), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol variation effect is performed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. Variable display) is performed. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner at such a high speed that the numbers cannot be visually recognized. After the variable display is performed at high speed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R may or may not disappear once.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (B), an effect in which the left decorative symbol 8L appears is performed. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L is variablely displayed while moving diagonally upward to the left from the front side to the back side of the display screen 7a along a linear trajectory while the moving speed is slowed down. .. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L is gradually displayed smaller as it moves toward the back side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (C), the moving speed of the left decorative symbol 8L becomes even slower, and one of the left decorative symbols 8L (the image of the number "9" in this embodiment) becomes the left decorative symbol. 8L rotates sideways at the stop display position where the stop display is displayed. The rotation direction of the left decorative symbol 8L is not limited to the horizontal direction, and may be a vertical direction or an oblique direction. Further, the number of rotations of the left decorative symbol 8L may be one time or a plurality of times.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (D), after the left decorative symbol 8L is rotated laterally at the stop display position, the mode of the image of the number “9” is changed. Specifically, in the left decorative pattern 8L, the image of the number "9" becomes slightly smaller and the character image is attached to the lower right of the image of the number "9" from the aspect of the image of the number "9". It changes to the above mode. Then, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed in a state where the mode is changed at the stop display position. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L other than the left decorative symbol 8L at the stop display position disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (E), an effect in which the right decorative symbol 8R appears is performed. Specifically, the right decorative symbol 8R is variablely displayed while moving along a linear trajectory in the diagonally downward left direction from the back side to the front side of the display screen 7a while the moving speed is slowed down. .. That is, the right decorative symbol 8R is variablely displayed while moving in a direction different from that of the left decorative symbol 8L. At this time, the right decorative symbol 8R is gradually displayed larger as it moves toward the front side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (F), the moving speed of the right decorative symbol 8R is further slowed down, and one of the right decorative symbols 8R (the image of the number "5" in this embodiment) is the right decorative symbol. 8R rotates horizontally at the stop display position where the stop display is displayed. The rotation direction of the right decorative symbol 8R is not limited to the horizontal direction, and may be a vertical direction or an oblique direction. Further, the number of rotations of the right decorative symbol 8R may be once or may be a plurality of times.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (G), after the right decorative symbol 8R is rotated laterally at the stop display position, the mode of the image of the number “5” is changed. Specifically, in the right decorative symbol 8R, the image of the number "5" becomes slightly smaller and the character image is attached to the lower right of the image of the number "5" from the aspect of the image of the number "5". It changes to the above mode. Then, the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed in a state where the mode is changed at the stop display position. At this time, the right decorative symbol 8R other than the right decorative symbol 8R at the stop display position disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (H), an effect in which the intermediate decorative symbol 8C appears is performed. Specifically, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is displayed in a variable manner while moving downward from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a along a linear trajectory while the moving speed is slowed down. That is, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is displayed in a variable manner while moving in a direction different from that of the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, the size of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C does not change with movement. The intermediate decorative symbol 8C may be displayed gradually larger or smaller as it is moved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (I), the moving speed of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is further slowed down, and one of the intermediate decorative symbols 8C (the image of the number "3" in the present embodiment) is the intermediate decorative symbol. 8C rotates horizontally at the stop display position where the stop display is displayed. At this time, the rotation direction of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is not limited to the horizontal direction, and may be a vertical direction or an oblique direction. Further, the number of rotations of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C may be once or may be a plurality of times.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (J), after the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is rotated laterally at the stop display position, the mode of the image of the number "3" is changed. Specifically, in the intermediate decorative pattern 8C, the image of the number "3" becomes slightly smaller and the character image is attached to the lower right of the image of the number "3" from the aspect of the image of the number "3". It changes to the above mode. Then, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed in a state where the mode is changed at the stop display position. At this time, the intermediate decorative symbols 8C other than the intermediate decorative symbol 8C at the stop display position disappear. In this way, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed in a lost mode (missing symbol). The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R that are stopped and displayed may have the same position in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a or may be different.

[Decorative pattern mode change effect C]
FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern mode change effect C. In the decorative symbol mode change effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 73 (A), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol variation effect is performed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. Variable display) is performed. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner at such a high speed that the numbers cannot be visually recognized. After the variable display is performed at high speed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R may or may not disappear once.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (B), an effect in which the left decorative symbol 8L appears is performed. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L moves along a curved trajectory that draws an arc so as to bend to the right from the front side to the back side of the display screen 7a while the moving speed becomes slow. While it is displayed fluctuatingly. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L is gradually displayed smaller as it moves toward the back side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (C), the moving speed of the left decorative symbol 8L becomes even slower, and one of the left decorative symbols 8L (the image of the number "9" in this embodiment) is the left decorative symbol. The mode changes at the stop display position where 8L is stopped and displayed. Specifically, the image of the number "9" of the left decorative symbol 8L changes from blue to red. The color of the left decorative pattern 8L may be any number of colors, and the color may change from any number of colors to any number of colors.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (D), in the left decorative symbol 8L, the mode of the image of the red number "9" is changed. Specifically, in the left decorative symbol 8L, from the aspect of the image of the red number "9", the image of the red number "9" becomes slightly smaller and the lower right of the image of the red number "9". The image of the character is attached to the character. Then, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed in a state where the mode is changed at the stop display position. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L other than the left decorative symbol 8L at the stop display position disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (E), an effect in which the right decorative symbol 8R appears is performed. Specifically, the right decorative symbol 8R moves along a curved trajectory that draws an arc so as to bend leftward from the back side to the front side of the display screen 7a while moving at a slower speed. It is displayed in a variable manner. That is, the right decorative symbol 8R is variablely displayed while moving in a direction different from that of the left decorative symbol 8L. At this time, the right decorative symbol 8R is gradually displayed larger as it moves toward the front side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (F), the moving speed of the right decorative symbol 8R becomes even slower, and one of the right decorative symbols 8R (the image of the number "5" in this embodiment) is the right decorative symbol. The mode changes at the stop display position where 8R is stopped and displayed. Specifically, the image of the number "5" of the right decorative symbol 8R changes from blue to red. The color of the right decorative pattern 8R may be any number of colors, and the color may change from any number of colors to any number of colors.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (G), in the right decorative symbol 8R, the mode of the image of the red number “5” is changed. Specifically, in the right decorative symbol 8R, from the aspect of the image of the red number "5", the image of the red number "5" becomes slightly smaller and the lower right of the image of the red number "5". The image of the character is attached to the character. Then, the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed in a state where the mode is changed at the stop display position. At this time, the right decorative symbol 8R other than the right decorative symbol 8R at the stop display position disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (H), an effect in which the intermediate decorative symbol 8C appears is performed. Specifically, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is displayed in a variable manner while moving downward from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a along a linear trajectory while the moving speed is slowed down. That is, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is displayed in a variable manner while moving in a direction different from that of the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, the size of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C does not change with movement. The intermediate decorative symbol 8C may be displayed gradually larger or smaller as it is moved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (I), the moving speed of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C becomes further slower, and one of the intermediate decorative symbols 8C (the image of the number "3" in the present embodiment) is the intermediate decorative symbol. The mode changes at the stop display position where 8C is stopped and displayed. Specifically, the image of the number "3" of the intermediate decorative pattern 8C changes from blue to red. The color of the intermediate decorative pattern 8C may be any number of colors, and the color may change from any number of colors to any number of colors.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (J), the mode of the image of the red number "3" is changed in the intermediate decorative symbol 8C. Specifically, in the intermediate decorative pattern 8C, the image of the red number "3" becomes slightly smaller and the lower right of the image of the red number "3" is obtained from the aspect of the image of the red number "3". The image of the character is attached to the character. Then, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed in a state where the mode is changed at the stop display position. At this time, the intermediate decorative symbols 8C other than the intermediate decorative symbol 8C at the stop display position disappear. In this way, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed as a lost mode (missed symbol). The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R that are stopped and displayed may have the same position in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a or may be different.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the decorative pattern mode change effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 to 73, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed in the first aspect (for example, numbers), and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed. The display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect (for example, a number + a character, etc.), and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed in the second aspect. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 to 73, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change from the first aspect to the second aspect at the stop display position. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 and 72, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change from the first aspect to the second aspect while rotating laterally at the stop display position. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 to 73, for example, the left decorative symbol 8L is variablely displayed while moving along a predetermined direction, and the right decorative symbol 8R is the left decorative symbol 8L. It is displayed in a variable manner while moving along different directions. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 and 73, for example, the left decorative symbol 8L is variablely displayed while moving along a curved trajectory that draws an arc, and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed. It fluctuates while moving along a curved orbit that draws an arc. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 to 73, for example, the left decorative symbol 8L is gradually displayed smaller with movement, and the right decorative symbol 8R is gradually displayed larger with movement. To. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the decorative pattern mode change effect.
[Modification 1]
In FIGS. 71 to 73, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R were all displayed in a variable manner while moving in different directions, but the movement of two decorative symbols out of the three decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. The directions may be the same. For example, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R may be variablely displayed while moving in the same direction, and the middle decorative symbol 8C may be variablely displayed while moving in a different direction from the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R. ..
[Modification 2]
In FIGS. 71 to 73, after the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed at the stop display position, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R other than the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R at the stop display position are produced so as to disappear. However, for example, after the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed at the stop display position, the left decorative symbol 8L other than the left decorative symbol 8L at the stop display position remains and is displayed. May be good.
[Modification 3]
In FIGS. 71 to 73, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed in the first aspect (for example, numbers and the like), and change from the first aspect to the second aspect (for example, numbers + characters). Is displayed, and is stopped and displayed in the second aspect. The aspect here includes various aspects such as the type, color, and shape of an image representing a decorative pattern. It may change from any aspect to any aspect. Further, the number of changes may be once or a plurality of times.
[Modification example 4]
In FIGS. 71 to 73, the left decorative symbol 8L, the right decorative symbol 8R, and the middle decorative symbol 8C are variablely displayed in this order, changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, and stopped, but the variable display and the aspect are displayed. The order of change, stop display, etc. is not limited to this, and may be any order.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect A5-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern.
The first effect in which the decorative pattern is variablely displayed in the first aspect, and
A second effect in which the decorative pattern is displayed by changing from the first aspect to the second aspect different from the first aspect, and
A third effect in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the second aspect can be executed.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect A5-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A5-2.
In the second effect, the decorative symbol changes from the first aspect to the second aspect at the stop display position.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect A5-3]
A game machine according to aspect A5-1 or aspect A5-2.
In the second effect, the decorative symbol changes from the first aspect to the second aspect while rotating in a predetermined direction at the stop display position.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect A5-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A5-1 to A5-3.
The decorative design has a first decorative design and a second decorative design.
In the first effect of the first decorative pattern, the variable display is performed while moving along the first direction.
In the first effect of the second decorative symbol, the display fluctuates while moving along a second direction different from the first direction.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect A5-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A5-4.
In the first effect of the first decorative pattern, the variable display is performed while moving along a curved orbit that draws an arc.
In the first effect of the second decorative pattern, the variable display is performed while moving along a curved orbit that draws an arc.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect A5-6]
A game machine according to aspect A5-4 or aspect A5-5.
In the first effect of the first decorative symbol, the first decorative symbol is gradually displayed smaller as it moves.
In the first effect of the second decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol is gradually displayed larger as it moves.
A game machine characterized by that.

The decorative symbol variation region effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 74 to 76. This decorative symbol variation region effect can be executed during the decorative symbol variation effect. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the decorative symbol variation area effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main image is read. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

[Decorative pattern fluctuation area production A]
FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation region effect A. In the decorative symbol variation area effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 74 (A), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are lost. It is stopped and displayed with (design). The positions of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R that are stopped and displayed in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a may be the same or different. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in the first display area R1 surrounded by a rectangular frame on the display screen 7a of the display device 7. The first display area R1 is provided in the lower portion of the display screen 7a. The first display area R1 is included in the second display area R2 which is larger than the first display area R1. In the present embodiment, the second display area R2 is the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (B), in the first display area R1, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is performed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner at such a high speed that the numbers cannot be visually recognized.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (C), in the first display area R1, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which have been variablely displayed, disappear from the first display area R1 and are left-decorated. The variable display of the symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is all difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (D), an effect is performed in which the left decorative symbol 8L that has once disappeared appears. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L (the number "3" symbol) slowly descends downward from the upper left side of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a), and is in the vertical direction of the second display area R2. Stop is displayed at the intermediate position. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 74 (A)). That is, the enlarged left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed in the second display area R2. Further, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the upper left portion of the first display area R1. Then, a part of the first display area R1 becomes difficult to see due to the left decorative symbol 8L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (E), an effect is performed in which the right decorative symbol 8R that has once disappeared appears. Specifically, the right decorative symbol 8R (the number “3” symbol) slowly descends downward from the upper right side of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a). At this time, the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 74 (A)). Then, whether or not to form a reach state together with the left decorative symbol 8L (the number "3" symbol) while slowly moving downward slightly above the intermediate position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2. Reach fan production.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (F), the right decorative symbol 8R (the number “3” symbol) moves downward as it is without stopping at an intermediate position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2. .. That is, it does not form a reach state together with the left decorative symbol 8L (the number "3" symbol). The right decorative symbol 8R is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the right end portion of the first display area R1. Then, a part of the first display area R1 becomes difficult to see due to the right decorative symbol 8R. The right decorative symbol 8R (number "3" symbol) is stopped and displayed at an intermediate position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2, and is combined with the left decorative symbol 8L (number "3" symbol) to form a reach state. If so, another reach effect may be performed from there.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (G), the right decorative symbol 8R (the number “4” symbol) slowly descends downward from the upper right side of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a), and the second display area R2 (display screen 7a). 2 Stop display is performed at an intermediate position in the vertical direction of the display area R2. At this time, the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 74 (A)). That is, the enlarged right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed in the second display area R2. Further, the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the upper right portion of the first display area R1. Then, a part of the first display area R1 becomes difficult to see due to the right decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (H), an effect is performed in which the once disappeared intermediate decorative symbol 8C appears. Specifically, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C (the number "2" symbol) slowly descends downward from the upper center of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a), and is in the vertical direction of the second display area R2. Stop is displayed at the intermediate position. At this time, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 74 (A)). That is, the enlarged intermediate decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed in the second display area R2. Further, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the central upper portion of the first display area R1. Then, a part of the first display area R1 becomes difficult to see due to the intermediate decorative symbol 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (I), the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R move from the second display area R2 toward the first display area R1. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R move from the second display area R2 toward the first display area R1 while gradually becoming smaller (reducing).

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R gradually become smaller from the second display area R2 toward the first display area R1 ( Move (while shrinking). Then, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed (returned) within the first display area R1. In this way, in the first display area R1, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed in a lost mode (missing symbol).

[Decorative pattern fluctuation area production B]
FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation region effect B. In the decorative symbol variation area effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 75 (A), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are lost. It is stopped and displayed with (design). The positions of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R that are stopped and displayed in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a may be the same or different. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in the first display area R1 surrounded by a rectangular frame on the display screen 7a of the display device 7. The first display area R1 is provided in the lower portion of the display screen 7a. The first display area R1 is included in the second display area R2 which is larger than the first display area R1. In the present embodiment, the second display area R2 is the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (B), in the first display area R1, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is performed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner at such a high speed that the numbers cannot be visually recognized.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (C), in the first display area R1, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which have been variablely displayed, disappear from the first display area R1 and are left-decorated. The variable display of the symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is all difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (D), an effect is performed in which the left decorative symbol 8L that has once disappeared appears. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L (the number "3" symbol) slowly descends downward from the upper left side of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a), and is in the vertical direction of the second display area R2. Stop is displayed at the intermediate position. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 75 (A)). That is, the enlarged left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed in the second display area R2. Further, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the upper left portion of the first display area R1. Then, a part of the first display area R1 is visibly displayed through the transparent left decorative symbol 8L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (E), an effect is performed in which the right decorative symbol 8R that has once disappeared appears. Specifically, the right decorative symbol 8R (the number “3” symbol) slowly descends downward from the upper right side of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a). At this time, the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 75 (A)). Then, whether or not to form a reach state together with the left decorative symbol 8L (the number "3" symbol) while slowly moving downward slightly above the intermediate position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2. Reach fan production.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (F), the right decorative symbol 8R (the number “3” symbol) moves downward as it is without stopping at an intermediate position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2. .. That is, it does not form a reach state together with the left decorative symbol 8L (the number "3" symbol). The right decorative symbol 8R is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the right end portion of the first display area R1. Then, a part of the first display area R1 becomes difficult to see due to the right decorative symbol 8R. The right decorative symbol 8R (number "3" symbol) is stopped and displayed at an intermediate position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2, and is combined with the left decorative symbol 8L (number "3" symbol) to form a reach state. If so, another reach effect may be performed from there.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (G), the right decorative symbol 8R (the number “4” symbol) slowly descends downward from the upper right side of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a), and the second display area R2 (display screen 7a). 2 Stop display is performed at an intermediate position in the vertical direction of the display area R2. At this time, the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 75 (A)). That is, the enlarged right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed in the second display area R2. Further, the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the upper right portion of the first display area R1. Then, a part of the first display area R1 is transparently displayed through the transparent right decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (H), an effect is performed in which the once disappeared intermediate decorative symbol 8C appears. Specifically, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C (the number "2" symbol) slowly descends downward from the upper center of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a), and is in the vertical direction of the second display area R2. Stop is displayed at the intermediate position. At this time, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 75 (A)). That is, the enlarged intermediate decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed in the second display area R2. Further, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the central upper portion of the first display area R1. Then, a part of the first display area R1 is transparently displayed through the transparent intermediate decorative symbol 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (I), in the second display area R2, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R that were stopped and displayed disappear from the second display area R2, and the left decoration The symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all in a state where it is difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (J), the effect of reappearing the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R that have disappeared again is performed. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in the first display area R1 in a reduced state. In this way, in the first display area R1, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed in a lost mode (missing symbol).

[Decorative pattern fluctuation area production C]
FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation region effect C. In the decorative symbol variation area effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 76 (A), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are lost. It is stopped and displayed with (design). The positions of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R that are stopped and displayed in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a may be the same or different. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in the first display area R1 surrounded by a rectangular frame on the display screen 7a of the display device 7. The first display area R1 is provided in the lower portion of the display screen 7a. The first display area R1 is included in the second display area R2 which is larger than the first display area R1. In the present embodiment, the second display area R2 is the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (B), in the first display area R1, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is performed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner at such a high speed that the numbers cannot be visually recognized.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (C), in the first display area R1, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which have been variablely displayed, disappear from the first display area R1 and are left-decorated. The variable display of the symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is all difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (D), an effect is performed in which the left decorative symbol 8L that has once disappeared appears. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L (the number "3" symbol) slowly descends downward from the upper left side of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a), and is in the vertical direction of the second display area R2. Stop is displayed at the intermediate position. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 76 (A)). That is, the enlarged left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed in the second display area R2. Further, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the upper left portion of the first display area R1. Then, a part of the first display area R1 becomes difficult to see due to the left decorative symbol 8L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (E), an effect is performed in which the right decorative symbol 8R that has once disappeared appears. Specifically, the right decorative symbol 8R (the number “3” symbol) slowly descends downward from the upper right side of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a). At this time, the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 76 (A)). Then, whether or not to form a reach state together with the left decorative symbol 8L (the number "3" symbol) while slowly moving downward slightly above the intermediate position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2. Reach fan production.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (F), the right decorative symbol 8R (the number “3” symbol) is stopped and displayed at an intermediate position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2. As a result, the reach state is formed by the left decorative symbol 8L (number "3" symbol) and the right decorative symbol 8R (number "3" symbol). At this time, the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 76 (A)). That is, the enlarged right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed in the second display area R2. Further, the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the upper right portion of the first display area R1. Then, a part of the first display area R1 becomes difficult to see due to the right decorative symbol 8R. After forming the reach state, another reach effect may be performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (G), an effect in which the once disappeared intermediate decorative symbol 8C appears is executed. Specifically, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C (the number "2" symbol) slowly descends downward from the upper center of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a), and is in the vertical direction of the second display area R2. Stop is displayed at the intermediate position. At this time, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 76 (A)). That is, the enlarged intermediate decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed in the second display area R2. Further, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the central upper portion of the first display area R1. Then, a part of the first display area R1 becomes difficult to see due to the intermediate decorative symbol 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (H), the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R move from the second display area R2 toward the first display area R1. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R move from the second display area R2 toward the first display area R1 while gradually becoming smaller (reducing).

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (I), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R gradually become smaller from the second display area R2 toward the first display area R1 ( Move (while shrinking). Then, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed (returned) within the first display area R1. In this way, in the first display area R1, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed in a lost mode (missing symbol).

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the decorative pattern variation area effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, in the first display area R1 (first area) of the display screen 7a (display means) of the display device 7, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, After the first effect in which 8R is variablely displayed and the second effect, in the second display area R2 (second area) including the first display area R1 on the display screen 7a of the display device 7, the decorative symbol 8L , 8C, 8R can be executed as a second effect in which the 8C and 8R are enlarged and displayed in a variable manner than in the first effect. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, in the second effect, at least a part of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R that are enlarged and variablely displayed is the first display area R1. It is displayed overlapping with. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, in the first effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed in the first display area R1 of the display screen 7a of the display device 7. After that, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R disappear from the first display area R1. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, in the second selection, whether or not the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R form a reach state is produced. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 76, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R form a reach state in the second display area R2 of the display screen 7a of the display device 7 after the second effect. The third effect to be performed can be further executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R reach in the second display area R2 of the display screen 7a of the display device 7 after the second effect. It is possible to further execute the fourth effect, which does not form a state and is stopped and displayed with a lost symbol. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, after the fourth effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R move while being reduced from the second display area R2 to the first display area R1. It is possible to further perform the fifth effect that is displayed to be. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the decorative pattern variation area effect.
[Modification 1]
In FIGS. 74 to 76, in the decorative symbol variation region effects A to C, the first display region R1 on the display screen 7a of the display device 7 has a rectangular shape, but is not limited to this, and has a circular shape. It may have an elliptical shape, a square shape, or the like. Further, various shapes can be adopted as the shape of the second display area R2. Further, the second display area R2 may be the same as the display screen 7a of the display device 7, or may be a part thereof.
[Modification 2]
In FIGS. 74 to 76, in the decorative symbol variation area effects A to C, at least a part of the enlarged left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R is displayed so as to overlap the first display area R1. , May be displayed so as not to overlap the first display area R1. For example, it may be displayed so as to fit within the second display area R2.
[Modification 3]
In FIGS. 74 to 76, in the decorative symbol variation region effects A to C, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are enlarged and displayed in a variable manner in the reach fanning effect of whether or not to form a reach state, but other In various effects, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be enlarged and displayed in a variable manner.
[Modification example 4]
In FIGS. 74 to 76, the left decorative symbol 8L, the right decorative symbol 8R, and the middle decorative symbol 8C are stopped and displayed in this order, but the order of the stop display is not limited to this, and may be any order. May be good.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect A6-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern.
In the first area of the display means, the first effect in which the decorative pattern is variably displayed, and
After the first effect, in the second area including the first area of the display means, the decorative symbol is enlarged and variably displayed as compared with the first effect. Is feasible,
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect A6-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A6-1.
In the second effect, at least a part of the decorative symbol that is enlarged and variedly displayed is displayed so as to overlap the first area.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect A6-3]
A game machine according to aspect A6-1 or aspect A6-2.
In the first effect, after the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the first region of the display means, the decorative symbol disappears from the first region.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect A6-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A6-1 to A6-3.
In the second election, whether or not the decorative symbol forms a reach state is produced.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect A6-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A6-4.
After the second effect, it is possible to further perform a third effect in which the decorative symbol forms a reach state in the second region of the display means.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect A6-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect A6-4.
After the second effect, in the second region of the display means, it is possible to further execute a fourth effect in which the decorative symbol does not form a reach state and is stopped and displayed with a lost symbol.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect A6-7]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A6-6.
After the fourth effect, it is possible to further perform a fifth effect in which the decorative symbol is displayed so as to move from the second area to the first area while being reduced.
A game machine characterized by that.

The operation promotion effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79. This operation promotion effect can be executed during the variable effect of the effect symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the operation promotion effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main display device. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a of 7.

[Operation promotion effect A]
FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining the operation promotion effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 77 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. The reserved image 9B is displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a. The reserved image 9B is displayed according to the number of stored second special figure reservations, and here, three reserved images 9B are displayed. The hold digestion image 9C corresponds to the effect symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a. In addition, it is assumed that it is a fluctuation during the time saving game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (C), the battle start effect is executed. In the battle start production, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB will appear. After that, a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is fought, and when the ally character CRA finally wins the enemy character CRB, it becomes a big hit. At this time, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (D), the size change effect is executed. The size change effect is an effect of increasing the size of the button image BG and displaying it. This suggests the degree of expectation for the jackpot. Here, the ally character CRA has appeared.
Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (E), the button rotation effect is executed. The button rotation effect is an effect of displaying a button image BG, which is an image imitating the effect button 63 viewed from a direction perpendicular to the upper surface, and rotating the button image BG about the direction perpendicular to the upper surface as indicated by an arrow YG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (F), the button enlargement effect is executed. In the button enlargement effect, the button image BG is enlarged so that the entire display screen 7a does not fit. Therefore, there is a portion that is not displayed at the end of the button image BG. The rotation of the button image BG is continued.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (G), the pressing promotion effect is executed. In the pressing promotion effect, the button image BG enlarged and displayed by the button enlargement effect gradually becomes smaller, and by rotating around the left-right direction, the upper surface facing toward the front gradually becomes upward. Then, the button image BG is arranged at the lower center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the message image MG "press" is also displayed.

When the player presses the effect button 63, a fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed as shown in FIG. 77 (H). In the fixed stop effect (big hit), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R stop at the same number to form so-called doublets. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped at "7". In addition, the message image MG of "victory" is also displayed, indicating that the ally character CRA has won the enemy character CRB.

[Operation promotion effect B]
FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining the operation promotion effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 78 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. The reserved image 9B is displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a. The reserved image 9B is displayed according to the number of stored second special figure reservations, and here, three reserved images 9B are displayed. The hold digestion image 9C corresponds to the effect symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a. In addition, it is assumed that it is a fluctuation during the time saving game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (C), the battle start effect is executed. In the battle start production, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB will appear. After that, a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is fought, and when the ally character CRA finally wins the enemy character CRB, it becomes a big hit. At this time, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (D), the button movement effect is executed. The button movement effect is an effect of moving the button image BG at high speed. The button image BG moves from one peripheral edge of the display screen 7a to the other peripheral edge so as to cross the display screen 7a. Here, the ally character CRA has appeared.
Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (E), the button rotation effect is executed. The button rotation effect is an effect of displaying a button image BG, which is an image imitating the effect button 63 viewed from a direction perpendicular to the upper surface, and rotating the button image BG about the direction perpendicular to the upper surface as indicated by an arrow YG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (F), the button enlargement effect is executed. In the button enlargement effect, the button image BG is enlarged so that the entire display screen 7a does not fit. Therefore, there is a portion that is not displayed at the end of the button image BG. The rotation of the button image BG is continued.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (G), the pressing promotion effect is executed. In the pressing promotion effect, the button image BG enlarged and displayed by the button enlargement effect gradually becomes smaller, and by rotating around the left-right direction, the upper surface facing toward the front gradually becomes upward. Then, the button image BG is arranged at the lower center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the message image MG "press" is also displayed.

When the player presses the effect button 63, a fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed as shown in FIG. 78 (H). In the fixed stop effect (big hit), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R stop at the same number to form so-called doublets. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped at "7". In addition, the message image MG of "victory" is also displayed, indicating that the ally character CRA has won the enemy character CRB.

[Operation promotion effect C]
FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining the operation promotion effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 79 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. The reserved image 9B is displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a. The reserved image 9B is displayed according to the number of stored second special figure reservations, and here, three reserved images 9B are displayed. The hold digestion image 9C corresponds to the effect symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a. In addition, it is assumed that it is a fluctuation during the time saving game. Further, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "7". A button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (C), the battle start effect is executed. In the battle start production, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB will appear. After that, a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is fought, and when the ally character CRA finally wins the enemy character CRB, it becomes a big hit. A button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (D), the color change effect is executed. The color change effect is an effect of changing the color of the upper surface of the button image BG. For example, the white upper surface is changed to blue, green, and red. This suggests the degree of expectation for the jackpot. Here, the ally character CRA has appeared.
Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (E), the button rotation effect is executed. In the button rotation effect, a button image BG, which is an image imitating the effect button 63 viewed from a direction perpendicular to the upper surface, is displayed, and the button image BG is rotated about the direction perpendicular to the upper surface as indicated by the arrow YG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (F), the button enlargement effect is executed. In the button enlargement effect, the button image BG is enlarged so that the entire display screen 7a does not fit. Therefore, there is a portion that is not displayed at the end of the button image BG. The rotation of the button image BG is continued.

When the player presses the effect button 63, the press promotion effect is executed as shown in FIG. 79 (G). In the pressing promotion effect, the button image BG enlarged and displayed by the button enlargement effect gradually becomes smaller, and by rotating around the left-right direction, the upper surface facing toward the front gradually becomes upward. Then, the button image BG is arranged at the lower center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the message image MG "press" is also displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (H), the fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (loss), both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are stopped at "7", and the middle effect symbol 8C is stopped at "8". The message image MG "defeated" is also displayed, indicating that the ally character CRA has been defeated by the enemy character CRB. In some cases, the color change effect shown in FIG. 79 (D) may be shifted to the fixed stop effect (loss) shown in FIG. 79 (H).

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the operation promotion effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the button rotation effect is executed. In the button rotation effect, a button image BG which is an image imitating the effect button 63 viewed from a direction perpendicular to the upper surface is displayed, and is rotated about the direction perpendicular to the upper surface as indicated by an arrow YG (FIG. 77 (FIG. 77). E), FIG. 78 (E), FIG. 79 (E)). According to this configuration, it is possible to contribute to the promotion of the operation of the effect button 63 and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the button enlargement effect is executed. In the button enlargement effect, the button image BG is enlarged to the extent that the entire button image BG does not fit on the display screen 7a, and a portion that is not displayed at the end is formed (FIGS. 77 (F), 78 (F), 79 (F)). According to this configuration, it is possible to further contribute to the promotion of the operation of the effect button 63 and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the button movement effect is executed. The button movement effect is an effect of moving the button image BG at high speed. The button image BG moves from one peripheral edge of the display screen 7a to the other peripheral edge so as to cross the display screen 7a (FIG. 78 (D)). According to this configuration, it is possible to further contribute to the promotion of the operation of the effect button 63 and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the pressing promotion effect is executed. In the pressing promotion effect, the button image BG enlarged and displayed by the button enlargement effect gradually becomes smaller, and by rotating around the left-right direction, the upper surface facing toward the front gradually becomes upward. Then, the button image BG is arranged at the lower center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the message image MG "press" is also displayed (FIGS. 77 (G), 78 (G), 79 (G)). According to this configuration, it is possible to further contribute to the promotion of the operation of the effect button 63 and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effect of displaying the button image BG is performed first (FIGS. 77 (C) (D), 78 (C), 79 (A) to (D)). According to this configuration, attention can be paid to the effect button 63 prior to the operation of the effect button 63, which contributes to the improvement of the interest of the game.

[Effect 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the color change effect shown in FIG. 79 (D) may shift to the fixed stop effect (loss) shown in FIG. 79 (H). That is, after the effect of displaying the button image BG is executed, the button rotation effect, the button confirmation effect, and the pressing promotion effect may not be executed. According to this configuration, the range of production can be expanded and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the operation promotion effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the button rotation effect and the button enlargement effect are performed as a series of effects, but either the button rotation effect or the button enlargement effect may be executed.

[Modification 2]
The above is an example of the effect in the fluctuation during the time-saving game, but it may be applied to the fluctuation during the normal game in which the player is left-handed.

[Modification 3]
In the above, following the battle start effect, a size change effect (FIG. 77 (D)) and a color change effect (FIG. 79 (D)) were performed. Such a size change effect or a color change effect may be performed, for example, when a game ball enters the ball. For example, it is conceivable to set the timing when the second special figure hold increases. Further, for example, it is conceivable to set the timing of over winning.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect B1-1]
A gaming machine that is equipped with an operation unit that can be operated by a player and can perform an effect based on the operation of the operation unit.
In the operation promotion effect of promoting the operation of the operation unit, an image of the operation unit imitating the operation unit is displayed on the display screen as an image of the operation unit viewed from a predetermined direction, and is rotated about the predetermined direction. Includes a rotating effect to make
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-1.
The operation promotion effect includes an enlarged effect in which the entire image of the operation unit does not fit on the display screen and its end is not displayed.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-1 or aspect B1-2.
The operation promotion effect includes a movement effect in which the operation unit image moves from one peripheral edge portion to the other peripheral edge portion so as to cross the display screen.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-1 to B1-3.
The operation promotion effect includes a promotion effect that displays an image of the operation unit and prompts the user to press the operation unit.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-1 to B1-4.
After the display effect in which the operation unit image is displayed in the display screen, the operation promotion effect shifts to the operation promotion effect.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B1-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-5.
Even when the display effect is executed, it may not shift to the operation promotion effect.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B1-7]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-5 or aspect B1-6.
In the display effect, the expectation of a big hit is suggested by the ball entering a predetermined entrance of the game ball.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B1-8]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-5 to B1-7.
The display effect is executed from the start of the change of the effect symbol.
A game machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the winning notification effects A to C will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 82. This winning notification effect can be executed during the variable effect of the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the winning notification effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main display device. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a of 7.

[Winning notification production A]
FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining the winning notification effect A.
First, after the fluctuation start effect is executed and the variation of the effect symbol is started, the battle effect is executed as shown in FIG. 80 (A). The battle production is a production in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Here, the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB.

Following the battle effect described above, the button get effect is executed as shown in FIG. 80 (B). In the button get effect, the button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The displayed button image BG will be the reward for the battle production. The obtained button image BG is stacked and displayed (stocked) on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, we are getting two button image BGs.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (C), the battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Here, the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB.

Following the battle effect described above, the button get effect is executed as shown in FIG. 80 (D). In the button get effect, the button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The displayed button image BG will be the reward for the battle production. The obtained button image BG is stacked and displayed (stocked) on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, three button image BGs are obtained, and a total of five button image BGs are stocked. The number of button image BG stocks suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (E), the pressing promotion effect (initial) is executed. In the pressing promotion effect (initial stage), a large button image BG is displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG saying "press" is displayed above the large button image BG. Further, the stocked button image BG is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, when the player presses the effect button 63, the button image BG stocked on the right side is digested in order from the top.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (F), the pressing promotion effect (final stage) is executed. In the pressing promotion effect (final stage), a large button image BG is displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG saying "press" is displayed above the large button image BG. Further, the stocked button image BG is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, when the player presses the effect button 63, the button image BG stocked on the right side is digested in order from the top. The pressing promotion effect (final stage) indicates a state in which the button image BG stocked on the right side is running low.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (G), the jackpot confirmation effect is executed. The jackpot confirmation effect is an effect in which a ally character CRA appears and its background is a rainbow background RB displayed in seven colors of a rainbow. The rainbow background RB is the background for confirming the jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (H), the fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (big hit), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R stop at the same number to form so-called doublets. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped at "7".

[Winning notification production B]
FIG. 81 is a diagram for explaining the winning notification effect B.
First, after the fluctuation start effect is executed and the variation of the effect symbol is started, the battle effect is executed as shown in FIG. 81 (A). The battle production is a production in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Here, the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB.

Following the battle effect described above, the button get effect is executed as shown in FIG. 81 (B). In the button get effect, the button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The displayed button image BG will be the reward for the battle production. The obtained button image BG is stacked and displayed (stocked) on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, we are getting two button image BGs.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (C), the battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Here, the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB.

Following the battle effect described above, the button get effect is executed as shown in FIG. 81 (D). In the button get effect, the button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The displayed button image BG will be the reward for the battle production. The obtained button image BG is stacked and displayed (stocked) on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, one button image BG is obtained, and a total of three button image BGs are stocked. The number of button image BG stocks suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (E), the pressing promotion effect (initial) is executed. In the pressing promotion effect (initial stage), a large button image BG is displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG saying "press" is displayed above the large button image BG. Further, the stocked button image BG is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, when the player presses the effect button 63, the button image BG stocked on the right side is digested in order from the top.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (F), the pressing promotion effect (final stage) is executed. In the pressing promotion effect (final stage), a large button image BG is displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG saying "press" is displayed above the large button image BG. Further, the stocked button image BG is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, when the player presses the effect button 63, the button image BG stocked on the right side is digested in order from the top. The pressing promotion effect (final stage) indicates a state in which the button image BG stocked on the right side is running low. Here, it is shown that the stocked button image BG is used up.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (G), the fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (loss), both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are stopped at "7", and the middle effect symbol 8C is stopped at "8".

[Winning notification production C]
FIG. 82 is a diagram for explaining the winning notification effect C.
First, after the fluctuation start effect is executed and the variation of the effect symbol is started, the battle effect is executed as shown in FIG. 82 (A). The battle production is a production in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Here, the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB.

Following the battle effect described above, the button get effect is executed as shown in FIG. 82 (B). In the button get effect, the button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The displayed button image BG will be the reward for the battle production. The obtained button image BG is stacked and displayed (stocked) on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, we are getting two button image BGs.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (C), the battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Here, the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB.

Following the battle effect described above, the button get effect is executed as shown in FIG. 82 (D). In the button get effect, the button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The displayed button image BG will be the reward for the battle production. The obtained button image BG is stacked and displayed (stocked) on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, three button image BGs are obtained, and a total of five button image BGs are stocked.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (E), the battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Here, the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB.

Following the battle effect described above, the button get effect is executed as shown in FIG. 82 (F). In the button get effect, the button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The displayed button image BG will be the reward for the battle production. The obtained button image BG is stacked and displayed (stocked) on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, three button image BGs are obtained, and a total of eight button image BGs are stocked. The number of button image BG stocks suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (G), the jackpot confirmation effect is executed. The jackpot confirmation effect is an effect in which a ally character CRA appears and its background is a rainbow background RB displayed in seven colors of a rainbow. The rainbow background RB is the background for confirming the jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (H), the fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (big hit), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R stop at the same number to form so-called doublets. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped at "7".

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the winning announcement effect.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the button get effect in which the button image BG is stocked is performed (FIGS. 80 (B) (D), 81 (B) (D), 82 (B) (D) (F). )), After that, the player presses the effect button 63 to perform a press promotion effect that digests the stocked button image BG (FIGS. 80 (E) (F), 81 (E) (F)). , A jackpot confirmation effect is performed in the middle of the pressing promotion effect (Fig. 80 (G)). According to this configuration, the winning of the big hit is notified by pressing the effect button 63, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the button get effect in which the button image BG is stocked is performed a plurality of times. In addition, one or more button image BGs are stocked in one button get effect (FIGS. 80 (B) (D), 81 (B) (D), 82 (B) (D) (F)). ). According to this configuration, the stock of the button image BG that enables the operation of the effect button 63 is gradually increased, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the number of stocks of the button image BG produced by the button get effect suggests the degree of expectation for the jackpot. According to this configuration, the number of stocks of the button image BG in the button get effect becomes an important factor, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, it is possible to execute a jackpot confirmation effect for notifying the confirmation of the jackpot (FIGS. 80 (G) and 82 (G)). According to this configuration, when the jackpot confirmation effect is executed, it is possible to immerse in a sense of superiority and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the button get effect is executed, the jackpot confirmation effect can be executed without pressing the effect button 63 (FIGS. 82 (B), (D), (F), (G). )). According to this configuration, the player can be surprised and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the winning announcement effect.
[Modification 1]
In the above, as a big hit confirmation effect, a ally character CRA is introduced and the background is a rainbow background RB. On the other hand, any effect may be used to notify the confirmation of the jackpot. For example, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be rotated in a so-called doublet state to perform a full rotation effect. Further, for example, it may be a premier effect of displaying a premium image in which a jackpot is confirmed. For example, the effect button 63 may be vibrated, air may be sent to the player, or a specific lamp may be turned on.

[Modification 2]
In the above, when the player presses the effect button 63 in the press promotion effect, the button image BG stocked on the right side is digested in order from the top (FIG. 81 (F)). Here, if the jackpot confirmation effect is not executed and the stocked button image BG is used up, the player is rejected (FIG. 81 (G)). On the other hand, it is possible to perform an effect that clearly indicates that the player has been rejected in the middle of the pressing promotion effect.

[Modification 3]
The above is an example of notifying the winner of the jackpot lottery, but even if the winner of the lottery for the number of rounds when the jackpot is hit or the winner of the furnace in the transition lottery to the high accuracy state after the jackpot game is notified. Good.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect B2-1]
A gaming machine that is equipped with an operation unit that can be operated by a player and can perform an effect based on the operation of the operation unit.
The first effect in which the operation unit image imitating the operation unit is stocked on the display screen, the second effect in which the operation unit image stocked by the first effect is consumed by the operation of the operation unit, and the first effect. 2 It is possible to execute a winning notification production including a third production that can notify the winning in a specific lottery in the middle of the production.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1.
The first effect is an effect in which one or more images of the operation unit are stocked a plurality of times.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1 or aspect B2-2.
The number of stocks of the operation unit image in the first effect suggests the degree of expectation of winning in the specific lottery.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B2-1 to B2-3.
The specific lottery in the third production is a jackpot lottery.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B2-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-4.
The third effect is a definite effect that notifies the confirmation of the jackpot.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B2-1 to B2-5.
It is possible to execute the third effect after the first effect without executing the second effect.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B2-7]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-5.
The final effect includes a full rotation effect that fluctuates in a state where the effect symbols are aligned.
A game machine characterized by that.

The operation unit image display effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 83 to 85. This operation unit image display effect can be executed during various effects such as during a variable effect of a decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the operation unit image display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main image is read. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

[Operation unit image display effect A]
FIG. 83 is a diagram for explaining the operation unit image display effect A. In the operation unit image display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 83 (A), during the round game after the jackpot is confirmed, an effect of determining whether or not the upper limit number of rounds can be obtained as the total number of rounds for the jackpot ( MAX acquisition challenge production) will be performed. Here, it is a production aiming at promotion from the number of rounds 4R to the upper limit number of rounds 16R (round promotion production) in a state where 4R has already been acquired as the number of rounds for the jackpot. On the display screen 7a of the display device 7, the character image MG1 of "MAX acquisition challenge!" Is displayed. Note that MAX suggests an upper limit (for example, 16R) of the total number of rounds in this jackpot. Further, the MAX acquisition challenge production may be performed during the round game or before the round game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (B), the character image CG is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. Further, the type of the MAX acquisition challenge is displayed below the character image CG, and here, the character image MG2 of "one shot!" Is displayed. This suggests that an effect of determining whether or not MAX can be obtained with a single operation is performed. Further, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. The sword image KG represents the appearance of the sword member 64. The sword image KG includes a sword button image KBG showing the appearance of the sword button 65 at the upper end of the sword member 64. The button image BG represents the appearance of the effect button 63. The sword image KG is displayed so as to overlap the front surface of the button image BG, and the portion of the button image BG on which the sword image KG overlaps is difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (C), the character image CG is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. Further, on the right side of the display screen 7a, the character image MG3 of "Please!" Is displayed. This indicates that the character is praying for MAX acquisition. Then, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front surface of the sword image KG. Of the sword image KG, the portion where the button image BG overlaps is difficult to see.
Further, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed smaller than those displayed in FIG. 83 (B).

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (D), the button image BG and the sword image KG in FIG. 83 (C) gradually disappear in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front surface of the sword image KG. The character image CG and the character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (E), the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front surface of the sword image KG. Of the sword image KG, the portion where the button image BG overlaps is difficult to see. Further, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed larger than those displayed in FIGS. 83 (C) and 83 (D). The character image CG and the character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (F), the button image BG and the sword image KG in FIG. 83 (E) gradually disappear in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front surface of the sword image KG. The character image CG and the character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (G), the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front surface of the sword image KG. Of the sword image KG, the portion where the button image BG overlaps is difficult to see. Further, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed larger than those displayed in FIGS. 83 (E) and 83 (F). The character image CG and the character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (H), the button image BG and the sword image KG in FIG. 83 (G) gradually disappear in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front surface of the sword image KG. The character image CG and the character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (I), the sword image KG, the timer bar TB, and the operation promotion image SG are displayed. The sword image KG is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The timer bar TB indicates the operation acceptance valid period of the sword member 64. The timer bar TB overlaps the lower part of the sword image KG and is displayed in front of the sword image KG. The operation promotion image SG is an image that urges the player to operate the sword member 64, and here, the character image MG4 of "push in !!!" is displayed. The operation promotion image SG is displayed on the front surface of the sword image KG so as to overlap the upper part of the sword image KG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (J), when the player pushes the sword member 64 and the MAX acquisition is confirmed, the character image MG5 of "MAX acquisition!" Is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. ..

[Operation unit image display effect B]
FIG. 84 is a diagram for explaining the operation unit image display effect B. In the operation unit image display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 84 (A), during the round game after the jackpot is confirmed, an effect of determining whether or not the upper limit number of rounds can be obtained as the total number of rounds for the jackpot ( MAX acquisition challenge production) will be performed. Here, it is a production aiming at promotion from the number of rounds 4R to the upper limit number of rounds 16R (round promotion production) in a state where 4R has already been acquired as the number of rounds for the jackpot. On the display screen 7a of the display device 7, the character image MG1 of "MAX acquisition challenge!" Is displayed. Note that MAX suggests an upper limit (for example, 16R) of the total number of rounds in this jackpot. Further, the MAX acquisition challenge production may be performed during the round game or before the round game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (B), the character image CG is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. Further, the type of the MAX acquisition challenge is displayed below the character image CG, and here, the character image MG2 of "one shot!" Is displayed. This suggests that an effect of determining whether or not MAX can be obtained with a single operation is performed. Further, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. The sword image KG represents the appearance of the sword member 64. The sword image KG includes a sword button image KBG showing the appearance of the sword button 65 at the upper end of the sword member 64. The button image BG represents the appearance of the sword button 65, and is the same image as the sword button image KBG except that the size is different. The button image BG represents the appearance of the effect button 63. The sword image KG is displayed so as to overlap the front surface of the button image BG, and the portion of the button image BG on which the sword image KG overlaps is difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84C, the character image CG is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. Further, on the right side of the display screen 7a, the character image MG3 of "Please!" Is displayed. This indicates that the character is praying for MAX acquisition. Then, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front surface of the sword image KG. Of the sword image KG, the portion where the button image BG overlaps is in a state where the button image BG can be seen through the button image BG. That is, the button image BG is a transparent image. Further, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed smaller than those displayed in FIG. 83 (B).

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (D), the button image BG and the sword image KG in FIG. 84 (C) gradually disappear in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front surface of the sword image KG. The character image CG and the character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (E), the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front surface of the sword image KG. Of the sword image KG, the portion where the button image BG overlaps is in a state where the button image BG can be seen through the button image BG. Further, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed larger than those displayed in FIGS. 84 (C) and 84 (D). The character image CG and the character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (F), the button image BG and the sword image KG in FIG. 84 (E) gradually disappear in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front surface of the sword image KG. The character image CG and the character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (G), the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front surface of the sword image KG. Of the sword image KG, the portion where the button image BG overlaps is in a state where the button image BG can be seen through the button image BG. Further, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed larger than those displayed in FIGS. 84 (E) and 84 (F). The character image CG and the character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (H), the button image BG and the sword image KG in FIG. 84 (G) gradually disappear in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front surface of the sword image KG. The character image CG and the character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (I), the sword image KG, the timer bar TB, and the operation promotion image SG are displayed. The sword image KG is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The timer bar TB indicates the operation acceptance valid period of the sword member 64. The timer bar TB overlaps the lower part of the sword image KG and is displayed in front of the sword image KG. The operation promotion image SG is an image that urges the player to operate the sword member 64, and here, the character image MG4 of "push in !!!" is displayed. The operation promotion image SG is displayed on the front surface of the sword image KG so as to overlap the upper part of the sword image KG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (J), when the player pushes the sword member 64 and the MAX acquisition is confirmed, the character image MG5 of "MAX acquisition!" Is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. ..

[Operation unit image display effect C]
FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining the operation unit image display effect C. In the operation unit image display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 85 (A), during the round game after the jackpot is confirmed, an effect of determining whether or not the upper limit number of rounds can be obtained as the total number of rounds for the jackpot ( MAX acquisition challenge production) will be performed. Here, it is a production aiming at promotion from the number of rounds 4R to the upper limit number of rounds 16R (round promotion production) in a state where 4R has already been acquired as the number of rounds for the jackpot. On the display screen 7a of the display device 7, the character image MG1 of "MAX acquisition challenge!" Is displayed. Note that MAX suggests an upper limit (for example, 16R) of the total number of rounds in this jackpot. Further, the MAX acquisition challenge production may be performed during the round game or before the round game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (B), the character image CG is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. Further, the type of the MAX acquisition challenge is displayed below the character image CG, and here, the character image MG2 of "one shot!" Is displayed. This suggests that an effect of determining whether or not MAX can be obtained with a single operation is performed. Further, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. The sword image KG represents the appearance of the sword member 64. The sword image KG includes a sword button image KBG showing the appearance of the sword button 65 at the upper end of the sword member 64. The button image BG represents the appearance of the effect button 63. The sword image KG is displayed so as to overlap the front surface of the button image BG, and the portion of the button image BG on which the sword image KG overlaps is difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85C, the character image CG is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. Further, on the right side of the display screen 7a, the character image MG3 of "Please!" Is displayed. This indicates that the character is praying for MAX acquisition. Then, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The sword image KG is displayed faintly and is in a state where it can be visually recognized. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front surface of the sword image KG. Of the sword image KG, the portion where the button image BG overlaps is in a state where the button image BG can be seen through the button image BG. That is, the button image BG is a transparent image. Further, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed smaller than those displayed in FIG. 85 (B).

Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (D), the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The button image BG is displayed lightly and is in a state where it can be visually recognized. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front surface of the sword image KG. Of the sword image KG, the portion where the button image BG overlaps is in a state where the button image BG can be seen through the button image BG. That is, the button image BG is a transparent image. Further, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed smaller than those displayed in FIG. 85 (B). The character image CG and the character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (E), the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The sword image KG is displayed faintly and is in a state where it can be visually recognized. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front surface of the sword image KG. Of the sword image KG, the portion where the button image BG overlaps is in a state where the button image BG can be seen through the button image BG. That is, the button image BG is a transparent image. Further, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed larger than those displayed in FIGS. 85 (C) and 85 (D). The character image CG and the character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (F), the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The button image BG is displayed lightly and is in a state where it can be visually recognized. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front surface of the sword image KG. Of the sword image KG, the portion where the button image BG overlaps is in a state where the button image BG can be seen through the button image BG. That is, the button image BG is a transparent image. Further, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed larger than those displayed in FIGS. 85 (C) and 85 (D). The character image CG and the character image MG on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (G), the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The sword image KG is displayed faintly and is in a state where it can be visually recognized. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front surface of the sword image KG. Of the sword image KG, the portion where the button image BG overlaps is in a state where the button image BG can be seen through the button image BG. That is, the button image BG is a transparent image. Further, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed larger than those displayed in FIGS. 85 (E) and 85 (F). The character image CG and the character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (H), the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The button image BG is displayed lightly and is in a state where it can be visually recognized. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front surface of the sword image KG. Of the sword image KG, the portion where the button image BG overlaps is in a state where the button image BG can be seen through the button image BG. That is, the button image BG is a transparent image. Further, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed larger than those displayed in FIGS. 85 (E) and 85 (F). The character image CG and the character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (I), the button image BG, the timer bar TB, and the operation promotion image SG are displayed. The button image BG is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The button image BG represents the appearance of the effect button 63, and is larger than the button image BG of FIGS. 85 (B) to 85 (H). The timer bar TB indicates the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 63. The timer bar TB overlaps the lower part of the button image BG and is displayed in front of the button image BG. The operation promotion image SG is an image that prompts the player to operate the effect button 63, and here, the character image MG6 of "press !!!!" is displayed. The operation promotion image SG is displayed on the front surface of the button image BG so as to overlap the upper part of the button image BG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (J), if the player presses the effect button 63 and cannot acquire MAX, the character image MG7 of "MAX acquisition failed!" Is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. To.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the operation unit image display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, the button image BG (first operation unit image) and the sword image KG (second operation unit image) are displayed so as to overlap each other. And the second effect in which either the button image BG or the sword image KG is displayed can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, in the first effect, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front surface of the sword image KG. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, in the first effect, the portion of the sword image KG located behind the button image BG is visually recognized through the button image BG. Displayed as possible. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, before the first effect, a third effect in which the sword image KG is displayed so as to overlap the front of the button image BG is further executed. It is possible. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, in the third effect, the portion of the button image BG located behind the sword image KG is difficult to see due to the sword image KG. .. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, the size of the button image BG displayed in the first effect and the size of the button image BG displayed in the third effect are different. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the operation unit image display effect.
[Modification 1]
In FIGS. 83 to 85, the operation unit image display effects A to C are performed during the round game, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be performed during a normal game, before a round game, during a big hit game, or the like.
[Modification 2]
In FIGS. 83 to 85, the operation unit image display effects A to C are performed in the effect of determining whether or not the upper limit number of rounds can be acquired as the total number of rounds for the jackpot (MAX acquisition challenge effect). It is not limited to this. For example, it may be performed in an effect of determining whether or not a specific effect is successful, an effect of determining whether or not it is a big hit, an effect of determining whether it is a normal big hit or a probabilistic big hit, and the like.
[Modification 3]
In FIGS. 83 to 85, in the operation unit image display effects A to C, the size is gradually increased each time the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed. Or they may be displayed in the same size.
[Modification example 4]
In FIGS. 83 to 85, the operation unit image display effects A to C are the same as the image showing the appearance of the effect button 63 as the button image BG and the sword button image KBG showing the appearance of the sword button 65 at the upper end of the sword member 64. Although the image is used, as the operation unit image, an effect button 63, a sword member 64, a sword button 65, an image showing the appearance of various other operation units, and the like can be used.
[Modification 5]
In FIGS. 83 to 85, a background image may be displayed in the background of the button image BG and the sword image KG, and the button image BG and the sword image KG may be displayed in front of the background image. Further, in the background image, the portion where the button image BG and the sword image KG overlap may be made visible through the button image BG and the sword image KG.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect B3-1]
The first operation unit and the second operation unit that can be operated by the player,
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a first operation unit image representing the first operation unit.
One of the plurality of types of images is a second operation unit image representing the second operation unit.
A first effect in which the image of the first operation unit and the image of the second operation unit are displayed so as to overlap with each other.
It is possible to execute a second effect in which either one of the first operation unit image and the second operation unit image is displayed.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-1.
In the first effect, the first operation unit image is displayed so as to overlap the front surface of the second operation unit image.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-2.
In the first effect, a portion of the second operation unit image located behind the first operation unit image is visibly displayed through the first operation unit image.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B3-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-2 or aspect B3-3.
Prior to the first effect, it is possible to further execute a third effect in which the second operation unit image is displayed so as to overlap the front surface of the first operation unit image.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B3-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-4.
In the third effect, the portion of the first operation unit image located behind the second operation unit image is difficult to see due to the second operation unit image.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B3-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-4 or aspect B3-5.
The size of the first operation unit image displayed in the first effect is different from the size of the first operation unit image displayed in the third effect.
A game machine characterized by that.

The appearance / disappearance effects A to C of the effect buttons will be described below with reference to FIGS. 86 to 88. In FIGS. 86 to 88, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted from the viewability of the drawing, and the image is displayed. Various reserved images displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7 are also omitted due to the ease of viewing the drawing, and the decorative symbols displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are also omitted due to the ease of viewing the drawing. is there.

The appearance / disappearance effect of this effect button is executed during a change effect of the decorative symbol (for example, a period from the start of the change of the decorative symbol to the stop of the change), or during a jackpot game (big hit effect) in which a profit is given to the player. This is possible, and the intention of the player to operate (press) the effect button 63 can be reflected in the progress of the effect. That is, various commands received from the sub-control board 90 by the image control microcomputer 101 (for example, a variation effect start command, a pre-judgment command, various jackpot game opening commands, jackpot game round designation commands, jackpot game ending commands) are transmitted. When an instruction to execute the appearance / disappearance effect of the effect button is included in the analysis, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Here, first, the appearance / disappearance effect A of the effect button will be described, the appearance / disappearance effect B of the effect button, and the appearance / disappearance effect C of the effect button will be described in order.

[Appearance and disappearance of production buttons A]
First, the appearance / disappearance effect A of the effect button will be described with reference to FIG. 86. FIG. 86 is a diagram for explaining the appearance / disappearance effect A of the effect button. The appearance / disappearance effect A of the effect button is performed by selecting from a plurality of types of reach effects when a reach is formed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern. Appearance and disappearance of the effect button In the effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 86 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 on the display screen 7a. The variable display of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the above. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the stopped-displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative symbol during high-speed fluctuation. Immediately before stopping, the decorative symbol decelerates and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again and is displayed as a stop. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (number) (here, the number "7" is temporarily stopped), and the middle decorative symbol 8C is variablely displayed to form a reach. ing.

When the reach is formed, in order to encourage the player to operate (press) the effect button 63, the first effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is located in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is arranged in and displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode. The English word "PUSH" is engraved on the portion of the first effect button image corresponding to the pressing operation surface of the effect button 63. As the "predetermined light emission mode", for example, white blinking → blue blinking → green blinking → red blinking → gold blinking (yellow blinking) → seven color blinking (rainbow) based on the expectation degree (variation effect start command) that becomes a big hit. The expectation that the jackpot will be a big hit is set high in the order of blinking (big hit rich).

When the reach is formed, the appearance and disappearance of the effect button can be performed. The appearance and disappearance of the effect button is the beginning of the effect execution period, the timekeeping is started, and the effect button is displayed and disappears until the end of the effect execution period. It is possible to perform the appearance and disappearance production of. In other words, the appearance / disappearance effect execution period of the effect button defines an effective period during which the appearance / disappearance effect of the effect button can be performed, and the player intends to operate the effect button 63 (press operation). Appearance and disappearance of the effect button It is a period that can be reflected in the progress of the effect. In the present embodiment, the appearance / disappearance effect execution period of the effect button is set to, for example, 6 seconds, but it may be shorter (for example, 4 seconds) or longer (for example, 8 seconds). Good.

When the first effect button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the image display device 7 is displayed as shown in FIG. 86 (B). On the upper left side of the screen 7a, an image same as or similar to the first effect button image BTN (an image in which characteristic information such as button shape, size, and light emission mode are all the same) or an image similar to the first effect button image (part or all of the characteristic information). The second effect button image BTN2 is displayed as a similar image (the light emitting mode may be the same or different), and the player can operate (press) the effect button 63. In order to prompt the operation), the first effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is arranged in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and displayed in a state in which a predetermined light emitting mode is continued. ..

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 again, the second effect button image BTN2 displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 disappears as shown in FIG. 86 (C). (Disappear). At this time, the second effect button image BTN2 disappears (disappears) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, whereas the first effect button image BTN displays an image in a state in which a predetermined light emitting mode is continued. It is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7.

Further, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 86 (D), the second effect button image BTN2 appears on the right center side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition to being displayed, a first effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is arranged in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in order to encourage the player to operate (press) the effect button 63. It is displayed in a state where a predetermined light emitting mode is continued.

Further, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 86 (E), the second effect button image BTN2 displayed on the right center side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed. It disappears (disappears). At this time, the second effect button image BTN2 disappears (disappears) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, whereas the first effect button image BTN displays an image in a state in which a predetermined light emitting mode is continued. It is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7.

After that, when the end of the effect disappearance effect execution period, that is, when the effective period in which the effect button appearance / disappearance effect can be performed ends, as shown in FIG. 86 (F), the left decorative symbol 8L is a number. "7", the middle decorative symbol 8C becomes the number "9", the right decorative symbol 8R becomes the number "7", and the stop display is performed, and the deviation is confirmed and displayed. In the present embodiment, in the appearance / disappearance effect A of the effect button, the left decorative symbol 8L is a number “7”, the middle decorative symbol 8C is a number “9”, and the right decorative symbol 8R is a number on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Although it was stopped and displayed as "7" and the deviation was confirmed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are the same symbol (for example, the number "7") on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When all 7 ”) are stopped and displayed, a jackpot game (big hit production) that becomes a jackpot and gives a profit to the player is performed.

In the state where the reach shown in FIG. 86 (A) is formed and the first effect button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 at all. If no operation is performed, the appearance / disappearance effect of the effect buttons shown in FIGS. 86 (B) to 86 (E), which is performed within the effect execution period, is not performed, and the effect button appears / disappears effect is executed. At the end of the period, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R shown in FIG. 86 (F) are stopped and displayed.

In this way, the second effect button image BTN2 appears at a random position (arbitrary position) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 so as not to overlap with the first effect button image BTN. There is.

[Appearance and disappearance of production buttons B]
Next, the appearance / disappearance effect B of the effect button will be described with reference to FIG. 87. FIG. 87 is a diagram for explaining the appearance / disappearance effect B of the effect button. The appearance / disappearance effect B of the effect button is performed by selecting from a plurality of types of reach effects when a reach is formed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern. In the effect button appearance / disappearance effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 87 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 on the display screen 7a. The variable display of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the above. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the stopped-displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative symbol during high-speed fluctuation. Immediately before stopping, the decorative symbol decelerates and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again and is displayed as a stop. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (number) (here, the number "7" is temporarily stopped), and the middle decorative symbol 8C is variablely displayed to form a reach. ing.

When the reach is formed, in order to encourage the player to operate (press) the effect button 63, the first effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is located in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is arranged in and displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode. The English word "PUSH" is engraved on the portion of the first effect button image corresponding to the pressing operation surface of the effect button 63. As the "predetermined light emission mode", for example, white blinking → blue blinking → green blinking → red blinking → gold blinking (yellow blinking) → seven color blinking (rainbow) based on the expectation degree (variation effect start command) that becomes a big hit. The expectation that the jackpot will be a big hit is set high in the order of blinking (big hit rich).

When the reach is formed, the appearance and disappearance of the effect button can be performed. The appearance and disappearance of the effect button is the beginning of the effect execution period, the timekeeping is started, and the effect button is displayed and disappears until the end of the effect execution period. It is possible to perform the appearance and disappearance production of. In other words, the appearance / disappearance effect execution period of the effect button defines an effective period during which the appearance / disappearance effect of the effect button can be performed, and the player intends to operate the effect button 63 (press operation). Appearance and disappearance of the effect button It is a period that can be reflected in the progress of the effect. In the present embodiment, the appearance / disappearance effect execution period of the effect button is set to, for example, 6 seconds, but it may be shorter (for example, 4 seconds) or longer (for example, 8 seconds). Good.

When the first effect button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the image display device 7 is displayed as shown in FIG. 87 (B). A hole image MH that imitates a hole in a mogura is displayed on the left side and a right side of the screen 7a, respectively, and a hole image MH that imitates a hole in a mogura is formed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Hole images MH imitating holes in the mogura are displayed on the left and right sides near the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and five holes imitating the holes in the mogura are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The image MH is displayed. Here, the five hole image MHs have the same shape, the same size, and the same color.

From the hole image MH on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 near the upper side, an image imitating a mole with a grinning face (hereinafter referred to as "Nico Nico mole image") "MCH1 is displayed in a manner of showing a face. , An image that is the same as the first effect button image BTN (an image in which characteristic information such as the shape, size, and light emission mode of the button is all the same) or an image similar to the image (one with the characteristic information) above the Nico Nico mole image MCH1. The second effect button image BTN2 is arranged and displayed as a part or all similar images (the light emitting modes may be the same or different). At this time, in order to prompt the player to operate (press) the effect button 63, the first effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is arranged in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed in a state where a predetermined light emitting mode is continued.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 again, as shown in FIG. 87 (C), the second effect button image BTN2 displayed on the left side of the upper side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed. It disappears (disappears). At this time, the second effect button image BTN2 disappears (disappears) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and at the same time, an image imitating a mole having a face that turns its eyes and is dazzling from the smiley mole image MCH1 (hereinafter, , "Kurakuramogura image".) It is displayed in a changed mode to MCH2. The second effect button image BTN2 disappears (disappears) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, whereas the first effect button image BTN disappears from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, whereas the first effect button image BTN is an image display device in a state where a predetermined light emitting mode is continued. It is displayed on the display screen 7a of 7.

Further, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 87 (D), colored glasses (for example, black glasses) are displayed from the hall image MH on the right side near the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. An image imitating a mogura having a face with a spectacle (hereinafter referred to as "glasses mogura image") "MCH3 is displayed in a manner of showing a face. At this time, in order to prompt the player to operate (press) the effect button 63, the first effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is arranged in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed in a state where a predetermined light emitting mode is continued. In some cases, the second effect button image BTN2 is arranged and appears above the glasses mole image MCH3 together with the glasses mole image MCH3.

When the player again operates (presses) the effect button 63 a plurality of times (here, three times), as shown in FIG. 87 (E), the display is displayed in a mode in which the spectacle mole image MCH3 is changed to the spectacle mole image MCH2. To. Unlike the Nico Nico Mole image MCH1, the Mole image MCH3 is strongly struck, and when the Mole image MCH3 is appearing, the effect button 63 must be operated (pressed three times) a plurality of times (three times in this case) to be struck strongly. The mole image MCH3 does not change to the mole image MCH2. The first effect button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a state where the predetermined light emitting mode is continued. Further, when the second effect button image BTN2 is arranged and displayed on the head of the eyeglass mogura image MCH3 together with the eyeglass mogura image MCH3, the player presses the effect button 63 a plurality of times (here, 3). When the operation (pressing operation) is performed only once (times), the second effect button image BTN2 disappears (disappears) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and is displayed in a mode in which the glasses mogura image MCH3 is changed to the clutter mogul image MCH2. Will be done.

Further, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 87 (F), the NicoNico mole image MCH1 makes a face from the hall image MH on the right side near the upper side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition to being displayed in a mode of displaying, the second effect button image BTN2 is displayed in a mode of being arranged and appearing above the Nico Nico Mole image MCH1. At this time, in order to prompt the player to operate (press) the effect button 63, the first effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is arranged in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed in a state where a predetermined light emitting mode is continued.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 again, as shown in FIG. 87 (G), the second effect button image BTN2 displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed. It disappears (disappears). At this time, the second effect button image BTN2 disappears (disappears) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and is displayed in a mode in which the Niconico mole image MCH1 is changed to the Kurakura mole image MCH2. The second effect button image BTN2 disappears (disappears) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, whereas the first effect button image BTN disappears from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, whereas the first effect button image BTN is an image display device in a state where a predetermined light emitting mode is continued. It is displayed on the display screen 7a of 7.

Further, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 87 (H), the Niconico mole image MCH1 appears from the hall image MH in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Is displayed. At this time, in order to prompt the player to operate (press) the effect button 63, the first effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is arranged in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed in a state where a predetermined light emitting mode is continued.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 again, as shown in FIG. 87 (I), the display is changed from the Nico Nico mole image MCH 1 to the Kurakura mole image MCH 2. The first effect button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a state where the predetermined light emitting mode is continued.

After that, when the end of the effect disappearance effect execution period, that is, when the effective period in which the effect button appearance / disappearance effect can be performed ends, as shown in FIG. 87 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L is a number. "7", the middle decorative symbol 8C becomes the number "9", the right decorative symbol 8R becomes the number "7", and the stop display is performed, and the deviation is confirmed and displayed.

In the present embodiment, in the appearance / disappearance effect B of the effect button, the left decorative symbol 8L is a number “7”, the middle decorative symbol 8C is a number “9”, and the right decorative symbol 8R is a number on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Although it was stopped and displayed as "7" and the deviation was confirmed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are the same symbol (for example, the number "7") on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When all 7 ”) are stopped and displayed, a jackpot game (big hit production) that becomes a jackpot and gives a profit to the player is performed.

In a state where the reach shown in FIG. 87 (A) is formed and the first effect button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 at all. If no operation is performed, the appearance / disappearance effect of the effect buttons shown in FIGS. 87 (B) to 87 (I), which is performed during the effect disappearance effect execution period, is not performed, and the effect button appearance / disappearance effect is executed. At the end of the period, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R shown in FIG. 87 (J) are stopped and displayed.

In this way, the second effect button image BTN2 appears at a fixed position where the Nico Nico mole image MCH 1 and the glasses mole image MCH 3 appear.

[Appearance and disappearance of production buttons C]
Next, the appearance / disappearance effect C of the effect button will be described with reference to FIG. 88. FIG. 88 is a diagram for explaining the appearance / disappearance effect C of the effect button. The appearance / disappearance effect C of the effect button is performed during a jackpot game (big hit effect) in which a profit is given to the player, and is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the jackpot effect is performed). Before the end, if there is a big hit in the reserved ball, so-called "holding ream", it will not be done). The presence or absence of this pending ream is determined based on the jackpot pre-judgment result (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type pre-judgment result) and the fluctuation pattern pre-judgment result included in the pre-judgment command. If the hold ream is not produced, in other words, there is no jackpot in the hold ball before the jackpot effect is completed.

In the appearance / disappearance effect C of the effect button, first, as shown in FIG. 88 (A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is specified from the period from the start to the end of the jackpot effect (big hit game). During the period, the effect mode selection screen that allows the player to select the effect mode after the end of the jackpot effect (big hit game) is displayed. In the specific period, in order to convey the mode transition to the selected effect mode after the first period (effect mode selection period) for selecting the effect mode and the first period (effect mode selection period) have elapsed. It is composed of a second period (effect mode confirmation notification period) and. In the present embodiment, in a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) immediately before the end of the jackpot effect (big hit game) (that is, in a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) immediately before the end of the jackpot effect (big hit game)). In order to perform a catch phrase effect in which the catch phrase of the game machine maker is displayed and a slogan prevention effect in which a warning for dependence on the game is displayed, the beginning of this predetermined period and the end of the specific period match. ing.

When the effect mode selection screen is displayed, the first effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 displays an image in order to prompt the player to select the effect mode by operating (pressing the effect) the effect button 63. It is arranged in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the device 7 and is displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode. The English word "PUSH" is engraved on the portion of the first effect button image corresponding to the pressing operation surface of the effect button 63. As the "predetermined light emitting mode", for example, it is blinking in white.

The effect mode composed of A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel is rotated, and each time the effect button 63 is operated (pressed operation), the reel is rotated to specify a specific area. The selection unit SEL in which the effect mode reached to is displayed larger than that of the other effect modes is displayed on the rectangular area side from the center to the upper left corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The effect mode located in this specific area is selected as the effect mode. When the effect mode selection screen is displayed for the first time, the A mode is arranged in a specific area as the default, but when the effect mode selection screen is displayed next time, the default ( That is, the A mode) may always be arranged in the specific area, or the selected effect mode may be arranged in the specific area when the effect mode selection screen is displayed last time.

To the right of the selection section SEL, there is a demo area DS that explains the contents of the currently selected production mode with various images and various characters on the rectangular area side from the center to the upper right corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Is displayed. The demo area DS is formed as a rectangular area, and the character "DEMO" indicating the demo screen of the effect mode is displayed on the upper left side thereof.

In the A mode, the production with the theme of "sun" is advanced, and the theme image PM imitating the "sun" is displayed as a moving image on the left side of the demo area DS, which is the same image as the first production button image BTN. (Images in which characteristic information such as button shape, size, and light emission mode are all the same) or similar images (images that are partially or all similar to the characteristic information (light emission modes may be the same or different) The second effect button image BTN2 is arranged and displayed on the lower right side of the demo area DS as ()). An explanatory text MME regarding the progress of the production in the A mode is displayed on the upper right side of the demo area DS.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 while the A mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, it is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL as shown in FIG. 88 (B). When the A mode moves downward, the D mode, which is arranged below the A mode, is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the bottom to the top, and the B mode, which is arranged above the A mode, is specified from above. It is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates toward the region. Even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the first effect button image BTN is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

In B mode, the production with the theme of "clouds" is progressed, and the theme image PM imitating "clouds" is displayed as a video in the center of the demo area DS, and the explanation MME about the progress of the production in B mode. Is displayed on the upper right side of the demo area DS.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 while the B mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, it is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL as shown in FIG. 88 (C). When the B mode moves downward, the A mode, which is arranged below the B mode, is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the bottom to the top, and the C mode, which is arranged above the B mode, is specified from above. It is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates toward the region. Even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the first effect button image BTN is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

In C mode, the production with the theme of "rain" is progressed, and the theme image PM imitating "rain" is displayed as a video in the center of the demo area DS, and the explanation MME about the progress of the production in C mode. Is displayed on the upper right side of the demo area DS.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 while the C mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, it is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL as shown in FIG. 88 (D). When the C mode moves downward, the B mode arranged below the C mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the lower side to the upper side, and the D mode arranged above the C mode is specified from above. It is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates toward the region. Even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the first effect button image BTN is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

In D mode, the production with the theme of "snow" is progressed, and the theme image PM imitating "snow" is displayed as a video in the center of the demo area DS, and the explanation MME about the progress of the production in D mode. Is displayed on the upper right side of the demo area DS.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 while the D mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, it is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL as shown in FIG. 88 (E). When the D mode moves downward, the C mode located below the D mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the bottom to the top, and the A mode placed above the D mode is specified from above. It is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates toward the region, and the A mode is again in the display mode in which the reel is located in the specific region. Even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the first effect button image BTN is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

After that, in a state where the A mode is in the display mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the first period for selecting the effect mode (effect mode selection period) elapses, and the selected effect mode is entered. At the beginning of the second period (effect mode confirmation notification period) for transmitting the mode transition, as shown in FIG. 88 (F), the four corners of the demo area DS, which is a rectangular area, are the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed in a mode that expands toward the four corners (enlarged mode), and on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a theme that imitates the "sun" that progresses with the theme of "sun" in A mode. The image PM is displayed in a large size, and a message MG indicating that the selected effect mode is the A mode is displayed in a large size from the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward the center of the right side on the right side of the theme image PM. , The second effect button image BTN2 is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

After that, when the second period (effect mode confirmation notification period) elapses and the start of this predetermined period arrives in a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) immediately before the end of the jackpot effect (big hit game) (that is,). During the specified period (for example, 5 seconds) immediately before the end of the jackpot production (big hit game), the catch phrase of the game machine maker is displayed, and the attention to the dependence on the game is alerted. Is displayed, and at the end of a predetermined period, that is, at the end of the jackpot effect (big hit game), as shown in FIG. 88 (G), the effect is produced with the theme of "sun" in A mode. The theme image PM imitating the advancing "sun" is displayed large on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the second effect button image BTN2 is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It will be displayed.

Then, based on the establishment of the starting condition (for example, the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening (second starting winning opening, second entry opening, variable starting opening) 21), the front of the theme image PM is displayed. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in such a manner that the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The variable display is started. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the stopped-displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the theme image PM, which is a background image arranged behind the decorative pattern, can be visually recognized via the semi-transparent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation. Immediately before stopping, the decorative symbol decelerates and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again and is displayed as a stop.

In this way, in the effect button appearance / disappearance effect C, each time the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the reel rotates in the effect mode composed of A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode. The effect mode that reaches a specific area by rotating the reel is displayed larger than other effect modes. At this time, when the A mode reaches the specific area, the second effect button image BTN2 appears in the demo area DS, and when the B mode reaches the specific area, the second effect button image BTN2 appears from the demo area DS. It will disappear (disappear). In other words, in the effect button appearance / disappearance effect C, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the second effect button image BTN2 appears on the display screen 7a (demo area DS) of the image display device 7. It is designed to disappear (disappear).

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the appearance / disappearance effect of the effect button.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 86 (A) to 86 (E) of the appearance / disappearance effect A of the effect button, the effect button 63 (operation means) that can be operated by the player and the effect button 63 (operation means). An image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying various images, and a first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) imitating an effect button 63 (operation means) is an image display device 7. A second effect button image BTN2 (second) that imitates the effect button 63 (operation means) based on the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 (operation means) while being displayed on the (display means). The first effect in which the operation means image of 2 is displayed (appeared) on the image display device 7 (display means) and the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) are displayed in the image display device 7 (display). At least one of the second effects that are hidden in the means) (disappear (disappear) from the image display device 7 (display means)) can be executed. According to this configuration, the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) imitating the effect button 63 (operation means) based on the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 (operation means). ) Can be displayed (appeared) on the image display device 7 (display means) or hidden (disappeared (disappeared) from the image display device 7 (display means)), so that the player can be visually recognized. It can be entertained and the interest can be improved. The same applies to the appearance / disappearance effect B of the effect buttons of FIGS. 87 (A) to 87 (I) and the appearance / disappearance effect C of the effect buttons of FIGS. 88 (A) to 88 (E).

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 86 (A) to 86 (E) of the effect button appearance / disappearance effect A, the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image). Is the first effect button image BTN (first operation) in the first effect in which the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is displayed (appeared) on the image display device 7 (display means). It is displayed at a different position from the means image). For example, the first effect button image BTN (first operating means image) is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, whereas the second effect button image BTN2 (second effect button image BTN2) is displayed. (Image) is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and on the right center side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. According to this configuration, the image display device 7 (display) is arranged so that the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) and the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) are arranged differently. Since it is displayed on the means), the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
In the appearance / disappearance effect B of the effect buttons of FIGS. 87 (A) to 87 (I), the first effect button image BTN (first operating means image) is placed in the lower center of the image display device 7 (display means). While it is displayed, the second effect button image BTN2 (second operating means image) is on the upper left side of the image display device 7 (display means) or on the lower right side of the image display device 7 (display means). Since it is displayed, it is the same.
In the appearance / disappearance effect C of the effect buttons of FIGS. 88 (A) to 88 (E), the first effect button image BTN (first operating means image) is placed in the lower center of the image display device 7 (display means). On the other hand, the second effect button is displayed in the demo area DS (lower right side of the demo area DS) arranged on the rectangular area side from the center to the upper right corner of the image display device 7 (display means). This is the same because the image BTN2 (second operating means image) is displayed.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 86 (A) to 86 (E) of the appearance / disappearance effect A of the effect button, the first effect button image BTN (first operating means image). Is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) when a reach is formed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern (during a predetermined effect), and the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image). Can be displayed after the first effect button image BTN (first operating means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). According to this configuration, when a reach is formed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern (during a predetermined effect), the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed by the image display device 7 (display means). ), Then the second effect button image BTN2 (second operating means image) can be displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). After the effect button image BTN (first operation means image) of 1 is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is actually an image. When displayed on the display device 7 (display means), the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) appears in a display mode, which can visually entertain the player. Can be improved. The same applies to the appearance / disappearance effect B of the effect buttons of FIGS. 87 (A) to 87 (I).
In the appearance / disappearance effect C of the effect buttons shown in FIGS. 88 (A) to 88 (E), the jackpot effect (big hit game) ends in a specific period of the period from the beginning to the end of the jackpot effect (big hit game). When the effect mode selection screen that allows the player to select the later effect mode is displayed (during a predetermined effect), the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device. When the A mode is selected after being displayed on 7 (display means), the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). After the first effect button image BTN (first operating means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the A mode is actually selected. When the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the display mode in which the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) appears. It is possible to visually entertain the player and improve the interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 86 (A) to 86 (E) of the effect button appearance / disappearance effect A, the image display device 7 (display means) has a left decorative symbol 8L. The reach effect can be displayed in the variable effect display of the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R, and the first effect button image BTN (first operating means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). The predetermined production is a reach production. According to this configuration, the timing at which the first effect button image BTN (first operating means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) can be a period during which the reach effect is performed. , In addition to the image produced by the reach effect, after the appearance of the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image), the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) appears. Therefore, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved. The same applies to the appearance / disappearance effect B of the effect buttons of FIGS. 87 (A) to 87 (I).

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 88 (A) to 88 (E) of the appearance / disappearance effect C of the effect button, the image display device 7 (display means) is a jackpot effect (hit game). The predetermined effect in which the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) is a jackpot effect (effect of a winning game). Is. According to this configuration, the timing at which the first effect button image BTN (first operating means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) is the period during which the jackpot effect (effect of the winning game) is performed. Of these, a specific period can be set, and in addition to the image produced by the jackpot effect (the effect of the winning game), after the appearance of the first effect button image BTN (first operating means image), the second effect button is further displayed. Since the image BTN2 (second operation means image) can appear, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 86 (A) to 86 (E) of the appearance / disappearance effect A of the effect button, the first effect button image BTN (first operating means image). And the color of the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) are the same color. According to this configuration, the color of the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) and the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). The color of) makes it possible to visually entertain the player and improve the interest. The same applies to the appearance / disappearance effect B of the effect buttons of FIGS. 87 (A) to 87 (I) and the appearance / disappearance effect C of the effect buttons of FIGS. 88 (A) to 88 (E).

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the appearance / disappearance effect of the effect button.
[Modification 1]
In the appearance / disappearance effect A of the effect button of FIG. 86, the appearance / disappearance effect B of the effect button of FIG. 87, and the appearance / disappearance effect C of the effect button of FIG. Based on the fact that the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) and the effect button 63 (operation means) is operated (pressed). A first effect in which the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) imitating the effect button 63 (operation means) is displayed (appeared) on the image display device 7 (display means), and a second effect. Of the second effect, the effect button image BTN2 (second operating means image) is hidden in the image display device 7 (display means) (disappears (disappears) from the image display device 7 (display means)). I was able to do one or the other. However, instead of the effect button 63 (operating means), the sword member 64 or the sword button 65 may be used. In this case, in the image display device 7 (display means), the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) and the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) are the sword member 64. The image imitates the sword button 65.

[Modification 2]
Appearance and disappearance of the effect button in FIG. 86 In the effect A, when the effect button 63 is operated (pressed), the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) disappears from the image display device 7 (display means). When the effect button 63 was operated (pressed) again (disappeared), the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) was displayed (appeared) on the image display device 7 (display means). .. However, after the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) disappears (disappears) from the image display device 7 (display means), the effect button 63 is pressed a plurality of times (for example, twice, three times, ..., 9 times, 10 times, a predetermined fixed number of times, or 2 to 10 times, only a random number set in real time by a lottery in the production control microcomputer 91 (image control microcomputer 101) The operation (pressing operation) may be performed. In this way, each time the effect button 63 is operated (pressed), the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is erased (disappeared) or displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). It can contribute to eliminating the monotony of being (appearing). Further, depending on the number of times the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) disappears (disappears) on the image display device 7 (display means). Since the player can discover the correspondence relationship of being displayed (appearing) by himself / herself, it is difficult to feel the monotony of the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63, thereby suppressing the decrease in the motivation to play. It can also contribute to that.

[Modification 3]
In the appearance / disappearance effect A of the effect button of FIG. 86 and the appearance / disappearance effect B of the effect button of FIG. 87, the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) disappears from the image display device 7 (display means). Each time (disappears) and is displayed (appears), the size of the second effect button image BTN2 (second operating means image) is gradually increased toward the maximum size. May be good. In this case, each time the effect button 63 is operated (pressing operation), the size of the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is gradually increased toward the maximum size. Alternatively, the image may be kept at a certain size from the size before the maximum size (the size several steps before the maximum size (in the middle)). By doing so, it is possible to increase the expectation that a jackpot game (big hit effect) that gives profit to the player by the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 can be generated, and the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 can be performed. It can contribute to making it difficult for the player to be reluctant.

[Modification example 4]
In the appearance / disappearance effect A of the effect button of FIG. 86 and the appearance / disappearance effect B of the effect button of FIG. 87, the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) disappears from the image display device 7 (display means). Every time (disappears) and is displayed (appears), it is expected that a jackpot game (big hit effect) will occur in which the color of the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is given to the player. The color may be gradually changed to enhance the feeling. For example, it changes stepwise from white → blue → green → red → golden → seven colors (rainbow color). In this way, it is possible to contribute to making it difficult for the player to be reluctant to operate the effect button 63 (pressing operation).

[Modification 5]
In the appearance / disappearance effect C of the effect button in FIG. 88, the theme image PM imitating the theme of each mode was displayed as a moving image on the left side of the demo area DS. Such a video is a video explaining the progress of the production of each mode, characters, backgrounds, scenes, etc., and may be a video by 3D CG, a video by animation, or a movie. It may be one scene. A still image may be used instead of the moving image.

[Modification 6]
In the appearance / disappearance effect A of the effect button of FIG. 86, the appearance / disappearance effect B of the effect button of FIG. 87, and the appearance / disappearance effect C of the effect button of FIG. 88, the first effect button image imitating the effect button 63 (operation means). The effect button 63 (operation) is based on the fact that the effect button 63 (operation means) is operated (pressed) while the BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). The first effect in which the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) imitating the means) is displayed (appeared) on the image display device 7 (display means), and the second effect button image BTN2 (means). The second effect, in which the second operating means image) is hidden in the image display device 7 (display means) (disappears (disappears) from the image display device 7 (display means)), can be executed. .. However, in a state where the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) imitating the effect button 63 (operation means) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the effect button 63 (operation means) Is operated (pressed), a second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) imitating the effect button 63 (operation means) is displayed (appeared) on the image display device 7 (display means). The first effect is executed, and for example, the effect button 63 (operation means) is operated only 10 times (when the pressing operation is performed, the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is accompanied by the operation. Can be hidden in the image display device 7 (display means) (disappears (disappears) from the image display device 7 (display means)), and the second effect may be executed. The effect button 63 (operation means) is operated (pressed) while the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) imitating 63 (operation means) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). Each time an operation is performed, the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) imitating the effect button 63 (operation means) is hidden from the image display device 7 (display means) (image display device). The second effect that disappears (disappears) from 7 (display means) is executed. For example, when the effect button 63 (operation means) is operated only 10 times (when pressed, the second effect button is accompanied by the operation). The image BTN2 (second operating means image) may be capable of executing the first effect of being displayed (appearing) on the image display device 7 (display means).

[Modification 7]
In the appearance / disappearance effect C of the effect button of FIG. 88, the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) during the jackpot effect (effect of the winning game). Later, the second effect button image BTN2 (second operating means image) was displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). However, as the effect of the hit game, after the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) during the effect in the small hit game in addition to the big hit effect. The second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) may be displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), or the second effect may be displayed in the small hit game instead of the jackpot effect. After the effect button image BTN (first operation means image) of 1 is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means image). It may be displayed on the display means).

[Modification 8]
The appearance / disappearance effect A of the effect button of FIG. 86, the appearance / disappearance effect B of the effect button of FIG. 87, and the appearance / disappearance effect C of the effect button of FIG. The production of is may be added.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect B4-1]
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
A gaming machine provided with a display means capable of displaying various images.
Based on the fact that the operating means is operated while the image of the first operating means imitating the operating means is displayed on the display means.
The first effect in which the image of the second operating means imitating the operating means is displayed on the display means, and
A second effect in which the image of the second operating means is hidden from the display means, and
At least one of them can be executed,
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-1.
The second operating means image is displayed at a position different from that of the first operating means image in the first effect.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B4-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-1 or aspect B4-2.
The first operating means image is displayed on the display means during a predetermined effect.
The second operating means image can be displayed after the first operating means image is displayed on the display means.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B4-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-3.
The display means can display the reach effect in the variable effect display of the decorative pattern.
The predetermined effect is the reach effect.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B4-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-3.
The display means can display the effect of the winning game.
The predetermined effect is the effect of the hit game.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B4-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B4-1 to B4-5.
The color of the first operating means image and the color of the second operating means image are the same color.
A game machine characterized by that.

The winning notification effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 89 to 91. This winning notification effect can be executed during the variable effect of the effect symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the winning notification effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main display device. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a of 7.

In all of the winning notification effects A to C, the effect button 63 is enabled during the battle effect, and when the number of operations of the effect button 63 reaches 1, 5, 8, 12, or 14, the jackpot confirmation effect is achieved. It is a production to execute. If the jackpot confirmation effect is not executed even after reaching 14 times, the loss is confirmed.

[Winning notification production A]
FIG. 89 is a diagram for explaining the winning notification effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 89A, the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. The reserved image 9B is displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a. The reserved image 9B is displayed according to the number of stored second special figure reservations, and here, three reserved images 9B are displayed. The hold digestion image 9C corresponds to the effect symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a. In addition, it is assumed that it is a fluctuation during the time saving game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89B, the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 89C, the battle effect (start) is executed. In the battle production (start), the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB will appear. After that, a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is fought, and when the ally character CRA finally wins the enemy character CRB, it becomes a big hit. In the battle effect (start), the input of the effect button 63 is valid. That is, although the display screen 7a is not displayed to prompt the pressing of the effect button 63, the effect control microcomputer 91 is based on the signal from the effect button detection switch 63a input via the relay board 108. Detects the operation of. The actual number of operations of the effect button 63 is shown on the right side of the display screen 7a. It is assumed that a total of 5 operations have been performed so far.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (D), the battle effect (initial) is executed. In the battle production (initial stage), the enemy character CRB becomes dominant, and the ally character CRA is cornered to the right. In the battle effect (initial stage), the input of the effect button 63 is valid. The actual number of operations of the effect button 63 is shown on the right side of the display screen 7a. It is assumed that a total of 10 operations have been performed so far.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (E), the battle effect (mid-term) is executed. In the battle production (mid-term), the ally character CRA becomes dominant, and the enemy character CRB is cornered to the left. In the battle production (mid-term), the input of the production button 63 is valid. The actual number of operations of the effect button 63 is shown on the right side of the display screen 7a. It is assumed that a total of 12 operations have been performed so far.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (F), the jackpot confirmation effect is executed. The jackpot confirmation effect is an effect in which a ally character CRA appears and its background is a rainbow background RB displayed in seven colors of a rainbow. The rainbow background RB is the background for confirming the jackpot. In addition, a message image MG saying "It's a big hit" is displayed in the upper left part of the display screen 7a. That is, in the battle production (mid-term), the jackpot confirmation production was executed when the operation of the production button 63 reached 12 times.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (G), the battle effect (final stage) is executed. The battle production (final stage) is a production that notifies the victory or defeat of the ally character CRA. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center, and the message image MG of "victory" is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (H), the fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (big hit), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R stop at the same number to form so-called doublets. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped at "7".

[Winning notification production B]
FIG. 90 is a diagram for explaining the winning notification effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 90 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. The reserved image 9B is displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a. The reserved image 9B is displayed according to the number of stored second special figure reservations, and here, three reserved images 9B are displayed. The hold digestion image 9C corresponds to the effect symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a. In addition, it is assumed that it is a fluctuation during the time saving game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90B, the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (C), the battle effect (start) is executed. In the battle production (start), the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB will appear. After that, a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is fought, and when the ally character CRA finally wins the enemy character CRB, it becomes a big hit. In the battle effect (start), the input of the effect button 63 is valid. That is, although the display screen 7a is not displayed to prompt the pressing of the effect button 63, the effect control microcomputer 91 is based on the signal from the effect button detection switch 63a input via the relay board 108. Detects the operation of. The actual number of operations of the effect button 63 is shown on the right side of the display screen 7a. It is assumed that a total of 5 operations have been performed so far.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (D), the jackpot confirmation effect is executed. The jackpot confirmation effect is an effect in which a ally character CRA appears and its background is a rainbow background RB displayed in seven colors of a rainbow. The rainbow background RB is the background for confirming the jackpot. In addition, a message image MG saying "It's a big hit" is displayed in the upper left part of the display screen 7a. That is, in the battle production (mid-term), the jackpot confirmation production was executed when the operation of the production button 63 reached 5 times.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (E), the battle effect (initial) is executed. In the battle production (initial stage), the enemy character CRB becomes dominant, and the ally character CRA is cornered to the right.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (F), the battle effect (mid-term) is executed. In the battle production (mid-term), the ally character CRA becomes dominant, and the enemy character CRB is cornered to the left.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (G), the battle effect (final stage) is executed. The battle production (final stage) is a production that notifies the victory or defeat of the ally character CRA. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center, and the message image MG of "victory" is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (H), the fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (big hit), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R stop at the same number to form so-called doublets. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped at "7".

[Winning notification production C]
FIG. 91 is a diagram for explaining the winning notification effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 91 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. The reserved image 9B is displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a. The reserved image 9B is displayed according to the number of stored second special figure reservations, and here, three reserved images 9B are displayed. The hold digestion image 9C corresponds to the effect symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a. In addition, it is assumed that it is a fluctuation during the time saving game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (C), the battle effect (start) is executed. In the battle production (start), the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB will appear. After that, a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is fought, and when the ally character CRA finally wins the enemy character CRB, it becomes a big hit. In the battle effect (start), the input of the effect button 63 is valid. Here, the button image BG is displayed and the characters "press" are displayed. The effect control microcomputer 91 detects the operation of the effect button 63 based on the signal from the effect button detection switch 63a input via the relay board 108. The actual number of operations of the effect button 63 is shown on the right side of the display screen 7a. It is assumed that a total of 5 operations have been performed so far.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (D), the battle effect (initial) is executed. In the battle production (initial stage), the enemy character CRB becomes dominant, and the ally character CRA is cornered to the right. In the battle effect (initial stage), the input of the effect button 63 is valid. Here, the button image BG is displayed and the characters "press" are displayed. The actual number of operations of the effect button 63 is shown on the right side of the display screen 7a. It is assumed that a total of 10 operations have been performed so far.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (E), the battle effect (mid-term) is executed. In the battle production (mid-term), the ally character CRA becomes dominant, and the enemy character CRB is cornered to the left. In the battle production (mid-term), the input of the production button 63 is valid. Here, the button image BG is displayed and the characters "press" are displayed. The actual number of operations of the effect button 63 is shown on the right side of the display screen 7a. It is assumed that a total of 14 operations have been performed so far.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (F), the battle effect (final stage) is executed. The battle production (final stage) is a production that notifies the victory or defeat of the ally character CRA. Here, the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center, and the message image MG of "defeat" is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (G), the fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (loss), the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stop at "7", and the middle effect symbol 8C stops at "8".

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the winning notification effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, by repeatedly operating (pressing) the effect button 63 during the battle effect, it is possible to execute the jackpot confirmation effect when the predetermined number of operations is reached. (Fig. 89 (E) (F), Fig. 90 (C) (D)). According to this configuration, it is possible to contribute to the promotion of the operation of the effect button 63 and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, a plurality of operation times of 1, 5, 8, 12, and 14 times are set as predetermined operation times. According to this configuration, since there are a plurality of timings at which the jackpot confirmation effect may be executed, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the jackpot confirmation effect is not executed by 14 operations, which is the upper limit of the number of operations (FIG. 91 (E)), the loss in the jackpot lottery is determined. According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game without having unnecessary expectations.

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the effect of prompting the operation of the effect button 63 is not performed during the period when the effect button 63 is enabled (FIGS. 89 (C) to (E) and 90 (C)). According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by making it a back command-like production only for the players who know it.

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, there are cases where the effect prompting the operation of the effect button 63 is performed during the period when the effect button 63 is valid (FIGS. 91 (C) to (E)), and there are cases where the effect button 63 is not performed. (FIGS. 89 (C) to (E), FIG. 90 (C)). According to this configuration, the range of production can be expanded and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the winning notification effect.
[Modification 1]
Although the operation of the effect button 63 has been illustrated above, it can be similarly applied to the operation of a lever, a sword, or the like.

[Modification 2]
In the above, it was an example of notifying the winning of the big hit lottery, but it can also be applied to the winning of the maximum number of rounds in the lottery of the number of rounds at the time of the big hit and the winning in the lottery to shift to the high accuracy state after the big hit. is there.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect B5-1]
A gaming machine that is equipped with an operation unit that can be operated by a player and can perform an effect based on the operation of the operation unit.
By repeatedly operating the operation unit during a predetermined effect, it is possible to notify the winning in a specific lottery when the number of operations of the operation unit reaches a predetermined number of operations.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B5-1.
A plurality of operation times are set as the predetermined number of operations.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B5-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B5-1 or aspect B5-2.
If there is no notification of winning even if the number of operations of the operation unit exceeds the predetermined upper limit of the number of operations, the loss in the specific lottery is determined.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B5-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B5-1 to B5-3.
During the predetermined effect, a promotion effect that encourages the operation of the operation unit is not performed.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B5-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B5-1 to B5-3.
During the predetermined effect, there are cases where a promotion effect that encourages the operation of the operation unit is performed, and cases where the promotion effect is not performed.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B5-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B5-1 to B5-5.
The specific lottery is a jackpot lottery,
A game machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the outer shell inner / outer effects A to C of the stereoscopic image will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94. In FIGS. 92 to 94, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 arranged around the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted from the viewability of the drawing, and the image display device 7 The decorative design and various reserved images displayed on the display screen 7a are also omitted for the sake of legibility of the drawing.

The outer / outer effect of this three-dimensional image is executed during the change effect of the decorative pattern (for example, the period from the start of the change of the decorative pattern to the stop of the change), or during the jackpot game (big hit effect) in which the player is given a profit. It can be done. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 (for example, a variable effect start command, various jackpot game opening commands, jackpot game round designation commands, jackpot game ending commands), and buttons are displayed. When an instruction to execute the effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Here, first, the outer shell inner / outer effect A of the stereoscopic image will be described, the outer outer inner / outer effect B of the stereoscopic image, and the outer inner / outer effect C of the stereoscopic image will be described in order.

[Outside and outside production A of stereoscopic image]
First, the outer shell inner / outer effect A of the stereoscopic image will be described with reference to FIG. 92. FIG. 92 is a diagram for explaining the outer / outer outer / outer effect A of the stereoscopic image. In the outer / outer effect A of the stereoscopic image, first, as shown in FIG. 92 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, for example, the number "4" of the stereoscopic image is colored and opaque as a predetermined image. When it appears as an FRM, it is displayed in such a manner that it approaches, moves away, stops, and swings (including rotation, the same applies hereinafter). At this time, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is defined as the outer region (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as a boundary with the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). , The outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is divided into regions. Here, the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) is the background image.

After this, when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") reappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is the outer shell of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). With (contour) as the boundary, the area of the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") and the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") It is partitioned. Further, the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) becomes the background image.

When the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a manner approaching, the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed in a large size. As the proportion of the display screen 7a of the display device 7 increases, the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) becomes smaller and the proportion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 decreases. Become. On the other hand, when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a distant manner, the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed. Is displayed small and the proportion occupied by the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes low, so that the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) becomes large and the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes large. The percentage of the total is high.

After this, when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") reappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen of the image display device 7 approaches the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). Similarly, when the image is displayed on the 7a or the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a distant manner, the outline (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is similarly displayed. As the ratio of the inner region FRMa of the image display device 7 occupying the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes higher or lower, the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) becomes higher or lower. The proportion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is lowered or increased.

A pattern (not shown) is provided on the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). In the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"), as the first geometric pattern, quadrangles are arranged in a matrix in the vertical and horizontal directions separated from each other by a predetermined interval. Is displayed. The first geometric pattern is a still image.

After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the frame of the stereoscopic image is colored and opaque from the colored and opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) as a predetermined image. When the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is switched to and the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM appears, one or both of the vertical length and the horizontal length of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM may be increased, or one or both may be decreased. It is displayed in the mode of At this time, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has the outer region (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a boundary, the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, and the frame-shaped stereoscopic image. It will be partitioned into the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the FRM. Here, the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is the background image.

After that, when the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM reappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 uses the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a boundary. , The inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM and the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM are divided into regions. Further, the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM serves as the background image.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) is displayed at the timing of switching from the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) to the colored opaque frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a predetermined image. ) From the first geometric pattern displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) (a pattern in which squares are arranged in a matrix in the vertical and horizontal directions separated from each other by a predetermined interval). A second geometric pattern is displayed by switching to a stack of bricks in the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM. The second geometric pattern is a still image. Further, the character CRA appears in the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM and moves in the inner region FRMa, and the moving image of the character CRA is reproduced.

One or both of the vertical length and the horizontal length of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM are increased, and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and inside the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. When the region FRMa is displayed large, the proportion occupied by the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 increases, so that the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes small and the display of the image display device 7 is displayed. The proportion occupied by the screen 7a becomes low. On the other hand, the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in such a manner that one or both of the vertical length and the horizontal length of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM are reduced, and the outer shell of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed. When the inner region FRMa of the (contour) is displayed small, the proportion occupied by the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes low, so that the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes large and the image is imaged. The proportion of the display screen 7a of the display device 7 increases.

After this, when the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM reappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, one or both of the vertical length and the horizontal length of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes large. It is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a mode, or is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a mode in which one or both of the vertical length and the horizontal length of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM are reduced. Similarly, the proportion of the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM occupying the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes higher or lower. The ratio of the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM to occupy the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes low or high.

After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (C), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the colored opaque frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a predetermined image again to the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”). When the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") appears, the image is displayed in a mode of approaching, moving away, stopping, or swinging. Here, even if the predetermined image is switched from the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM to the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) again, the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the framed stereoscopic image FRM. The second geometric pattern (pattern of stacked bricks) displayed in is taken over and displayed as it is in the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"), and is a still image. Does not switch to the geometric pattern of.

After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (D), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) as a predetermined image is displayed again, and a colored opaque frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed. When the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM appears, one or both of the vertical length and the horizontal length of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM are displayed in such a manner that one or both are increased or one or both are decreased. To.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed at the timing of switching from the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") to the colored opaque frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a predetermined image. ) From the second geometric pattern (pattern of stacked bricks) displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) to the third geometry in the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. As a scholarly pattern, the octagons are separated from each other by a predetermined interval and arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions, and the octagons are displayed in a matrix. The third geometric pattern is a still image. Further, a character CRB newly appears in the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM and moves in the inner region FRMa, and a moving image of the character CRB is reproduced.

After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (E), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the colored opaque frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a predetermined image again to the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”). When the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") appears, the image is displayed in a mode of approaching, moving away, stopping, or swinging. Here, even if the predetermined image is switched from the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM to the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) again, the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the framed stereoscopic image FRM. The third geometric pattern (a pattern in which octagons are separated from each other by a predetermined interval and arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions and arranged in a matrix) is the outline (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). ) Is inherited and displayed as it is in the outer region FRMb, and does not switch to another geometric pattern that is a still image.

After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (F), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 changes from a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) as a predetermined image to a colored opaque frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. When the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is switched and appears, one or both of the vertical length and the horizontal length of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM are displayed in such a manner that one or both are increased or one or both are decreased. ..

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed at the timing of switching from the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") to the colored opaque frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a predetermined image. ) From the third geometric pattern displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) (a pattern in which octagons are arranged in a matrix in the vertical and horizontal directions separated from each other by a predetermined interval). In the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM, the alphabetic V-shape is continuously arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions as a fourth geometric pattern and displayed. The fourth geometric pattern is a still image. Further, two characters CRA and CRB appear in the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM and approach each other in the inner region FRMa, and moving images of the two characters CRA and CRB are reproduced. To.

After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (G), the two characters CRA and CRB displayed in the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM are largely displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, an action effect is developed by the two characters CRA and CRB. That is, in addition to the two character CRAs and CRBs displayed in the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, the background images of the two character CRAs and CRBs are also displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It will be displayed large in.

When a series of effects from FIG. 92 (A) to FIG. 92 (G) are performed in the reach effect (as part of the reach effect) after the reach is formed, the action effect is developed and the image is displayed. When the symbols with the same decorative symbols are aligned and stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7, a jackpot game (big hit effect) in which a profit is given to the player as a jackpot is performed. If the symbols having the same decorative symbols are not aligned and are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the detachment is confirmed and displayed.

Further, when a series of effects from FIG. 92 (A) to FIG. 92 (G) are performed during the jackpot game (big hit effect), an action effect is developed, for example, the character CRA competes with the character CRB. When the character wins in, the right-handed game is started (or continued), whereas when the character CRA is defeated in the game with the character CRB, the left-handed game is started (or right-handed game). Will be returned to the left-handed game).

In addition, when one or both of the vertical length and the horizontal length of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes large, the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes large, or the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes large. As one or both of the vertical length and the horizontal length of the stereoscopic image FRM becomes smaller, the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes smaller. However, as the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes larger, the size of the character displayed in the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM also increases accordingly. Instead of being displayed in a large size (enlarged display), in addition to the character, the area around the character in which the background around the character and other characters and items existing around the character can be visually recognized is expanded. In addition, as the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes smaller, the size of the character displayed in the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM also increases accordingly. Instead of being displayed small (reduced display), the area around the character described above becomes smaller, and the area where the character itself can be visually recognized also becomes smaller. Of course, when the character displayed in the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM approaches (moves toward the player side) in the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. While the size of the character is displayed large, the size of the character is displayed small when it is far away (moves away from the player side).

[Outside and outside production B of stereoscopic image]
Next, the outer shell inner / outer effect B of the stereoscopic image will be described with reference to FIG. 93. FIG. 93 is a diagram for explaining the outer / outer outer / outer effect B of the stereoscopic image. In the outer / outer effect B of the stereoscopic image, first, as shown in FIG. 93 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, for example, the number "4" of the stereoscopic image is colored and opaque as a predetermined image. When it appears as an FRM, it is displayed in an approaching, distant, stopping, or oscillating manner. At this time, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is defined as the outer region (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as a boundary with the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). , The outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is divided into regions. Here, the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) is the background image.

After this, when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") reappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is the outer shell of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). With (contour) as the boundary, the area of the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") and the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") It is partitioned. Further, the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) becomes the background image.

When the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a manner approaching, the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed in a large size. As the proportion of the display screen 7a of the display device 7 increases, the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) becomes smaller and the proportion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 decreases. Become. On the other hand, when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a distant manner, the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed. Is displayed small and the proportion occupied by the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes low, so that the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) becomes large and the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes large. The percentage of the total is high.

After this, when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") reappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen of the image display device 7 approaches the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). Similarly, when the image is displayed on the 7a or the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a distant manner, the outline (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is similarly displayed. When the proportion of the inner region FRMa of the image display device 7 occupying the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes higher or lower, the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) is displayed as an image. The proportion of the display screen 7a of the device 7 is reduced or increased.

A pattern (not shown) is provided on the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). In the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"), as the first geometric pattern, quadrangles are arranged in a matrix in the vertical and horizontal directions separated from each other by a predetermined interval. Is displayed. The first geometric pattern is a still image.

After that, as shown in FIG. 93 (B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the stereoscopic image board is colored and opaque from the colored and opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) as a predetermined image. When a plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is switched as a three-dimensional image FRM, it is displayed in a mode of approaching, moving away, stopping, or rotating in a predetermined direction. At this time, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has the outer region (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a boundary, the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, and the plate-shaped stereoscopic image. It will be partitioned into the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the FRM. Here, the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is the background image.

After that, when the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM reappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 uses the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a boundary. , The inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM and the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM are divided into regions. Further, the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM serves as the background image.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) is displayed at the timing of switching from the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) to the colored opaque plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a predetermined image. ) From the first geometric pattern displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) (a pattern in which squares are arranged in a matrix in the vertical and horizontal directions separated from each other by a predetermined interval). A second geometric pattern is displayed by switching to a stack of bricks in the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM. The second geometric pattern is a still image. Further, the character CRA appears in the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM and moves in the inner region FRMa, and the moving image of the character CRA is reproduced. The inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is a surface, and the shape of the character CRA displayed in the inner region FRMa according to the angle of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM in the three-dimensional space. Is also transformed.

When the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a manner approaching, the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed in a large size and the display screen of the image display device 7 is displayed. As the ratio occupied by 7a becomes higher, the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes smaller, and the ratio occupied by the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes lower. On the other hand, when the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a distant manner, the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed small and the image is displayed. As the ratio occupied by the display screen 7a of the device 7 becomes low, the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes large, and the ratio occupied by the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes high.

After that, when the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM reappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it may be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in such a manner that the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM approaches. When the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a distant manner, similarly, the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 7. As the proportion of 7a becomes higher or lower, the proportion of the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM occupying the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes lower. It gets expensive.

After that, as shown in FIG. 93 (C), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the colored opaque plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a predetermined image again to the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”). When the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") appears, it is displayed in a mode of approaching, moving away, stopping, or swinging. Here, even if the color-opaque plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is switched to the colored-opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) again as a predetermined image, the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. The second geometric pattern (pattern of stacked bricks) displayed in is taken over and displayed as it is in the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"), and is a still image. Does not switch to the geometric pattern of.

After that, as shown in FIG. 93 (D), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is again colored opaque plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM from the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) as a predetermined image. When the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM appears, it is displayed in an approaching, distant, stopped, or rotating manner.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed at the timing of switching from the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") to the colored opaque plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a predetermined image. ) From the second geometric pattern (pattern of stacked bricks) displayed on the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM to the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. As a scholarly pattern, the octagons are separated from each other by a predetermined interval, arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions, and switched to a matrix-like display. The third geometric pattern is a still image. Further, a character CRB newly appears in the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM and moves in the inner region FRMa, and a moving image of the character CRB is reproduced. As described above, the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is a surface, and the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed in the inner region FRMa according to the angle in the three-dimensional space. The shape of the character CRB is also deformed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 93 (E), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the colored opaque plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a predetermined image again to the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”). When the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") appears, it is displayed in a mode of approaching, moving away, stopping, or swinging. Here, even if the color-opaque plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is switched to the colored-opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) again as a predetermined image, the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. The third geometric pattern (a pattern in which octagons are separated from each other by a predetermined interval and arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions and arranged in a matrix) is the outline (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). ) Is inherited and displayed as it is in the outer region FRMb, and does not switch to another geometric pattern that is a still image.

After that, as shown in FIG. 93 (F), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 changes from a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) to a colored opaque plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a predetermined image. When the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is switched and appears, it is displayed in a mode of approaching, moving away, stopping, or rotating.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed at the timing of switching from the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") to the colored opaque plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a predetermined image. ) From the third geometric pattern displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) (a pattern in which octagons are arranged in a matrix in the vertical and horizontal directions separated from each other by a predetermined interval). In the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM, the alphabetic V-shape is continuously arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions as a fourth geometric pattern and displayed. The fourth geometric pattern is a still image. Further, two characters CRA and CRB appear in the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM and approach each other in the inner region FRMa, and moving images of the two characters CRA and CRB are reproduced. To. As described above, the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is a surface, and the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed in the inner region FRMa according to the angle in the three-dimensional space. The shapes of the two characters CRA and CRB are also deformed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 93 (G), the two characters CRA and CRB displayed in the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM are largely displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, an action effect is developed by the two characters CRA and CRB. That is, in addition to the two characters CRA and CRB displayed in the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, the background images of the two characters CRA and CRB are also displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It will be displayed large in.

When a series of effects from FIG. 93 (A) to FIG. 93 (G) are performed in the reach effect (as part of the reach effect) after the reach is formed, the action effect is developed and the image is displayed. When the symbols with the same decorative symbols are aligned and stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7, a jackpot game (big hit effect) in which a profit is given to the player as a jackpot is performed. If the symbols having the same decorative symbols are not aligned and are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the detachment is confirmed and displayed.

Further, when a series of effects from FIG. 93 (A) to FIG. 93 (G) are performed during the jackpot game (big hit effect), an action effect is developed, for example, the character CRA competes with the character CRB. When the character wins in, the right-handed game is started (or continued), whereas when the character CRA loses in the game with the character CRB, the left-handed game is started (or right-handed game). Will be returned to the left-handed game).

As the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM approaches (moves toward the player side), the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes larger, or the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes farther (moves toward the player side). By moving away from the player side), the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes smaller. However, as the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes larger, the size of the character displayed in the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM also increases accordingly. Instead of being displayed in a large size (enlarged display), in addition to the character, the area around the character in which the background around the character and other characters and items existing around the character can be visually recognized is expanded. Further, as the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes smaller, the size of the character displayed in the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM also increases accordingly. Instead of being displayed small (reduced display), the area around the character described above becomes smaller, and the area where the character itself can be visually recognized also becomes smaller. Of course, when the character displayed in the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM approaches (moves toward the player side) in the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. While the size of the character is displayed large, the size of the character is displayed small when it is far away (moves away from the player side).

[Outside and outside production C of stereoscopic image]
Next, the outer shell inner / outer effect C of the stereoscopic image will be described with reference to FIG. 94. FIG. 94 is a diagram for explaining the outer / outer outer / outer effect C of the stereoscopic image. In the outer / outer effect C of the stereoscopic image, first, as shown in FIG. 94 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, for example, the number "4" of the stereoscopic image is colored and opaque as a predetermined image. When it appears as an FRM, it is displayed in an approaching, distant, stopping, or rocking manner. At this time, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is defined as the outer region (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as a boundary with the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). , The outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is divided into regions. Here, the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) is the background image.

After this, when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") reappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is the outer shell of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). With (contour) as the boundary, the area of the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") and the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") It is partitioned. Further, the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) becomes the background image.

When the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a manner approaching, the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed in a large size. As the proportion of the display screen 7a of the display device 7 increases, the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) becomes smaller and the proportion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 decreases. Become. On the other hand, when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a distant manner, the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed. Is displayed small and the proportion occupied by the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes low, so that the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) becomes large and the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes large. The percentage of the total is high.

After this, when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") reappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen of the image display device 7 approaches the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). Similarly, when the image is displayed on the 7a or the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a distant manner, the outline (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is similarly displayed. As the ratio of the inner region FRMa of the image display device 7 occupying the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes higher or lower, the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) becomes higher or lower. The proportion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is lowered or increased.

A pattern (not shown) is provided on the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). In the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"), as the first geometric pattern, quadrangles are arranged in a matrix in the vertical and horizontal directions separated from each other by a predetermined interval. Is displayed. The first geometric pattern is a still image.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94 (B), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has a color-opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") to a color-opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as a predetermined image. ”) Is switched to the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (hereinafter referred to as the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number“ 4 ”)), and when the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number“ 4 ”) appears, it is approaching or far away. It is displayed in a mode such as, stopping, or moving in the up, down, left, or right directions. At this time, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has the outer shell (contour) of the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) as a boundary with the outer shell (contour) of the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) as a boundary. ), And the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front. Here, the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front is the background image.

After this, when the front-viewed stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") reappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is viewed from the front-viewed stereoscopic image FRM (number "number"). With the outer shell (contour) of "4") as the boundary, the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front and the outer shell of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front. It is partitioned into the outer region FRMb of (contour) and the region of. Further, the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front becomes the background image.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a stereoscopic image is displayed at the timing of switching from the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) to the colored opaque front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) as a predetermined image. The first geometric pattern displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the FRM (number "4") (a pattern in which the squares are arranged in a matrix in the vertical and horizontal directions separated from each other by a predetermined interval. ) To the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"), which is displayed by switching to a stack of bricks as a second geometric pattern. The second geometric pattern is a still image. Further, the character CRB appears in the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front, and moves in the inner region FRMa, and the moving image of the character CRB is reproduced.

When the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a manner approaching, the inner region of the outer shell (contour) of the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed. Since the FRMa is displayed large and the proportion occupied by the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is high, the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front becomes small and the image display device 7 The ratio of the display screen 7a is reduced. On the other hand, when the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a distant manner, the outer shell (number "4") of the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed. Since the inner region FRMa of the contour) is displayed small and the proportion occupied by the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is low, the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front is large. As a result, the proportion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 increases.

After this, when the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") reappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") approaches the image. Similarly, when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7 or displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a distant manner, the stereoscopic image viewed from the front is similarly viewed. As the ratio of the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the FRM (number "4") occupying the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes higher or lower, the stereoscopic image FRM (front view) is viewed accordingly. The ratio of the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the number “4”) occupying the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes lower or higher.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94 (C), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 shows the color-opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") again from the color-opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as a predetermined image. When the image is switched to (number "4") and the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") appears, it is displayed in an approaching, distant, stopped, or oscillating manner. Here, even if the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") that is colored and opaque as a predetermined image is switched to the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") that is opaque and colored again, the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") that is viewed from the front is displayed. The second geometric pattern (pattern in which bricks are piled up) displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of 4 ") is changed to the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number" 4 "). It is inherited and displayed as it is, and it does not switch to another geometric pattern that is a still image.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94 (D), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 shows the color-opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as a predetermined image and the color-opaque front-view stereoscopic image FRM again. When the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is switched to (number "4") and viewed from the front, it is displayed in a mode of approaching, distant, stopping, moving in the vertical and horizontal directions.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a stereoscopic image is displayed at the timing of switching from the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) to the colored opaque front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) as a predetermined image. Outer region of the outer shell (contour) of the FRM (number "4") The outer shell of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front from the second geometric pattern (pattern of stacked bricks) displayed on the FRMb. As a third geometric pattern, the octagons are displayed in the outer region FRMb of (contour) by being separated from each other by a predetermined interval and arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions and switched to a matrix-like arrangement. The third geometric pattern is a still image.

Further, here, when the front-viewed stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") approaches and a part of the front-viewed stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") protrudes (jumps out) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the front-viewed stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") Two independent inner regions FRMa and FRMa are formed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as discontinuous regions of the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the image display device 7, and straddle the two independent inner regions FRMa and FRMa. In the embodiment, a character CRA holding a sword newly appears and moves in two independent inner regions FRMa and FRMa, and a moving image of the character CRA is reproduced.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94 (E), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 shows the color-opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) again from the color-opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) as a predetermined image. When the image is switched to (number "4") and the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") appears, it is displayed in a mode of approaching, moving away, stopping, or swinging. Here, even if the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") that is colored and opaque as a predetermined image is switched to the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") that is opaque and colored again, the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") that is viewed from the front is displayed. The third geometric pattern (a pattern in which octagons are separated from each other by a predetermined interval and arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions and arranged in a matrix) displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of 4 ") is three-dimensional. It is inherited and displayed as it is in the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the image FRM (number "4"), and does not switch to another geometric pattern that is a still image.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94 (F), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a color-opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as a predetermined image and a color-opaque stereoscopic image FRM (front view). When the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") that is viewed from the front appears after switching to the number "4"), it is displayed in a mode of approaching, moving away, stopping, or moving in the up, down, left, or right directions.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a stereoscopic image is displayed at the timing of switching from the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) to the colored opaque front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) as a predetermined image. A third geometric pattern (octagons are arranged in a matrix in the vertical and horizontal directions with a predetermined interval separated from each other) displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the FRM (number "4"). (Pattern) is switched to a front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") in which the alphabetic V-shape is continuously arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions as the fourth geometric pattern in the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour). Is displayed. The fourth geometric pattern is a still image. Further, the character CRB reappears in the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front, and moves in the inner region FRMa, and the moving image of the character CRB is reproduced.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94 (G), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 shows the color-opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") again from the color-opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as a predetermined image. When the image is switched to (number "4") and the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") appears, it is displayed in an approaching, distant, stopped, or oscillating manner. Here, even if the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") that is colored and opaque as a predetermined image is switched to the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") that is opaque and colored again, the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") that is viewed from the front is displayed. The fourth geometric pattern (a pattern in which alphabetic V-shapes are continuously arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions) displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of 4 ") is the stereoscopic image FRM (number" 4 "). It is inherited and displayed as it is in the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour), and does not switch to another geometric pattern that is a still image.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94 (H), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a color-opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as a predetermined image and a color-opaque stereoscopic image FRM (front view). When the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") that is viewed from the front appears after switching to the number "4"), it is displayed in a mode of approaching, moving away, stopping, moving in the up / down / left / right directions, and stopping.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a stereoscopic image is displayed at the timing of switching from the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) to the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) as a predetermined image. A stereoscopic image viewed from the front from the fourth geometric pattern (a pattern in which alphabetic V-shapes are continuously arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions) displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the FRM (number "4"). It is displayed by switching to a fifth geometric pattern in which tiles are arranged side by side in the vertical and horizontal directions in the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the FRM (number "4"). The fifth geometric pattern is a still image. Further, the character CRA reappears in the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front, and moves in the inner region FRMa, and the moving image of the character CRB is reproduced.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94 (I), the two characters CRA and CRB displayed in the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front are the image display device 7. It is displayed large on the display screen 7a, and the action effect by the two characters CRA and CRB is developed. That is, in addition to the two character CRA and CRB displayed in the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front, the background images of the two character CRA and CRB are also displayed as images. It will be displayed large on the display screen 7a of the device 7.

When a series of effects from FIG. 94 (A) to FIG. 94 (I) are performed in the reach effect (as part of the reach effect) after the reach is formed, the action effect is developed and the image is displayed. When the symbols with the same decorative symbols are aligned and stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7, a jackpot game (big hit effect) in which a profit is given to the player as a jackpot is performed. If the symbols having the same decorative symbols are not aligned and are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the detachment is confirmed and displayed.

Further, when a series of effects from FIG. 94 (A) to FIG. 94 (I) are performed during the jackpot game (big hit effect), an action effect is developed, for example, the character CRA competes with the character CRB. When you win with, the right-handed game is started (or continued), while when the character CRA is defeated in the game with the character CRB, the left-handed game is started (or right-handed game). Will be returned to the left-handed game).

As the front-viewed stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") approaches (moves toward the player), the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the front-viewed stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") becomes large. When the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front becomes far away (moves away from the player side), the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front is As the size becomes smaller, the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front becomes smaller. However, as the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") becomes larger, the outer shell (contour) of the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is accompanied by this. The size of the character displayed in the inner area FRMa of is not displayed in a large size (enlarged display), but in addition to the character, the background around the character and other characters and items existing around the character are visually recognized. The area around the character that can be expanded. Further, as the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") becomes smaller, the outer shell (contour) of the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is accompanied by this. The size of the character displayed on the inner region FRMa of the character is not displayed (reduced display), but the area around the character described above is reduced, and the area where the character itself can be visually recognized is also reduced. Of course, the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front is the character displayed in the outer region (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front. When approaching (moving toward the player side), the size of the character is displayed large, while when moving far (moving away from the player side), the size of the character is displayed small. ..

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the outside / inside / outside effect of the stereoscopic image.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 92 (B), 92 (D), and 92 (F) of the outer shell inner / outer effect A of the stereoscopic image, an image display capable of displaying various images is displayed. A device 7 (display means) is provided, and when a frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), it is formed inside the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image). Frame-shaped stereoscopic image The character CRA and character CRB (first effect image) displayed in the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer shell (contour) of the FRM, and the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image). ), A background image (second production image) having various geometric patterns to be displayed in the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image formed outside the FRM. The frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) is movably displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). According to this configuration, the character CRA displayed in the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM formed inside the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) and the like. In the character CRB (first effect image) and the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM formed outside the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image). Since it is possible to perform an effect using a background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns to be displayed, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
In the outer shell inside / outside effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIGS. 93 (B), 93 (D), and 93 (F), the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM formed inside the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image). Character CRA and character CRB (first effect image) displayed in the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer shell (contour) of the above, and a plate formed outside the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image). Since it is possible to perform an effect with a background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns to be displayed in the outer region FRMb (second area) of the outer shell (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM. The same is true.
In the outer shell inner / outer effect C of the stereoscopic image of FIGS. 94 (B), 94 (D), 94 (F), and 94 (H), the stereoscopic image is formed inside the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image). The front-view stereoscopic image FRM (first effect image) and the character CRA and character CRB (first effect image) displayed in the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer shell (contour) of the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") and the front-view stereoscopic image FRM. A background image (second production image) having various geometric patterns to be displayed in the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer shell (contour) of the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") formed on the outside of the ) And, the same is true because the effect can be executed.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 92 (B), 92 (D), and 92 (F) of the outer / outer effect A of the stereoscopic image, the outer shell of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM ( Character CRA and character CRB (first effect image) displayed in the inner region FRMa (first region) of the contour) and outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. ) Is different from the background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns. According to this configuration, the character CRA and the character CRB (first effect image) are displayed in the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, whereas the frame is displayed. Since a background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns is displayed in the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer shell (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM, the outer shell of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. The first effect image and the second effect image are different from each other with the (contour) as a boundary, and the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
In the outer shell inner / outer effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIGS. 93 (B), 93 (D), and 93 (F), the character is set in the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. While CRA and character CRB (first effect image) are displayed, a background image having various geometric patterns in the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. Since (the second effect image) is displayed, the first effect image and the second effect image are different from each other with the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a boundary, and are the same.
In the outer shell inner / outer effect C of the stereoscopic image of FIGS. 94 (B), 94 (D), 94 (F), and 94 (H), the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front is shown. While the character CRA and character CRB (first production image) are displayed in the inner region FRMa (first region) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front, the outline (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed. Since a background image (second production image) having various geometric patterns is displayed in the outer region FRMb (second region), the outer shell (contour) of the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is bounded. As a result, the first effect image and the second effect image are different and the same.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 92 (B), 92 (D), and 92 (F) of the outer shell inner / outer effect A of the stereoscopic image, a frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined). The image) is moved and displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), and the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is largely displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). Then, the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is small and displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). According to this configuration, the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) is moved and displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), so that the character is bounded by the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. Frame-shaped stereoscopic image on which CRA and character CRB (first production image) are displayed When the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer shell (contour) of the FRM becomes larger, a background image having various geometric patterns (first) Since the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM on which the effect image of 2 is displayed becomes smaller, the player can be visually entertained, which is interesting. It can be improved.
In the outer shell inner / outer effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIGS. 93 (B), 93 (D), and 93 (F), the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) is moved and displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). By doing so, the inner region of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM on which the character CRA and the character CRB (first effect image) are displayed with the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a boundary. When the FRMa (first region) becomes large, a background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns is displayed. The outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed. ) Becomes smaller, so the same is true.
In the outer shell internal / external effect C of the stereoscopic images of FIGS. 94 (B), 94 (D), 94 (F), and 94 (H), the stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) viewed from the front is the image display device 7 (predetermined image). The front view in which the character CRA and the character CRB (first production image) are displayed with the outer shell (contour) of the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as a boundary by being moved and displayed on the display means). When the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) becomes larger, a background image (second production image) having various geometric patterns is displayed in front view. This is the same because the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) is smaller.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 92 (B), 92 (D), and 92 (F) of the outer shell inside / outside effect A of the stereoscopic image, a frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined). Image) is a stereoscopic image. According to this configuration, by using the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a boundary as a boundary, the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM , The outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM can be easily recognized as a partitioned region, and the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. Character CRA and character CRB (first effect image) displayed in (first area) and various types displayed in outer area FRMb (second area) of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. Since it can contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the background image (second production image) having a geometric pattern, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
In the outer shell inner / outer effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIGS. 93 (B), 93 (D), and 93 (F), the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, which is a stereoscopic image, is used as a boundary to form a plate. Area in which the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer shell (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM and the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM are partitioned. Character CRA and character CRB (first effect image) displayed in the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, and the plate-shaped stereoscopic image Since it can contribute to the improvement of visibility with the background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns displayed in the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer shell (contour) of the FRM. The same is true.
In the outer shell inner / outer effect C of the stereoscopic images of FIGS. 94 (B), 94 (D), 94 (F), and 94 (H), the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”), which is a stereoscopic image, is shown. By using the outer shell (contour) as a boundary, the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") has the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer shell (contour) and the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). The outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer shell (contour) of ()) and the inner region (contour) of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front are easily visible as a partitioned region. Character CRA and character CRB (first effect image) displayed in FRMa (first region) and outer region FRMb (second effect) of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front. This is the same because it can contribute to improving the visibility of the background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns displayed in the area).

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 92 (B), 92 (D), and 92 (F) of the outer / outer effect A of the stereoscopic image, the outer shell of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM ( The inner region FRMa (first region) of the contour) serves as an inner region of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM whose boundary is the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM which is a stereoscopic image. The outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is a frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM whose boundary is the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM which is a stereoscopic image. It is the outer region of the outer shell (contour) of. According to this configuration, since the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM which is a stereoscopic image can be used as a boundary, the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM can be used as a boundary. ) And the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM are more easily visible as a partitioned region. As a result, the character CRA and character CRB (first effect image) displayed in the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, and the outer shell of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. Since it can contribute to improving the visibility of the background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns displayed in the outer region FRMb (second region) of the (contour), the player can be affected. It can be visually entertaining and can improve the interest.
In the outer shell inner / outer effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIGS. 93 (B), 93 (D), and 93 (F), the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, which is a stereoscopic image, can be used as a boundary. , The inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM and the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM are partitioned. It becomes easier to see as an area. As a result, the character CRA and character CRB (first effect image) displayed in the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM and the outer shell of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. This is the same because it can contribute to improving the visibility of the background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns displayed in the outer region FRMb (second region) of (contour). ..
In the outer shell internal / external effect C of the stereoscopic images of FIGS. 94 (B), 94 (D), 94 (F), and 94 (H), the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”), which is a stereoscopic image, is shown. Since the outer shell (contour) can be used as a boundary, the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") has an inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer shell (contour) and a front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "number"). The outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer shell (contour) of "4") and the region are more easily visible as a partitioned region. As a result, the character CRA and the character CRB (first effect image) displayed in the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front are viewed from the front. Visibility of a background image (second production image) having various geometric patterns displayed in the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). The same is true because it can contribute more to the improvement.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the outer / outer effect of the stereoscopic image.
[Modification 1]
In the outer shell inner / outer effect A of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 92, a frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM which is a stereoscopic image as a predetermined image, and in the outer shell inner / outer effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 93, a plate-shaped stereoscopic image which is a stereoscopic image as a predetermined image. In FRM, the outer shell inside / outside effect C of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 94, the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front, which is a stereoscopic image, was used as a predetermined image. However, it is the title (or a characteristic word included in the title) of any of the plurality of music used as a predetermined image to show the world view of the production by the game machine 1. Alternatively, the title of the music may be a structure (which may be flat or three-dimensional) that can be associated (imaged).

[Modification 2]
In the outer shell inner / outer effect A of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 92, a frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM which is a stereoscopic image as a predetermined image, and in the outer shell inner / outer effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 93, a plate-shaped stereoscopic image which is a stereoscopic image as a predetermined image. In FRM, the outer shell inside / outside effect C of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 94, the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front, which is a stereoscopic image, was used as a predetermined image. However, a predetermined image may be one described on the front surface of the second movable accessory 15 (for example, "OARO").

[Modification 3]
In the outer shell inner / outer effect A of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 92, a frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM which is a stereoscopic image as a predetermined image, and in the outer shell inner / outer effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 93, a plate-shaped stereoscopic image which is a stereoscopic image as a predetermined image. In FRM, the outer shell inside / outside effect C of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 94, the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front, which is a stereoscopic image, was used as a predetermined image. However, the reserved images 9A and 9B and the reserved digested image 9C may be used as predetermined images. In this case, the inner region (first region) of the outer shell (contour) of the reserved images 9A, 9B and the reserved digested image 9C and the reserved image are bounded by the outer shell (contour) of the reserved images 9A and 9B and the reserved digested image 9C. It can be divided into regions 9A and 9B and an outer region (second region) of the outer shell (contour) of the reserved digestion image 9C. Still images and moving images (movies by 3D CG, moving images by animation, one scene of a movie) are displayed in the inner region (first region) of the outer shell (contour) of the reserved images 9A and 9B and the reserved digested image 9C. In the outer region (second region) of the outer shell (contour) of the reserved images 9A and 9B and the reserved digested image 9C, a background image (still image, moving image (moving by 3D CG, moving image by animation, one scene of a movie) )) Is displayed.

[Modification example 4]
In the outer shell inner / outer effect A of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 92, a frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM which is a stereoscopic image as a predetermined image, and in the outer shell inner / outer effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 93, a plate-shaped stereoscopic image which is a stereoscopic image as a predetermined image. In FRM, the outer shell inside / outside effect C of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 94, the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front, which is a stereoscopic image, was used as a predetermined image. However, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R may be used as predetermined images. In this case, the inner region (contour) of the outer shell (contour) of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is defined as the boundary (outline) of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. 1) and the outer region (second region) of the outer shell (contour) of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. In the inner area (first area) of the outer shell (contour) of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, there are still images and moving images (3D CG moving images, animated moving images, and movie scenes). ) Is displayed, and in the outer region (second region) of the outer shell (contour) of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, a background image (still image, moving image (moving image by 3D CG), An animated movie, a movie scene)) is displayed.

[Modification 5]
In the outer shell inner / outer effect A of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 92, the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM which is a stereoscopic image as a predetermined image, and the outer shell inner / outer effect of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 93 In B, the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM which is a stereoscopic image as a predetermined image, and in the outer shell inner / outer effect C of the stereoscopic image of FIG. The inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer shell (contour) of a certain front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) was a background image having various geometric patterns as still images. However, the background image may be replaced with a still image as a moving image, or a still image and a moving image may be mixed. The moving image may be, for example, a moving image of various geometric patterns, a moving image by three-dimensional CG, a moving image by animation, or a scene of a movie.

[Modification 6]
In the outer shell inner / outer effect A of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 92, a frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM which is one stereoscopic image as a predetermined image, and in the outer shell inner / outer effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 93, a plate which is one stereoscopic image as a predetermined image. The three-dimensional image FRM in the shape, the outer shell inside / outside effect C of the three-dimensional image of FIG. 94 is a three-dimensional image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front, which is one three-dimensional image as a predetermined image, and is a predetermined image in any of the effects. Was one stereoscopic image. However, a plurality of stereoscopic images may be used as the predetermined image. In this case, the outer region (second region) of the outer shell (contour) of each stereoscopic image may be the same image (background image) or different, and one image may be used as each stereoscopic image. It may be displayed so that the entire image of one image can be grasped through the inner region (first region) of the outer shell (contour) of the three-dimensional image, or the inner region (first region) of the outer shell (contour) of each stereoscopic image. The same image may be displayed in the area), or different images may be displayed. In this way, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification 7]
In the outer shell inner / outer effect A of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 92, one or both of the vertical length and the horizontal length of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, which is a stereoscopic image as a predetermined image, becomes larger, or one or both becomes smaller. It was displayed in such a manner. However, the vertical length and the horizontal length of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM may be constant. Even with this configuration, the character displayed in the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM formed inside the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image). CRA or character CRB (first effect image) and outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM formed outside the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image). ) Can be used to perform the production with the background image (second production image) having various geometric patterns to be displayed, so that the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved. it can.

[Modification 8]
In the outer shell internal / external effect C of the stereoscopic images of FIGS. 94 (B), 94 (D), 94 (F), and 94 (H), the stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) viewed from the front is the image display device 7 (predetermined image). Although it was moved and displayed on the display means), it is not limited to the front view, and the stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) may be a display mode that rotates in a three-dimensional space or a display mode that rotates and moves. Good. In this case, when the stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) in an approaching manner and a part of the stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) protrudes (jumps out) from the image display device 7 (display means), the stereoscopic image is discontinuous. A plurality of stereoscopic images that have become image FRMs (predetermined images) are displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), and the inner region FRMa, ... A plurality of independent inner regions are formed in the image display device 7 (display means) as regions in which FRMa is discontinuous. In a manner straddling a plurality of independent inner regions FRMa, ... FRMa formed in this way, a character CRA or a character CRB appears and moves in a plurality of independent inner regions FRMa, ... FRMa. , Character CRA and character CRB moving images are played.

[Modification 9]
The outer shell inner / outer effect A of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 92, the outer outer inner / outer effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 93, and the outer outer / outer effect C of the stereoscopic image of FIG. The production of is may be added.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect C1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying various images.
When displaying a predetermined image on the display means, a first effect image to be displayed in a first region formed inside the predetermined image and a second effect image formed outside the predetermined image. It is possible to execute the effect by the second effect image displayed in the area.
The predetermined image is movably displayed on the display means.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-1.
The first effect image and the second effect image are different.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-1 or aspect C1-2.
When the predetermined image is moved and displayed on the display means and the first area is large and displayed on the display means, the second area is small and displayed on the display means.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C1-1 to C1-3.
The predetermined image is a stereoscopic image.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-4.
The first region is an inner region of the outer shell of the stereoscopic image with the outer shell of the stereoscopic image as a boundary.
The second region is an outer region of the outer shell of the stereoscopic image with the outer shell of the stereoscopic image as a boundary.
A game machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the selection display blocking effects A to C of the effect mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 97. In FIGS. 95 to 97, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted from the viewability of the drawing, and the image is displayed. Some of the decorative patterns and various reserved images displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7 are also omitted due to the ease of viewing the drawings.

This effect mode selection display blocking effect can be executed during a specific period from the start of the change of the decorative symbol to the stop of the change, a specific period during the jackpot game (big hit effect) in which the player is given a profit, and the like. , The intention of the player to operate the effect button 63 (press operation) can be reflected in the progress of the effect. That is, various commands received from the sub-control board 90 by the image control microcomputer 101 (for example, a variation effect start command, a pre-judgment command, various jackpot game opening commands, jackpot game round designation commands, jackpot game ending commands) are transmitted. When an instruction to analyze and execute the button effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Here, first, the selection display blocking effect A of the effect mode will be described, the selection display blocking effect B of the effect mode, and the selection display blocking effect C of the effect mode will be described in order.

[Direction mode selection display prevention effect A]
First, the selection display blocking effect A of the effect mode will be described with reference to FIG. 95. FIG. 95 is a diagram for explaining the selection display blocking effect A of the effect mode. The effect mode selection display prevention effect A is performed during a specific period from the start of change of the decorative symbol to the stop of change. In the effect mode selection display blocking effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 95 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The variable display of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of 7a. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the stopped-displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image (here, the image of the "cloud") arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation. Immediately before stopping, the decorative symbol decelerates and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again and is displayed as a stop.

A message MG of "mode change with the effect button" telling that the effect mode can be changed by operating (pressing operation) the effect button 63 with the start of the change of the decorative pattern is displayed only for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). It is arranged and displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

The pending digested image 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the special symbol hold, is arranged and displayed in the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. To the left of the hold digestion image 9C, here, for example, three hold images 9A are displayed linearly along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as three first special figure holds. It is arranged and displayed on the lower side of the screen 7a. Further, the reserved image 9A and the reserved digested image 9C each have a circular shape, and the size of the reserved digested image 9C is larger than the size of the reserved image 9A. The size of the reserved digested image 9C and the size of the reserved image 9A may be the same.

On the right side of the hold digestion image 9C, a selection unit SEL capable of selecting the effect mode is arranged and displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the selection unit SEL, the effect mode composed of A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel is rotated, and each time the effect button 63 is operated (pressed operation), the reel is rotated. By doing so, the effect mode that has reached a specific area is displayed larger than other effect modes. The effect mode located in this specific area becomes the effect mode in which the effect mode is selected, and the theme image PM of the selected effect mode is largely displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Here, since the effect mode selected last time was the B mode, which will be described later, the theme image PM of this B mode (here, a model of a “cloud”) is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. To.

Here, the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode that constitute the effect mode will be briefly described.

In the A mode, the production with the theme of "sun" is advanced, and the theme image PM imitating "sun" is displayed in large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 while the A mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the A mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL moves downward to form the A mode. The D mode arranged below the A mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the bottom to the top, and the B mode arranged above the A mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the top toward a specific area. Is displayed.

In the B mode, the production with the theme of "clouds" is advanced, and the theme image PM imitating the "clouds" is largely displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 in the state where the B mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the B mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL moves downward to the B mode. The A mode arranged below the B mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the bottom to the top, and the C mode arranged above the B mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the top toward a specific area. Is displayed.

In the C mode, the production with the theme of "rain" is advanced, and the theme image PM imitating "rain" is largely displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 while the C mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the C mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL moves downward to form the C mode. The B mode arranged below the C mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the bottom to the top, and the D mode arranged above the C mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the top toward a specific area. Is displayed.

In the D mode, the production with the theme of "snow" is advanced, and the theme image PM imitating "snow" is displayed in large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 while the D mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the D mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL moves downward to form the D mode. The C mode arranged below the is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the bottom to the top, and the A mode arranged above the D mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the top toward a specific area. It is displayed, and the A mode becomes a display mode in which the A mode is located in the specific area again.

When the decorative symbol in FIG. 95 (A) starts to fluctuate, reach may not be formed or reach may be formed. When the reach is formed, the reach is produced based on the expectation that it will be a big hit. There are multiple reach productions. When reach is formed, as shown in FIG. 95 (B) following FIG. 95 (A), after the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol, the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed as a symbol (number). The cage (temporarily stopped at the number "1" here), the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are changing. In this state, when the game ball enters the first starting port 20, four reserved images 9A are linearly imaged along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as the four first special figure reservations. It is arranged and displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

After that, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the B mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL moves downward, so that the A mode arranged below the B mode moves from the bottom to the top. It is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates, and the C mode arranged above the B mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from above toward a specific region. In the C mode, as shown in FIG. 95 (C), the theme image PM imitating "rain" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, after the start of the change of the decorative symbol, the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped by the symbol (number) following the left decorative symbol 8L (here, the temporary stop is displayed by the number "3"), and the middle decorative symbol 8C changes. It is inside. In this state, even if the game ball enters the first starting port 20, the first special figure hold does not increase because the upper limit of the four first special figure holds has already been reached, and the five hold images 9A are displayed. The image display device 7 is arranged in a straight line on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 along the lower side of the display screen 7a and is not displayed.

After that, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the C mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL moves downward, so that the B mode arranged below the C mode moves from the bottom to the top. It is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates, and the D mode arranged above the C mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from above toward a specific region. In the D mode, as shown in FIG. 95 (D), the theme image PM imitating "snow" is largely displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, after the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol, the left decorative symbol 8L, the right decorative symbol 8R, and then the middle decorative symbol 8C are temporarily stopped and displayed as a symbol (number) (here, the number "5" temporarily stops), and then. , The left decorative symbol 8L becomes the number "1", the middle decorative symbol 8C becomes the number "5", and the right decorative symbol 8R becomes the number "3", and the stop display is performed, and the deviation is confirmed.

When the left decorative symbol 8L becomes the number "1", the middle decorative symbol 8C becomes the number "5", and the right decorative symbol 8R becomes the number "3" and is stopped and displayed, it continues until the next decorative symbol starts to change. Even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 during the period (hereinafter referred to as “interval”), the D mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL cannot be moved downward, and the effect is produced. The mode cannot be selected. As a result, in the interval, the already selected effect mode is continued, and the theme image PM imitating "snow" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In other words, unless the next decorative symbol change starts, the already selected effect mode is continued, and the theme image PM imitating "snow" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It becomes. Even if the demo screen (standby screen) for waiting for customers is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the effect mode already selected is selected after the demo screen for waiting for customers (standby screen) ends. Is continued, and the theme image PM imitating "snow" is displayed in large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

After that, when the next decorative symbol starts to fluctuate, as shown in FIG. 95 (E), it is linearly aligned with the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the reserved image 9A arranged on the rightmost side of the four reserved images 9A moved to the right as the reserved digested image 9C, the remaining three reserved images 9A move to the right one by one. It is displayed with a shift. A message MG of "mode change with the effect button" telling that the effect mode can be changed by operating (pressing operation) the effect button 63 with the start of the change of the decorative pattern is displayed only for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). It is arranged and displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the effect mode can be selected.

In the series of effects from the start of fluctuation of the decorative pattern in FIG. 95 (A) to FIG. 95 (D), the reach was not formed, whereas in the case where the reach was formed, the reach was formed. Following FIG. 95 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (number) (here, the number "1" temporarily stops), and the middle decorative symbol 8C fluctuates. When the display and reach are formed, as shown in FIG. 95 (G), at this point, the selection unit SEL is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the player presses the effect button 63. When the operation (pressing operation) is performed, the B mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL can be moved downward, and the effect mode can be selected. After the start of the change of the decorative symbol, when the game ball enters the first starting port 20, four reserved images 9A are placed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as the four first special figure reservations. The images are arranged and displayed linearly along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

When the reach is formed and the reach effect progresses, as shown in FIG. 95 (H), a car image GYK imitating a car as a special image forms a group from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the effect of traveling all at once is developed (so-called "group notice" is performed), the display of the special image is prioritized and the selection unit SEL is displayed from the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 after disappearing (disappears), the selection unit SEL is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the effect mode cannot be selected. It has become. Even if the group notice is given, the four reserved images 9A and the reserved digested images 9C do not disappear (disappear) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

After that, the reach effect progresses, the left decorative symbol 8L becomes the number "1", the middle decorative symbol 8C becomes the number "0", and the right decorative symbol 8R becomes the number "1". .. Even in this state, the selection unit SEL is in a state of disappearing (disappearing) from the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63. The selection unit SEL is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the effect mode cannot be selected.

Since the group notice was given, the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 during the period until the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, and the detachment is confirmed. However, the effect mode cannot be selected, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed until the next decorative symbol starts to change. Even during the period (hereinafter referred to as "interval"), even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the effect mode cannot be selected. As a result, in the two periods, the already selected effect mode is continued, and the theme image PM imitating the "cloud" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In other words, when the group notice is given, the already selected production mode is continued and the theme image PM imitating the "cloud" is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 7 unless the next decorative symbol starts to change. It will be displayed large in 7a. Even if the demo screen (standby screen) for waiting for customers is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the effect mode already selected is selected after the demo screen for waiting for customers (standby screen) ends. Is continued, and the theme image PM imitating the "cloud" is displayed in large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

After that, when the next decorative symbol starts to fluctuate, as shown in FIG. 95 (J), it is linearly aligned with the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the reserved image 9A arranged on the rightmost side of the four reserved images 9A moved to the right as the reserved digested image 9C, the remaining three reserved images 9A move to the right one by one. It is displayed with a shift. A message MG of "mode change with the effect button" telling that the effect mode can be changed by operating (pressing operation) the effect button 63 with the start of the change of the decorative pattern is displayed only for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). It is arranged and displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the effect mode can be selected.

[Direction mode selection display prevention effect B]
Next, the selection display blocking effect B of the effect mode will be described with reference to FIG. 96. FIG. 96 is a diagram for explaining the selection display blocking effect B of the effect mode. The selection display blocking effect B of the effect mode is performed during a specific period from the start of change of the decorative symbol to the stop of change. In the effect mode selection display blocking effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 96 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The variable display of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of 7a. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the stopped-displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image (here, the image of the "cloud") arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation. Immediately before stopping, the decorative symbol decelerates and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again and is displayed as a stop.

A message MG of "mode change with the effect button" telling that the effect mode can be changed by operating (pressing operation) the effect button 63 with the start of the change of the decorative pattern is displayed only for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). It is arranged and displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

The pending digested image 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the special symbol hold, is arranged and displayed in the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. To the left of the hold digestion image 9C, here, for example, three hold images 9A are displayed linearly along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as three first special figure holds. It is arranged and displayed on the lower side of the screen 7a. Further, the reserved image 9A and the reserved digested image 9C each have a circular shape, and the size of the reserved digested image 9C is larger than the size of the reserved image 9A. The size of the reserved digested image 9C and the size of the reserved image 9A may be the same.

On the right side of the hold digestion image 9C, a selection unit SEL capable of selecting the effect mode is arranged and displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the selection unit SEL, the effect mode composed of A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel is rotated, and each time the effect button 63 is operated (pressed operation), the reel is rotated. By doing so, the effect mode that has reached a specific area is displayed larger than other effect modes. The effect mode located in this specific area becomes the effect mode in which the effect mode is selected, and the theme image PM of the selected effect mode is largely displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Here, since the effect mode selected last time was the B mode, which will be described later, the theme image PM of this B mode (here, a model of a “cloud”) is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. To.

Here, the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode that constitute the effect mode will be briefly described.

In the A mode, the production with the theme of "sun" is advanced, and the theme image PM imitating "sun" is displayed in large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 while the A mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the A mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL moves downward to form the A mode. The D mode arranged below the A mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the bottom to the top, and the B mode arranged above the A mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the top toward a specific area. Is displayed.

In the B mode, the production with the theme of "clouds" is advanced, and the theme image PM imitating the "clouds" is largely displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 in the state where the B mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the B mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL moves downward to the B mode. The A mode arranged below the B mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the bottom to the top, and the C mode arranged above the B mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the top toward a specific area. Is displayed.

In the C mode, the production with the theme of "rain" is advanced, and the theme image PM imitating "rain" is largely displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 while the C mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the C mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL moves downward to form the C mode. The B mode arranged below the C mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the bottom to the top, and the D mode arranged above the C mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the top toward a specific area. Is displayed.

In the D mode, the production with the theme of "snow" is advanced, and the theme image PM imitating "snow" is displayed in large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 while the D mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the D mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL moves downward to form the D mode. The C mode arranged below the is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the bottom to the top, and the A mode arranged above the D mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the top toward a specific area. It is displayed, and the A mode becomes a display mode in which the A mode is located in the specific area again.

When the decorative symbol in FIG. 96 (A) starts to fluctuate, there is a case where the effect suggesting that the hold information corresponding to the hold image 9A may include a big hit (so-called “look-ahead effect”) is not performed. A look-ahead effect for the reserved image 9A may be performed. When the look-ahead effect is not performed, as shown in FIG. 96 (B) following FIG. 96 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed as a symbol (number) after the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol. (Here, it is temporarily stopped by the number "1"), and the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are changing. In this state, when the game ball enters the first starting port 20, four reserved images 9A are linearly imaged along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as the four first special figure reservations. It is arranged and displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

After that, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the B mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL moves downward, so that the A mode arranged below the B mode moves from the bottom to the top. It is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates, and the C mode arranged above the B mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from above toward a specific region. In the C mode, as shown in FIG. 96 (C), the theme image PM imitating "rain" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, after the start of the change of the decorative symbol, the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped by the symbol (number) following the left decorative symbol 8L (here, the temporary stop is displayed by the number "3"), and the middle decorative symbol 8C changes. It is inside. In this state, even if the game ball enters the first starting port 20, the first special figure hold does not increase because the upper limit of the four first special figure holds has already been reached, and the five hold images 9A are displayed. The image display device 7 is arranged in a straight line on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 along the lower side of the display screen 7a and is not displayed.

After that, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the C mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL moves downward, so that the B mode arranged below the C mode moves from the bottom to the top. It is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates, and the D mode arranged above the C mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from above toward a specific region. In the D mode, as shown in FIG. 96 (D), the theme image PM imitating "snow" is largely displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, after the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol, the left decorative symbol 8L, the right decorative symbol 8R, and then the middle decorative symbol 8C are temporarily stopped and displayed as a symbol (number) (here, the number "5" temporarily stops), and then. , The left decorative symbol 8L becomes the number "1", the middle decorative symbol 8C becomes the number "5", and the right decorative symbol 8R becomes the number "3", and the stop display is performed, and the deviation is confirmed.

When the left decorative symbol 8L becomes the number "1", the middle decorative symbol 8C becomes the number "5", and the right decorative symbol 8R becomes the number "3" and is stopped and displayed, it continues until the next decorative symbol starts to change. Even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 during the period (hereinafter referred to as “interval”), the D mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL cannot be moved downward, and the effect is produced. The mode cannot be selected. As a result, in the interval, the already selected effect mode is continued, and the theme image PM imitating "snow" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In other words, unless the next decorative symbol change starts, the already selected effect mode is continued, and the theme image PM imitating "snow" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It becomes. Even if the demo screen (standby screen) for waiting for customers is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the effect mode already selected is selected after the demo screen for waiting for customers (standby screen) ends. Is continued, and the theme image PM imitating "snow" is displayed in large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

After that, when the next decorative symbol starts to fluctuate, as shown in FIG. 96 (E), it is linearly aligned with the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the reserved image 9A arranged on the rightmost side of the four reserved images 9A moved to the right as the reserved digested image 9C, the remaining three reserved images 9A move to the right one by one. It is displayed with a shift. A message MG of "mode change with the effect button" telling that the effect mode can be changed by operating (pressing operation) the effect button 63 with the start of the change of the decorative pattern is displayed only for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). It is arranged and displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the effect mode can be selected.

In the series of effects from the start of fluctuation of the decorative pattern in FIG. 96 (A) to FIG. 96 (D), the effect suggesting that the hold information corresponding to the hold image 9A may include a jackpot (so-called so-called). “Look-ahead effect”) was not performed, but when the look-ahead effect for the reserved image 9A is performed, as shown in FIG. 96 (G) following FIG. 96 (A). After the start of the change of the decorative symbol, the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed as a symbol (number) (here, the number "1" temporarily stops), and the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are changing. It has become. In this state, when the game ball enters the first starting port 20, four reserved images 9A are linearly imaged along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as the four first special figure reservations. It is arranged and displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the display device 7. Assuming that the hold image 9A closest to the hold digest image 9C is the first hold image 9A, the second hold image 9A is placed to the left of the first hold image 9A and the second hold image 9A. The third reserved image 9A is arranged to the left of the reserved image 9A, and the reserved image 9A added by the game ball entering the first starting port 20 this time to the left of the third reserved image 9A. Is arranged as the fourth reserved image 9A.

When an effect (look-ahead effect) suggesting that the hold information corresponding to the fourth hold image 9A may include a jackpot is performed, the display mode of the fourth hold image 9A is changed as a special image. Is displayed differently from the display mode of the reserved image 9A (first reserved image 9A, second reserved image 9A, third reserved image 9A). For example, in the look-ahead effect, which is a special image, the display mode of the reserved image 9A is, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)) based on the expectation of a big hit. Expectations for big hits are set high. Here, the display mode of the fourth reserved image 9A is such that it emits red light, and another reserved image 9A (first reserved image 9A, second reserved image 9A, third reserved image 9A). ) Is displayed in a white light emission mode (when the look-ahead effect is not performed, the degree of expectation of a big hit is the lowest).

In the look-ahead effect, which is a special image, the display mode of the reserved image 9A having a circular shape is, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)) based on the expectation of a big hit. ), Which is expected to be a big hit, but it may be a character instead of the reserved image 9A having a circular shape. In this case, in the mode in which the reserved image 9A is displayed as a character, the expected degree of jackpot is at least higher than the expected degree of jackpot set in the mode in which the reserved image 9A is displayed in red. It is set.

When the pre-reading effect, which is a special image, is performed, the display of the special image is prioritized, the selection unit SEL disappears (disappears) from the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the player presses the effect button 63. Even if the operation (pressing operation) is performed, the selection unit SEL is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the effect mode cannot be selected. Even if the look-ahead effect is performed, the four reserved images 9A and the reserved digested images 9C are not erased (disappeared) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

After that, as shown in FIG. 96 (H), after the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol, the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed as a symbol (number) following the left decorative symbol 8L (here, the number "3" is used. (Temporary stop), the middle decoration symbol 8C is changing. In this state, even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the selection unit SEL is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the effect mode cannot be selected.

After that, as shown in FIG. 96 (I), after the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol, the left decorative symbol 8L, the right decorative symbol 8R, and then the middle decorative symbol 8C are temporarily stopped and displayed as symbols (numbers) (here, the decorative symbol 8C). (Temporarily stopped at the number "5"), then the left decorative symbol 8L becomes the number "1", the middle decorative symbol 8C becomes the number "5", and the right decorative symbol 8R becomes the number "3", and the stop display is confirmed. Is displayed.

After that, when the next decorative symbol starts to fluctuate, as shown in FIG. 96 (J), the image display device 7 is linearly aligned with the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 along the lower side of the display screen 7a. When the reserved image 9A arranged on the rightmost side of the four reserved images 9A moved to the right as the reserved digested image 9C, the remaining three reserved images 9A move to the right one by one. It is displayed with a shift. Although the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate, since the look-ahead effect has already been performed, the selection unit SEL disappears (disappears) from the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 even in this state. Even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the selection unit SEL is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the effect mode cannot be selected.

In this way, if the look-ahead effect is performed during the change during the specific period from the start of the change of the decorative symbol to the stop of the change, the effect mode is selected during the change before the look-ahead effect is performed. However, when the look-ahead effect is performed, the effect mode cannot be selected during the fluctuation. Further, when the look-ahead effect is performed, the hold image 9A on which the look-ahead effect is performed moves to the right as the hold digestion image 9C, and the decorative symbol starts to fluctuate, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol are started to change. In the period from the stop display of 8R to the final display of the loss, the player can select the effect mode even in the specific period from the start of the change of the decorative symbol to the stop of the change. Even if you operate (press operation), you cannot select the effect mode. Further, the period from when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R in the reserved image 9A in which the look-ahead effect is performed is stopped and displayed until the next decorative symbol starts to change (hereinafter, "interval"). ”), Even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the effect mode cannot be selected. As a result, in such a series of periods, the already selected effect mode is continued, and the theme image PM imitating the "cloud" is displayed in large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In other words, when the look-ahead effect is performed, the hold image 9A on which the look-ahead effect is performed is digested as the hold digestion image 9C. The selected effect mode is continued, and the theme image PM imitating the "cloud" is displayed in large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

When the hold image 9A on which the look-ahead effect is performed is digested as the hold digest image 9C and becomes a big hit, the effect button 63 is operated as shown in FIG. 96 (A) after the big hit effect is completed. A message MG of "mode change with the effect button" indicating that the effect mode can be changed by pressing operation) is arranged on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). Is displayed, and the effect mode can be selected.

Further, even if the demo screen (standby screen) for waiting for customers is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the effect mode already selected is selected after the demo screen for waiting for customers (standby screen) ends. Is continued, and the theme image PM imitating the "cloud" is displayed in large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Direction mode selection display prevention effect C]
Next, the selection display blocking effect C of the effect mode will be described with reference to FIG. 97. FIG. 97 is a diagram for explaining the selection display blocking effect C of the effect mode. The effect mode selection display prevention effect C is an effect that is performed during a specific period during a jackpot game (big hit effect) in which a profit is given to the player, and is an effect that is not performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. (For example, it is not performed when there is a so-called "holding ream" in which there is a big hit in the holding ball before the jackpot production ends). The presence or absence of this pending ream is determined based on the jackpot pre-judgment result (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type pre-judgment result) and the fluctuation pattern pre-judgment result included in the pre-judgment command.

Here, a case will be described in which a player plays a right-handed game and becomes a big hit to generate a big hit game (big hit effect), and continues the right-handed game after the big hit game (big hit effect) is completed. If the hold ream is not produced, in other words, there is no jackpot in the hold ball before the jackpot effect is completed.

During the period from the beginning to the end of the jackpot production (big hit game), there is a game production period from the beginning of the jackpot production (big hit game) to the end of each round game, and this game production period. Next, a notification period for notifying the game state (for example, a state of returning to left-handed, a state of continuing right-handed) after the end of the jackpot effect (big hit game), and following this notification period, a jackpot effect (big hit game). A specific period in which the effect mode selection screen that allows the player to select the effect mode after the end of is displayed, and a catch phrase effect or game in which the catch phrase of the game machine manufacturer is displayed following this specific period. There is a predetermined period in which a slogan prevention effect is displayed, in which a warning for dependence on addiction is displayed.

In the specific period, in order to convey the mode transition to the selected effect mode after the first period (effect mode selection period) for selecting the effect mode and the first period (effect mode selection period) have elapsed. It is composed of a second period (effect mode confirmation notification period) and.

The catch phrase of the game machine maker is displayed. The catch phrase effect and the alert for dependence on the game (enthusiasm) are displayed. The end of the predetermined period for the addiction prevention effect and the start to end of the jackpot effect (big hit game). Is consistent with the end of the period up to.

In the effect mode selection display blocking effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 97 (A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed with each round game in the jackpot effect (big hit game), and all of them are finished. By doing so, the end of the game production period is reached, and accordingly, at the beginning of the notification period, the message MG "continue right-handed" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in order to continue right-handed. .. Further, the hold image 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which was displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable display of the decorative symbol. , Instead of the hold image 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 The second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is arranged and displayed as a numerical value HMG on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Here, for example, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is zero, the number "0" is on the left side, and the second based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. It is arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a state where there are four special figure reservations and the number "4" is separated from each other on the right side.

The message MG of "continue right-handed stroke" in FIG. 97 (A) is displayed in large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and then the end of the notification period (for example, 3 seconds) is reached. At the beginning, there are cases where the effect mode selection screen that allows the player to select the effect mode after the end of the jackpot effect (big hit game) is displayed, and cases where the effect mode selection screen is not displayed. ..

When the effect mode selection screen is displayed, as shown in FIG. 97 (B), the effect button 63 is pressed in order to prompt the player to select the effect mode by operating (pressing the effect) the effect button 63. The imitated first effect button image BTN is arranged in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and is displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode. The English word "PUSH" is engraved on the portion of the first effect button image corresponding to the pressing operation surface of the effect button 63. As the "predetermined light emitting mode", for example, it is blinking in white. Further, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21 are image display devices 7 as numerical values HMG. Is continuously displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a.

An effect mode composed of A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel is rotated, and each time the effect button 63 is operated (pressed operation), the reel is rotated to specify a specific area. The selection unit SEL in which the effect mode reached to is displayed larger than that of the other effect modes is displayed in the rectangular area from the center to the upper left corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The effect mode located in this specific area is selected as the effect mode. When the effect mode selection screen is displayed for the first time, the A mode is arranged in a specific area as the default, but when the effect mode selection screen is displayed next time, the default ( That is, the A mode) may always be arranged in the specific area, or the selected effect mode may be arranged in the specific area when the effect mode selection screen is displayed last time.

To the right of the selection unit SEL, a demo area DS that explains the contents of the currently selected production mode with various images and various characters is displayed in a rectangular area from the center to the upper right corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Will be done. The demo area DS is formed as a rectangular area, and the character "DEMO" indicating the demo screen of the effect mode is displayed on the upper left side thereof.

In A mode, the production with the theme of "sun" is advanced, and the theme image PM imitating "sun" is displayed as a moving image on the left side of the demo area DS, which is the same image as the first production button image BTN. (An image in which characteristic information such as button shape, size, and light emission mode are all the same) or a similar image (an image partially or all similar to the characteristic information), the second effect button image BTN2 is in the demo area DS. It is placed and displayed on the lower right side. An explanatory text MME regarding the progress of the production in the A mode is displayed on the upper right side of the demo area DS.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 while the A mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, it is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL as shown in FIG. 97 (C). When the A mode moves downward, the D mode, which is arranged below the A mode, is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the bottom to the top, and the B mode, which is arranged above the A mode, is specified from above. It is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates toward the region. Even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the first effect button image BTN is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Further, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21 are image display devices 7 as numerical values HMG. Is continuously displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a.

In B mode, the production with the theme of "clouds" is progressed, and the theme image PM imitating "clouds" is displayed as a video in the center of the demo area DS, and the explanation MME about the progress of the production in B mode. Is displayed on the upper right side of the demo area DS.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 in the state where the B mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the B mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL moves downward to the B mode. The A mode arranged below the B mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the bottom to the top, and the C mode arranged above the B mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the top toward a specific area. Is displayed. Even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the first effect button image BTN is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Further, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21 are image display devices 7 as numerical values HMG. Is continuously displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a.

In C mode, the production with the theme of "rain" is progressed, and the theme image PM imitating "rain" is displayed as a video in the center of the demo area DS, and the explanation MME about the progress of the production in C mode. Is displayed on the upper right side of the demo area DS.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 while the C mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the C mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL moves downward to form the C mode. The B mode arranged below the C mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the bottom to the top, and the D mode arranged above the C mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the top toward a specific area. Is displayed. Even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the first effect button image BTN is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Further, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21 are image display devices 7 as numerical values HMG. Is continuously displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a.

In D mode, the production with the theme of "snow" is progressed, and the theme image PM imitating "snow" is displayed as a video in the center of the demo area DS, and the explanation MME about the progress of the production in D mode. Is displayed on the upper right side of the demo area DS.

The first period (effect mode selection period) for selecting the effect mode elapses in a state where the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 and the B mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL. At the beginning of the second period (effect mode confirmation notification period) for transmitting the mode transition to the selected effect mode, as shown in FIG. 97 (D), the four corners of the demo area DS, which is a rectangular area, are images. It is displayed in a mode in which it expands toward the four corners of the display screen 7a of the display device 7 (enlarged mode), and on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the production proceeds with the theme of "cloud" in B mode. The theme image PM imitating a "cloud" is displayed in a large size, and a message MG telling that the selected production mode is B mode is displayed on the right side of the theme image PM from the center to the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed larger toward the center. It should be noted that the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21 are image display devices 7 as numerical values HMG. Is continuously displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a.

After that, the second period (effect mode confirmation notification period) elapses, and a catch phrase effect in which the catch phrase of the game machine maker is displayed and a slogan prevention effect in which a warning for dependence on the game (enthusiasm) is displayed are performed. The beginning of the period, and when this period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses and the end of the jackpot production (big hit game), a theme image that imitates the "cloud" that progresses the production with the theme of "cloud" in B mode. The effect in which the PM is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is advanced.

At the end of the notification period in which the message MG of "continue right-handed" in FIG. 97 (A) is displayed, and accordingly, at the beginning of the specific period, a series from FIG. 97 (B) to FIG. 97 (D). In the effect of, the effect mode selection screen is displayed, and the effect after the end of the jackpot effect (big hit game) is advanced in the selected effect mode. On the other hand, the number "0" is zero for the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. , The second special figure based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is four and the number is "4", so the four second based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 When the hold information corresponding to the special figure hold includes a big hit, the display of the special image is prioritized and the effect mode selection screen is not displayed in order to perform the effect of the hold series which is a special image. Therefore, when the effect mode selection screen is not displayed, light is emitted from the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in all directions as shown in FIG. 97 (G) following FIG. 97 (A). The emitted flash image FH is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It should be noted that the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21 are image display devices 7 as numerical values HMG. Is continuously displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a.

After that, the hold series image HRC having a three-dimensional V-shape suggesting the existence of the hold series is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as shown in FIG. 97 (H). Hold series image having a V shape While the first character HRC1 having a three-dimensional circular shape is arranged on the lower side of the first surface of the HRC, the hold series image having a V shape A second character HRC2 having a three-dimensional rectangular shape is arranged on the upper side of the second surface of the HRC (the surface opposite to the first surface). The reserved continuous image HRC rotates around the vertical line passing through the center of the lower side of the reserved continuous image HRC, and the first surface of the reserved continuous image HRC and the second surface of the reserved continuous image HRC appear repeatedly. It becomes a display mode.

When an effect (look-ahead effect) suggesting that the hold information corresponding to the hold image 9A (for example, FIGS. 1 and 96 (G) to 96 (J)) may contain a jackpot is performed, for example, special The display mode of the fourth hold image 9A as an image is different from the display mode of the other hold image 9A (first hold image 9A, second hold image 9A, third hold image 9A). The first reserved image 9A, the second reserved image 9A, and the third reserved image 9A have a circular shape, whereas the fourth reserved image 9A is displayed. The display mode of the image 9A may be the first character HRC1 or the second character HRC2 instead of the one having a circular shape. That is, the first character HRC1 and the second character HRC2 arranged together with the reserved continuous image HRC become the same characters as the characters displayed as the display mode of the reserved image 9A when the look-ahead effect is performed. There is.

The character displayed as the display mode of the reserved image 9A is smaller than the size of the first character HRC1 and the second character HRC2 arranged together with the reserved continuous image HRC. Further, when the character displayed as the display mode of the reserved image 9A is the same character as the first character HRC1 and the second character HRC2 arranged together with the reserved continuous image HRC, but the orientation and posture of the characters are different. There is.

When the first surface of the reserved continuous image HRC having the first character HRC1 is displayed as a stop facing forward (player side), it cannot be notified to the hit type, but the second start port. It is possible to convey that the hold information corresponding to the four second special figure holds based on the entry of the game ball into 21 contains a jackpot, whereas the hold series image having the second character HRC2. When the second surface of the HRC is displayed as a stop facing forward (player side), the hold information corresponding to the four second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21. Can tell that 16 rounds (maximum rounds (MAX rounds)) of jackpots are included in a predetermined number or more (for example, two).

After that, as shown in FIG. 97 (I), the first surface of the reserved continuous image HRC having the first character HRC1 is stopped and displayed toward the front (player side), and the game to the second starting port 21 is displayed. Tell that the jackpot is included in the hold information corresponding to the four second special figure hold based on the ball's entry. It should be noted that the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21 are image display devices 7 as numerical values HMG. Is continuously displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a.

After that, the start of the period for performing the catch phrase effect in which the catch phrase of the game machine maker is displayed and the addiction prevention effect in which the alert for dependence on the game (enthusiasm) is displayed, and this period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed. By doing so, it will be the end of the jackpot production (big hit game). At the end of the jackpot production (big hit game), the theme image PM that imitates the production mode before the jackpot production (big hit game) occurs, for example, the "sun" in A mode, is the image. An effect that is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the display device 7 will be advanced.

In addition, when the production of the pending ream is performed, and then the jackpot production (big hit game) ends and the right-handed game is started, when the production mode selection screen is displayed in the previous jackpot production (big hit game). When the effect mode selected in is maintained, the jackpot game (big hit effect) occurs again, and the effect mode selection screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 97 (B), the maintained effect mode is set. Although it will be arranged in a specific area, the effect mode can be changed by operating (pressing) the effect button 63.

In the present embodiment, the selection display blocking effect C of the effect mode is performed in the specific period, but the effect of the hold ream is also performed in the same period as this specific period. That is, in the first period (effect mode selection period), the effect mode selection display prevention effect C allows the player to select the effect mode, whereas the hold-ream effect produces a flash image. FH and hold continuous image HRC will be used for the production. Then, in the second period (effect mode final notification period), the effect mode selection display blocking effect C performs an effect of informing the transition of the selected effect mode, whereas the hold-ream effect has a big hit, etc. Perform a production that conveys. The specific period in which the selection display blocking effect C of the effect mode is performed and the specific period in which the effect of the hold ream is performed are the same period. As a result, the time required for a series of productions from FIG. 97 (B) to FIG. 97 (D) following FIG. 97 (A) and FIGS. 97 (G) to 97 (I) following FIG. 97 (A). ) Matches the time required for the series of effects, so the catch phrase of the game machine maker is displayed and the alert for dependence on the game (enthusiasm) is displayed. The beginning of the period is also the same, and there is no difference in the end of the jackpot production (big hit game) when this predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the selection display prevention effect of the effect mode is shown below.
[Effect 1]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment includes, for example, an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying various images, as shown in FIG. 95 (H) of the effect mode selection display blocking effect A, and is in the A mode. , B mode, C mode, and D mode (a plurality of effect modes), the first effect of displaying the selection unit SEL (selected image) capable of selecting one effect mode on the image display device 7 (display means), and At least one of the second effect of displaying a car image GYK (special image) imitating a car on the image display device 7 (display means) can be executed, and when the reach is formed and the reach effect progresses, The arrival of the next period (predetermined) in which a car image GYK (special image) imitating a car runs all at once from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 so as to form a group (group notice). Based on the above condition), the display of the selection unit SEL (selected image) on the image display device 7 by the first effect is blocked, and the vehicle image imitating the car on the image display device 7 by the second effect. The display of GYK (special image) can be executed. According to this configuration, the selection unit SEL (selected image) capable of selecting one of the A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode (plurality of effect modes) is used as the image display device 7 (display means). Even if it is displayed, a production (group notice) in which a car image GYK (special image) imitating a car runs all at once from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is developed. When this effect (group notice) is developed based on the arrival of the next period (establishment of a predetermined condition), the display of the selection unit SEL (selected image) on the image display device 7 (display means) is blocked. As a result, the selection unit SEL (selected image) is erased (disappeared) from the image display device 7 (display means), so that the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
Selection of effect mode of FIGS. 96 (H) to 96 (J) In the display blocking effect B, one of A mode, B mode, C mode and D mode (plurality of effect modes) can be selected. Even if the SEL (selected image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the pre-reading effect is performed based on the arrival of the next period (the establishment of a predetermined condition) in which the pre-reading effect, which is a special image, is performed. Then, the selection unit SEL (selected image) is erased (disappeared) from the image display device 7 (display means) by blocking the display of the selection unit SEL (selected image) on the image display device 7 (display means). Therefore, it is the same.
Selection of effect mode of FIGS. 97 (G) to 97 (I) In the display blocking effect C, one of A mode, B mode, C mode and D mode (plurality of effect modes) can be selected. Even if the SEL (selected image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), based on the arrival of the next period (the establishment of a predetermined condition) in which the effect of the hold ream, which is a special image, is performed, the hold ream When the effect is performed, the selection unit SEL (selected image) is blocked from being displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), so that the selection unit SEL (selected image) is erased from the image display device 7 (display means) ( The same is true because it will disappear).

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 95 (A) to 95 (J) of the effect mode selection display blocking effect A, the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode (a plurality of modes). The first effect of displaying the selection unit SEL (selected image) capable of selecting one of the effect modes) on the image display device 7 (display means) is to specify the decorative symbol from the start of change to the stop of change. The second effect, which can be executed during a period and displays a car image GYK (special image) imitating a car on the image display device 7 (display means), is a specific period from the start of fluctuation of the decorative pattern to the stop of fluctuation. Can be performed at. According to this configuration, a selection unit capable of selecting one of the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode (a plurality of effect modes) in a specific period from the start of the change of the decorative symbol to the stop of the change. The first effect of displaying the SEL (selected image) on the image display device 7 (display means) and the second effect of displaying the car image GYK (special image) imitating a car on the image display device 7 (display means). And, because it is possible to execute, it is possible to visually entertain the player and improve the interest.
In the effect mode selection display prevention effect B of FIGS. 96 (A) to 96 (J), A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode (plurality) are used in a specific period from the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol to the stop of fluctuation. The first effect of displaying the selection unit SEL (selected image) capable of selecting one of the effect modes) on the image display device 7 (display means) and the look-ahead effect which is a special image are displayed on the image display device 7. This is the same because the second effect displayed on (display means) can be executed.
In the effect mode selection display prevention effect C of FIGS. 97 (A) to 97 (I), the A mode, the B mode, and the C mode are used in a specific period during the jackpot game (big hit effect) in which the player is given a profit. The first effect of displaying the selection unit SEL (selected image) capable of selecting one of the D modes (plurality of effect modes) on the image display device 7 (display means), and the hold sequence which is a special image. This is the same because the second effect of displaying the effect of the above on the image display device 7 (display means) can be executed.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 95 (A) to 95 (J) of the effect mode selection display blocking effect A, the effect button 63, the sword member 64, which can be operated by the player, The sword button 65 and the select button 68 (plurality of operating means) are provided, and the effect button 63 (specific operating means) of the effect button 63, the sword member 64, the sword button 65, and the select button 68 (plurality of operation means) is operated. Only when this is done, one of the A mode, B mode, C mode and D mode (plurality of effect modes) can be selected. According to this configuration, among the effect button 63, the sword member 64, the sword button 65, and the select button 68 (plural operation means), the ball hitting plate (upper plate) 61 is arranged around the front frame (front frame portion) 53. Of the effect button 63 and the select button 68 arranged in, the effect button 63 is arranged at the position closest to the player side and is formed larger than the select button 68, so that the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate. It is most preferable as an operation means for selecting one of the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode (a plurality of effect modes) within the limited period from the period to the stop of the fluctuation. The same applies to the selective display blocking effect B of the effect mode of FIGS. 96 (A) to 96 (J) and the selective display blocking effect C of the effect mode of FIGS. 97 (A) to 97 (I).

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 95 (A) to 95 (J) of the effect mode selection display blocking effect A, when the reach is formed and the reach effect progresses, the vehicle is imitated. The arrival of the next period (predetermined conditions) in which the effect (group notice) of the vehicle image GYK (special image) running all at once from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 so as to form a group is developed. When the car image GYK (special image) imitating a car is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) based on the establishment), the car image GYK (special image) imitating a car is displayed on the image display device 7 (display). Selection unit SEL (selected image) capable of selecting one of the A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode (plurality of effect modes) before the second effect displayed on the means) is executed. The effect mode (here, B mode) already selected in the first effect of displaying the image on the image display device 7 (display means) is maintained. According to this configuration, when the second effect of displaying the car image GYK (special image) imitating a car on the image display device 7 (display means) is executed and finished, A mode, B mode, C mode and D Since the effect mode (here, B mode) already selected before the second effect is executed among the modes (plurality effect modes) is maintained, the player is visually entertained. It is possible to improve the interest.
In the effect mode selection display prevention effect B of FIGS. 96 (A) to 96 (J), when the second effect of displaying the look-ahead effect, which is a special image, on the image display device 7 (display means) is executed and ended. , A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode (plurality of effect modes), because the effect mode already selected before the second effect is executed is maintained. ..
In the effect mode selection display prevention effect C of FIGS. 97 (A) to 97 (I), a second effect of displaying the effect of the hold sequence, which is a special image, on the image display device 7 (display means) is executed. When finished, the effect mode already selected before the second effect is executed among the A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode (plurality of effect modes) is maintained. Is.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 95 (A) to 95 (E) of the effect mode selection display blocking effect A, A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode (plurality of modes). The first effect of displaying the selection unit SEL (selected image) capable of selecting one of the effect modes) on the image display device 7 (display means) is the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode (the effect mode). Each name of the plurality of effect modes) is arranged in a reel shape and displayed in rotation, and one selected effect mode is arranged in the foreground side. According to this configuration, since the names of A mode, B mode, C mode and D mode (plurality of effect modes) are arranged in a reel shape, the types of selection modes to be rotated and displayed and one effect mode can be used. It is easy to grasp the effect mode that is arranged after that, and since one effect mode that is selected is the display mode that is arranged on the front side, it is easy to select the effect mode and the player can visually see the player. It can be entertained and can be enjoyed. The same applies to the selective display blocking effect B of the effect modes of FIGS. 96 (A) to 96 (E) and the selective display blocking effect C of the effect modes of FIGS. 97 (B) to 97 (C).

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 97 (G) to 97 (I) of the effect mode selection display blocking effect C, the effect of the hold sequence, which is a special image, is performed (predetermined). The condition) includes a condition suggesting the degree of expectation of the occurrence of a gaming state that gives a profit to the player. According to this configuration, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of the occurrence of a gaming state that gives a profit to the player that there is a jackpot in the reserved ball before the jackpot production is completed by performing the hold ream. it can.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the selection display prevention effect of the effect mode.
[Modification 1]
In the effect mode selection display prevention effect A of FIG. 95 (H), vehicle images GYK (special images) imitating a car are grouped together from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When this effect (group notice) is developed based on the arrival of the next period (establishment of predetermined conditions) in which the running effect (group notice) is developed, the image display device 7 (selection image) of the selection unit SEL (selection image) The selection unit SEL (selected image) was erased (disappeared) from the image display device 7 (display means) by blocking the display on the display means). However, even if the next period in which the production (group notice) is developed arrives (even if a predetermined condition is satisfied), the production (group notice) is not developed and the image display of the selection unit SEL (selected image) is performed. The display on the device 7 (display means) may be continued. In this case, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the sub-control board 90 develops the effect (group notice), and if it is won, the effect (group notice) is developed, whereas if it is lost, the effect (group notice) is performed. Group notice) will not be deployed. The image control microcomputer 101 may perform the lottery as to whether or not to develop the effect (group notice) instead of the sub control board 90.
In the selection display blocking effect B of the effect mode shown in FIGS. 96 (G) to 96 (J), this look-ahead effect is performed based on the arrival of the next period (satisfaction of a predetermined condition) in which the look-ahead effect, which is a special image, is performed. Then, the selection unit SEL (selected image) is erased (disappeared) from the image display device 7 (display means) by blocking the display of the selection unit SEL (selected image) on the image display device 7 (display means). Was there. However, even if the next period in which the look-ahead effect is performed arrives (even if a predetermined condition is satisfied), the look-ahead effect is not performed and the selection unit SEL (selected image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). It may be continued. In this case, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the sub-control board 90 performs the look-ahead effect, and if the sub-control board 90 is won, the look-ahead effect is performed, whereas if the sub-control board 90 is lost, the look-ahead effect is not performed. The image control microcomputer 101 may perform the lottery for whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect instead of the sub-control board 90.
In the selection display blocking effect C of the effect mode shown in FIGS. 97 (G) to 97 (I), the hold sequence is based on the arrival of the next period (establishment of a predetermined condition) in which the effect of the hold sequence, which is a special image, is performed. When the effect of is performed, the selection unit SEL (selected image) is blocked from being displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), so that the selection unit SEL (selected image) is erased from the image display device 7 (display means). It was (disappeared). However, even if the next period in which the effect of the hold sequence is performed arrives (even if a predetermined condition is satisfied), the effect of the hold sequence is not performed, and the image display device 7 (display means) of the selection unit SEL (selected image) The display to may continue. In this case, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the sub-control board 90 produces the hold-ream effect. .. It should be noted that the image control microcomputer 101 may perform the lottery as to whether or not to perform the effect of the hold sequence instead of the sub control board 90.

[Modification 2]
In the effect mode selection display prevention effect A of FIG. 95 (H), the car image GYK imitating a car as a special image forms a group from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (display means). When the effect of running all at once is developed (so-called "group notice" is performed), the display of the special image is prioritized and the selection unit SEL disappears from the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It was (disappeared). However, instead of the car image GYK that imitates a car as a special image, a cut-in notice (additional) such as a full-body image of the character, a partially enlarged image of the character, a composite image of the character or item, and a group image of multiple characters It may be an image inserted as an effect). Further, when the eye-catching image is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) along with the progress of the reach effect, the eye-catching image is set as a special image, so that the display of the eye-catching image, which is a special image, is prioritized. The selection unit SEL may be erased (disappeared) from the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Further, when the character of the manufacturer that produces the game machine 1 appears on the image display device 7 (display means), the character of this manufacturer is set as a special image, the display of the character of the manufacturer is prioritized, and the selection unit SEL is the image display device. It may be erased (disappeared) from the lower right side of the display screen 7a of 7.

[Modification 3]
In the effect mode selection display prevention effect B of FIGS. 96 (G) to 96 (J), if the look-ahead effect is performed during the change during the specific period from the start of the change of the decorative symbol to the stop of the change, the look-ahead effect is performed. Before it is performed, the effect mode can be selected during the fluctuation, whereas when the look-ahead effect is performed, the effect mode cannot be selected during the change, and further, the look-ahead effect cannot be selected. Even during the period (interval) from when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R in the reserved image 9A where the effect was performed are stopped and displayed until the next decorative symbol starts to change, the player Even if the effect button 63 is operated (pressed), the effect mode cannot be selected. However, the reserved image 9A on which the look-ahead effect was performed moves to the right as the reserved digested image 9C, and the decorative symbol starts to fluctuate, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, and the image is missing. The effect mode may not be selected only during the period until the final display is displayed, and even if the look-ahead effect is performed during the change during the specific period from the start of the change of the decorative symbol to the stop of the change. The effect mode may be selected during the period until the hold image 9A on which the reading effect is performed moves to the right side as the hold digestion image 9C and the decorative symbol starts to fluctuate.

[Modification example 4]
In the selected display blocking effect A of the effect mode of FIG. 95 and the selected display blocking effect B of the effect mode of FIG. 96, the already selected effect mode is continued at the interval, so that the next decorative symbol is started to change. Unless, it was not possible to select the production mode. However, the effect mode may be selected only at the interval in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed and then the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the predetermined effect among the plurality of types of reach effects. As a predetermined effect, there is a high expectation that a jackpot game (big hit effect) that is advantageous to the player will occur, and after the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the so-called normal reach, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. It is not possible to select the effect mode at the interval.

[Modification 5]
In the effect mode selection display prevention effect C of FIGS. 97 (G) to 97 (I), the first surface of the hold continuous image HRC having the first character HRC1 faces forward (player side) and is stopped and displayed. If this is the case, the jackpot is included in the hold information corresponding to the four second special figure holds based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21, although it is not possible to tell the type of hit. I was able to tell that there was, but I could not tell up to the number of jackpots in the hold information corresponding to the four second special figure hold. Therefore, the number of jackpots may be transmitted to the hold information corresponding to the four second special figure hold. For example, when there are three jackpots in the hold information corresponding to the four second special figure holds, the first surface of the hold series image HRC having the first character HRC1 facing forward (player side). "+3" may be displayed on the right side of the image, or three reserved continuous image HRCs having the first character HRC1 may be displayed horizontally, three vertically, or three diagonally. ..

[Modification 6]
In the effect mode selection display prevention effect C of FIG. 97, the theme image PM imitating the theme of each mode was displayed as a moving image on the left side of the demo area DS. Such a video is a video explaining the progress of the production of each mode, characters, backgrounds, scenes, etc., and may be a video by 3D CG, a video by animation, or a movie. It may be one scene. A still image may be used instead of the moving image.

[Modification 7]
In the effect mode selection display prevention effect C of FIG. 97, an image display of a selection unit SEL (selected image) capable of selecting one of the effect modes of A mode, B mode, C mode and D mode (plurality of effect modes). The first effect displayed on the device 7 (display means) was executed during the jackpot effect (effect of the winning game). However, in addition to the big hit effect, during the effect in the small hit game (or during the effect in the small hit game instead of the big hit effect), the selection unit SEL (selected image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). It may be. In this case, the second effect of displaying the effect of the hold ream, which is a special image, on the image display device 7 (display means) is also small during the effect in the small hit game (or instead of the large hit effect) in addition to the big hit effect. It may be executed during the production in the winning game).

[Modification 8]
The selected display blocking effect A of the effect mode of FIG. 95, the selected display blocking effect B of the effect mode of FIG. 96, and the selected display blocking effect C of the effect mode of FIG. However, other effects may be added.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect C2-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying various images.
A first effect of displaying a selected image capable of selecting one of the plurality of effect modes on the display means, and a first effect.
At least one of the second effect of displaying the special image on the display means can be executed.
Based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, it is possible to prevent the display of the selected image on the display means by the first effect and display the special image on the display means by the second effect.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C2-1.
The first effect and the second effect can be performed in a specific period.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C2-1 or aspect C2-2.
Equipped with multiple operating means that can be operated by the player
One of the plurality of effect modes can be selected only when a specific operation means is operated among the plurality of operation means.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-1 to C2-3.
When the special image is displayed on the display means based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the effect mode already selected in the first effect is maintained before the second effect is executed. ,
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-1 to C2-4.
The first effect is a display mode in which the names of the plurality of effect modes are arranged in a reel shape and rotated and displayed, and one selected effect mode is arranged on the foremost side.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-1 to C2-5.
The predetermined condition includes a condition suggesting the degree of expectation of the occurrence of a gaming state that gives a profit to the player.
A game machine characterized by that.

The game ball image effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 98 to 100. This game ball image effect can be executed during the variable effect of the effect symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the game ball image effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed as the main display. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a of the device 7.

[Game ball image production A]
FIG. 98 is a diagram for explaining the game ball image production A.
First, as shown in FIG. 98 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. The reserved image 9B is displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a. The reserved image 9B is displayed according to the number of stored images of the second special figure reserved, and here, three reserved images 9B are displayed. The hold digestion image 9C corresponds to the effect symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a. In addition, it is assumed that it is a fluctuation during the time saving game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (C), the game ball collision effect is executed. The game ball collision effect is executed when the game ball enters the second starting port 21. Therefore, here, the number of reserved images 9B is increasing. Further, the game ball collision effect is an effect in which the game ball collides with the collision target. Here, the button image BG is the collision target.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (D), the color change effect is executed. The color change effect is an effect in which the color of the upper surface of the button image BG is changed. Here, it is assumed that the white upper surface is green.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (E), the game ball collision effect is executed. The game ball collision effect is executed when the game ball enters the second starting port 21. Here, it is an over prize. Further, the game ball collision effect is an effect in which the game ball collides with the collision target. Here, the button image BG is the collision target.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (F), the color change effect is executed. The color change effect is an effect in which the color of the upper surface of the button image BG is changed. Here, it is assumed that the upper surface of green is red.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (G), the pressing promotion effect is executed. In the pressing promotion effect, the button image BG whose upper surface color has changed due to the color change effect is displayed. In addition, the message image MG "press" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (H), the fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (big hit), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R stop at the same number to form so-called doublets. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped at "7".

[Game ball image production B]
FIG. 99 is a diagram for explaining the game ball image production B.
First, as shown in FIG. 99A, the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. The reserved image 9B is displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a. The reserved image 9B is displayed according to the number of stored images of the second special figure reserved, and here, three reserved images 9B are displayed. The hold digestion image 9C corresponds to the effect symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a. In addition, it is assumed that it is a fluctuation during the time saving game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99B, the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (C), the game ball collision effect is executed. The game ball collision effect is executed when the game ball enters the second starting port 21. Therefore, here, the number of reserved images 9B is increasing. Further, the game ball collision effect is an effect in which the game ball collides with the collision target. Here, the first movable accessory 14 (left movable accessory 14L) is the collision target.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (D), the color change effect is executed. The color change effect is an effect of changing the light emitting mode of the first movable accessory 14 (decorative member). Here, it is assumed that the light is lit in green.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (E), the game ball collision effect is executed. The game ball collision effect is executed when the game ball enters the second starting port 21. Here, it is an over prize. Further, the game ball collision effect is an effect in which the game ball collides with the collision target. Here, the first movable accessory (left movable accessory 14L) is the collision target.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (F), the color change effect is executed. The color change effect is an effect of changing the light emitting mode of the first movable accessory 14 (decorative member). Here, it is assumed that the light is lit in red.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (G), the fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (big hit), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R stop at the same number to form so-called doublets. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped at "7".

[Game ball image production C]
FIG. 100 is a diagram for explaining the game ball image effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 100 (A), the hold stock effect is executed. The hold stock effect is an effect that maximizes the number of stored second special figure reservations to "4" in the fluctuation. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed in the upper left portion of the display screen 7a, and the message image MG "Right-handed to save the hold" is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a. The reserved image 9B is displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a. The reserved image 9B is displayed according to the number of stored images of the second special figure reserved, and here, three reserved images 9B are displayed. The hold digestion image 9C corresponds to the effect symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (B), the game ball collision effect is executed. The game ball collision effect is executed when the game ball enters the second starting port 21. Therefore, here, the number of reserved images 9B is increasing. Further, the game ball collision effect is an effect in which the game ball collides with the collision target. The panel image PG is the collision target.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (C), the character change effect is executed. The character change effect is an effect of changing the characters of the panel image PG. Here, the characters of "CHANGE" are changed to "BIG CHANCE".

Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (D), the game ball collision effect is executed. The game ball collision effect is executed when the game ball enters the second starting port 21. Here, it is an over prize. Further, the game ball collision effect is an effect in which the game ball collides with the collision target. Here, the panel image PG is the collision target.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (E), the character change effect is executed. The character change effect is an effect of changing the characters of the panel image PG. Here, the characters "BIG CHANCE" have been changed to "Gekiatsu".

Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (F), the battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight.
Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (G), the battle victory effect is executed. The battle victory effect is an effect of notifying that the ally character CRA has won the enemy character CRB. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the background is a rainbow background RB displayed in seven colors of a rainbow. The rainbow background RB is the background for confirming the jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (H), the fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (big hit), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R stop at the same number to form so-called doublets. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped at "7".

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the game ball image production is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, an effect using the game ball image UG is executed (FIGS. 98 (C) (E), 99 (C) (E), 100 (B) (D)), and a big hit. It suggests the degree of expectation of transition to the game (FIGS. 98 (D) (F), 99 (D) (F), 100 (C) (E)). According to this configuration, the interest of the game can be improved by the production using the game ball image UG.

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the game ball image UG is made to collide with the collision target (FIGS. 98 (C) (E), 99 (C) (E), FIG. 100 (B) (D)), and the collision target. By changing the color of, the degree of expectation of transition to the jackpot game is suggested (FIGS. 98 (D) (F), 99 (D) (F), 100 (C) (E)). According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by producing a color change due to the collision of the game ball image UG.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, a button image BG (FIG. 98) imitating the effect button 63 and a panel image PG in which characters are displayed are adopted as collision targets of the game ball image UG (FIG. 100). According to this configuration, it is possible to produce a unified effect on the display screen 7a, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first possible accessory 14 (left movable accessory 14L) is adopted as the collision target of the game ball image UG (FIG. 99). According to this configuration, it is possible to produce a dynamic effect and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the game ball collision effect using the game ball image UG is executed when the game ball enters the second starting port 21 (FIGS. 98 (C) and 98 (E)). , FIGS. 99 (C) (E), FIGS. 100 (B) (D)). According to this configuration, it is possible to feel as if the game ball collision effect was executed by the game ball that entered the ball, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the game ball image production.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the number of game balls represented in the game ball image UG is one, but a plurality of game balls may collide with the collision target.

[Modification 2]
In the above, the game ball collision effect is executed at the timing of entering the game ball into the second starting port 21. On the other hand, the game ball collision effect may be executed at a timing unrelated to the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21.

[Modification 3]
In the above, the game ball collision effect is executed at the timing of entering the game ball into the second starting port 21. On the other hand, the game ball collision effect may be executed only at the timing of over winning after the second special figure hold reaches the upper limit.

[Modification example 4]
The above is an example suggesting the degree of expectation of transition to a jackpot, but it may be applied as an effect suggesting the degree of expectation of transition to a high-accuracy or low-accuracy time-saving game.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect C3-1]
It ’s a game machine,
It is possible to execute a game ball effect using a game ball image, which is an image imitating a game ball, and to suggest the degree of expectation of transition to an advantageous game that is advantageous to the player.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-1.
In the game ball effect, the game ball image is made to collide with the collision target, and the display color or the color development mode of the collision target is changed to suggest the degree of expectation of transition to the advantageous game.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-1 or aspect C3-2.
The collision target is an image displayed on the display screen.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C3-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-3.
The collision target is an accessory arranged in the game area.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C3-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-4.
The game ball effect is executed when the game ball enters a predetermined ball entrance.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-5.
The advantageous game is a jackpot game,
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C3-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-6.
The advantageous game is a time-saving game.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C3-8]
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-5.
The predetermined ball entry port is a start port, and is executed when the ball enters the start port after the hold memory due to the entry of the game ball into the start port reaches the upper limit.
A game machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, specific end face effects A to C of the stereoscopic image will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 to 103. In FIGS. 101 to 103, various reserved images displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted from the viewability of the drawing, and the decorative design displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is also viewed in the drawing. Some are omitted due to ease of use, and the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are also omitted due to the ease of viewing the drawing. There is something that has been done.

The specific end face effect of the stereoscopic image can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbol (for example, the period from the start of the variation of the decorative symbol to the stop of the variation). That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 (for example, a variation effect start command) and includes an instruction to execute a specific end face effect of the stereoscopic image, the ROM 103 responds. The image data to be used is read out and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Further, when the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute a specific end face effect of the stereoscopic image, the position, inclination, and light emission of the second movable accessory 15 are included. Change the aspect.

Here, first, the specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image will be described, the specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image, and the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image will be described in order.

[Specific end face effect A of stereoscopic image]
First, the specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image will be described with reference to FIG. 101. FIG. 101 is a diagram for explaining a specific end face effect A of a stereoscopic image. The specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image is selected from a plurality of types of reach effects when a reach is formed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern, and is performed as a part of the reach effects. is there. That is, the plurality of types of reach effects include the specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image.

In the specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image, first, as shown in FIG. 101 (A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the stereoscopic image. The right decorative symbol 8R is displayed in such a manner that the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a, and the variable display of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the stopped-displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative symbol during high-speed fluctuation. Immediately before stopping, the decorative symbol decelerates and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again and is displayed as a stop. Here, as shown in FIG. 101 (B), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (number) (here, the number "9" temporarily stops), and the middle decoration. The symbol 8C is displayed in a variable manner to form a reach.

When the reach is formed, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image is temporarily stopped at the number "8", and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image is rotated by the number "8" (for example, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image). When the display mode is set to gradually decrease toward the rear while rotating from the upper side to the lower side, this time, another rotation (for example, from the right side to the left side of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image) The left decorative symbol 8L is finally temporarily stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as shown in FIG. 101 (C). The display mode is larger than the size of the right decorative symbol 8R and the rotation is stopped. This is done in order to largely display the mode of double doors by the right side of the left side middle decoration symbol 8CL and the left side of the right side middle decoration design 8CR obtained by dividing the middle decoration symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image into left and right, as will be described later.

After that, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image is divided into left and right with a vertical line (center line) passing through the upper midpoint and the lower midpoint of the stereoscopic image 8C as a boundary, and the left intermediate decorative symbol of the stereoscopic image is divided. It is divided into 8CL and the right middle decorative symbol 8CR of the stereoscopic image, and as shown in FIG. 101 (D), the right side of the left middle decorative symbol 8CL and the left side of the right middle decorative symbol 8CR are displayed in a Kannon opening manner. Here, a stereoscopic image in which the right end face of the left middle decorative symbol 8CL is the open side end face, which is the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative symbol 8CL, and the left end face of the right middle decorative symbol 8CR is the open side end face. It becomes the specific end face 8CRa of the right side middle decorative symbol 8CR.

The intermediate decorative symbol 8C is formed as colored opaque, but when the left intermediate decorative symbol 8CL and the right intermediate decorative symbol 8CR are opened in a double-door manner, the left intermediate decorative symbol 8CL has a specific end surface 8CLa and the right side. It is represented in such a manner that the specific end face 8CRa of the intermediate decorative pattern 8CR has transparency. Here, the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative symbol 8CL and the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative symbol 8CR are transparent regions, respectively.

When the left middle decorative symbol 8CL and the right middle decorative symbol 8CR are opened in a double-door manner, a predetermined image that should not exist in the background image is displayed on the transparent area of the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative symbol 8CL and the right side. It can be visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end face 8CRa of the intermediate decorative pattern 8CR.

Here, two characters CRA and CRB are used as "predetermined images", and the two characters CRA and CRB are still images facing each other with a sword, and show the world view of the production by the game machine 1. Even if the left middle decorative symbol 8CL and the right middle decorative symbol 8CR are gradually opened in a double-door manner, the positions of the two characters CRA and CRB do not change, and the distance dimension and size from each other do not change. .. The character CRB can be visually recognized on the specific end surface 8CLa of the left middle decorative symbol 8CL, and the character CRA can be visually recognized on the specific end surface 8CRa of the right middle decorative symbol 8CR.

When the left middle decorative symbol 8CL and the right middle decorative symbol 8CR have just been opened in the manner of double doors, the transparent area of the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative symbol 8CL and the transparency of the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative symbol 8CR It is difficult to notice that the transparent area of the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative symbol 8CL and the transparent area of the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative symbol 8CR are transparent. As the 8CL and the right middle decorative symbol 8CR are opened in a double-door manner, the transparent area of the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative symbol 8CL and the transparent area of the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative symbol 8CR become larger. , A part of the character CRB can be visually recognized from the specific end surface 8CLa of the left middle decorative symbol 8CL, and a part of the character CRA can be visually recognized from the specific end surface 8CRa of the right middle decorative symbol 8CR.

When the left middle decorative symbol 8CL and the right middle decorative symbol 8CR are opened wide in the manner of double doors, as shown in FIG. 101 (E), the transparent area of the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative symbol 8CL is the character CRB. The size is increased until the presence can be visually recognized, and the transparent area of the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative symbol 8CR is increased until the presence of the character CRA can be visually recognized.

Following FIG. 101 (E), as shown in FIG. 101 (F), the flash image FH in which light is emitted from the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in all directions is the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. After that, as shown in FIG. 101 (G), the character CRB visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative symbol 8CL and the transparent area of the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative symbol 8CR. The character CRA visually recognized through the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the action effect by the two characters CRA and CRB is developed. At this time, in addition to the character CRB visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end surface 8CLa of the left middle decorative symbol 8CL and the character CRA visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end surface 8CRa of the right middle decorative symbol 8CR, 2 The background images of the two characters CRA and CRB are also displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

The action effect is developed, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (here, the number "9"). Then, a jackpot game (big hit production) is performed in which a jackpot is obtained and a profit is given to the player, whereas the left decorative symbol 8L is the number "9" on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. If the middle decorative symbol 8C becomes the number "8" and the right decorative symbol 8R becomes the number "9" and the same symbols (here, the number "9") are not aligned and are stopped and displayed, the deviation is confirmed and displayed. Become.

[Specific end face effect B of stereoscopic image]
Next, the specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image will be described with reference to FIG. 102. FIG. 102 is a diagram for explaining a specific end face effect B of a stereoscopic image. The specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image is selected from a plurality of types of reach effects when a reach is formed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern, and is performed as a part of the reach effects. is there. That is, the plurality of types of reach effects include the specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image.

In the specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image, first, as shown in FIG. 102 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the stereoscopic image are displayed. The right decorative symbol 8R is displayed in such a manner that the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a, and the variable display of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the stopped-displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative symbol during high-speed fluctuation. Immediately before stopping, the decorative symbol decelerates and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again and is displayed as a stop. Here, as shown in FIG. 102 (B), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (number) (here, the number "9" temporarily stops), and the middle decoration. The symbol 8C is displayed in a variable manner to form a reach.

When the reach is formed, as shown in FIG. 102 (C), the second movable accessory 15 having a rectangular shape with "OARO" written on the front surface is in the retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7. The image display device 7 advances (moves) downward from the stationary state to a position closer to the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (advance position (effect position)). When the second movable accessory 15 has advanced (moved) to a position (advanced position (directed position)) closer to the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a predetermined angle is clockwise from the horizontal state. It rotates by (for example, 30 degrees), stops, and becomes inclined.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 102 (D), the character string "OARO" written on the front surface of the second movable accessory 15 is colored and opaque as "OARO" in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is a display mode that appears as a character string image LG of a stereoscopic image. The appearance and color of the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image may be the same as the "OARO" described on the front surface of the second movable accessory 15, or the appearance may be the same but the colors may be different.

After that, when the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the second movable accessory 15 is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, 30 degrees). It stops and returns to the original horizontal state, and moves backward (moves) upward from the advance position (directing position) to the retracted position (home position).

The character string image LG of the stereoscopic image displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 rotates backward (for example, rotates from the upper side to the lower side of the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image). When the display mode is set to gradually decrease in distance, this time, the display mode is switched to another rotation (for example, the rotation from the right side to the left side of the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image), and the image gradually approaches forward while rotating. As shown in FIG. 102 (E), it became larger than the size of the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image that finally appeared in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the rotation was stopped. It becomes a display mode. This is done in order to largely display the mode of double doors by the right side of the left side character string image LGL and the left side of the right side character string image LGR obtained by dividing the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image into left and right, as will be described later.

After that, the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image is divided into left and right, and is divided into character string images of two stereoscopic images in which "OA" is the left side character string image LGL and "RO" is the right side character string image LGR. As shown in (F), the right side of the left side character string image LGL and the left side of the right side character string image LGR are displayed in a Kannon opening mode. Here, the right end face of the character "A", which is the right end face of the left character string image LGL, is a specific end face LGLa of the left side character string image LGL, which is a three-dimensional image having the open side end face, and the left side of the right side character string image LGR. The left end face of the letter "R" which is the end face is the specific end face LGRa of the right side character string image LGR which is a stereoscopic image whose open side end face is.

The character string image LG is formed as colored opaque, but when the left side character string image LGL and the right side character string image LGR are opened in a Kannon opening mode, the left side character string image LGL has a specific end face LGLa and the right side. It is represented in a manner in which the specific end face LGRa of the character string image LGR has transparency. Here, the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR are transparent regions, respectively.

When the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR are opened in a Kannon opening mode, a predetermined image that should not exist in the background image is displayed on the transparent area of the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the right side. It can be visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end face LGRa of the character string image LGR.

Here, two characters CRA and CRB are used as "predetermined images", and the two characters CRA and CRB are still images facing each other with a sword, and show the world view of the production by the game machine 1. Even if the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR are gradually opened in the manner of opening the Kannon, the positions of the two characters CRA and CRB do not change, and the distance dimension and size from each other do not change. .. The character CRB can be visually recognized on the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL, and the character CRA can be visually recognized on the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR.

When the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR have just been opened in the manner of Kannon opening, the transparent area of the specific end surface LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the transparency of the specific end surface LGRa of the right character string image LGR. The area is small, and it is difficult to notice that the transparent area of the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the transparent area of the specific end surface LGRa of the right character string image LGR are transparent, but the left character string image. As the LGL and the right-hand character string image LGR are opened in a Kannon-opening manner, the transparent area of the specific end surface LGLa of the left-side character string image LGL and the transparent area of the specific end surface LGRa of the right-side character string image LGR become larger. , A part of the character CRB can be visually recognized from the specific end surface LGLa of the left character string image LGL, and a part of the character CRA can be visually recognized from the specific end surface LGRa of the right character string image LGR.

When the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR are opened wide in the manner of Kannon opening, as shown in FIG. 102 (G), the transparent region of the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL is the character CRB. The transparent area of the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR is enlarged to the state where the existence of the character CRA can be visually recognized.

Following FIG. 102 (G), as shown in FIG. 102 (H), the flash image FH in which light is emitted from the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in all directions is the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, as shown in FIG. 102 (I), the character CRB visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end surface LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the transparent area of the specific end surface LGRa of the right character string image LGR. The character CRA visually recognized through the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the action effect by the two characters CRA and CRB is developed. At this time, in addition to the character CRB visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end surface LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the character CRA visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end surface LGRa of the right character string image LGR, 2 The background images of the two characters CRA and CRB are also displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

The action effect is developed, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (here, the number "9"). Then, a jackpot game (big hit production) is performed in which a jackpot is obtained and a profit is given to the player, whereas the left decorative symbol 8L is the number "9" on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. If the middle decorative symbol 8C becomes the number "8" and the right decorative symbol 8R becomes the number "9" and the same symbols (here, the number "9") are not aligned and are stopped and displayed, the deviation is confirmed and displayed. Become.

[Specific end face effect C of stereoscopic image]
Next, the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image will be described with reference to FIG. 103. FIG. 103 is a diagram for explaining a specific end face effect C of a stereoscopic image. The specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image is selected from a plurality of types of reach effects when a reach is formed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern, and is performed as a part of the reach effects. is there. That is, the plurality of types of reach effects include the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image.

In the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image, first, as shown in FIG. 103 (A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the stereoscopic image. The right decorative symbol 8R is displayed in such a manner that the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a, and the variable display of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the stopped-displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative symbol during high-speed fluctuation. Immediately before stopping, the decorative symbol decelerates and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again and is displayed as a stop. Here, as shown in FIG. 103 (B), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (number) (here, the number "9" temporarily stops), and the middle decoration. The symbol 8C is displayed in a variable manner to form a reach.

When the reach is formed, as shown in FIG. 103 (C), the second movable accessory 15 having a rectangular shape with "OARO" written on the front surface is in the retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7. The image display device 7 advances (moves) downward from the stationary state to a position closer to the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (advance position (effect position)). When the second movable accessory 15 has advanced (moved) to a position (advanced position (directed position)) closer to the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a predetermined angle is clockwise from the horizontal state. It rotates by (for example, 30 degrees), stops, and becomes inclined.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 103 (D), the character string "OARO" written on the front surface of the second movable accessory 15 is colored and opaque as "OARO" in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is a display mode that appears as a character string image LG of a stereoscopic image. The appearance and color of the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image may be the same as the "OARO" described on the front surface of the second movable accessory 15, or the appearance may be the same but the colors may be different.

After that, when the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the second movable accessory 15 is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, 30 degrees). It stops and returns to the original horizontal state, and moves backward (moves) upward from the advance position (directing position) to the retracted position (home position).

The character string image LG of the stereoscopic image displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 rotates backward (for example, rotates from the upper side to the lower side of the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image). When the display mode is set to gradually decrease in distance, this time, the display mode is switched to another rotation (for example, the rotation from the right side to the left side of the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image), and the image gradually approaches forward while rotating. As shown in FIG. 103 (E), it became larger than the size of the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image that finally appeared in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the rotation was stopped. It becomes a display mode. This is because, as will be described later, the display mode in which the front surface of the left character string image LGL obtained by dividing the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image into left and right and the front surface of the right character string image LGR face each other and close is displayed in a large size. It is done in.

After that, the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image is divided into left and right, and is divided into character string images of two stereoscopic images in which "OA" is the left side character string image LGL and "RO" is the right side character string image LGR. As shown in (F), the left side of the left side character string image LGL is a display mode that rotates forward about the vertical direction of the right side of the left side character string image LGL, and the right side of the right side character string image LGR is the right side. The display mode rotates forward about the vertical direction on the left side of the character string image LGR. Here, the surface described as "OA" of the left character string image LGL immediately before being divided into two character string images (the character string image LG shown in FIG. 103 (E)) is divided into "left character string". It is called "the front surface of the image LGL", and the surface of the right character string image LGR described as "RO" immediately before being divided into two character string images (the character string image LG shown in FIG. 103 (E)) is divided. In, it is called "the front of the right character string image LGR".

As the rotation of the left character string image LGL and the right character string LGR progresses, the front surface of the left character string image LGL and the front surface of the right character string image LGR face each other and overlap each other. The display mode is such that the column image LGR is rotated (hereinafter, referred to as "a display mode in which the front surface of the left character string image LGL and the front surface of the right character string image LGR are closed so as to face each other and overlap each other").

As a result, the right end face of the character "A", which is the right end face of the left character string image LGL, becomes the closed side end face, and the left end face of the character "O", which is the left end face of the left character string image LGL, becomes the open side end face. Further, the left end face of the character "R" which is the left end face of the right character string image LGR is the closed side end face, and the right end face of the character "O" which is the right end face of the right character string image LGR is the open side end face.

The left end face of the character "O", which is the left end face of the left character string image LGL, is an open side end face, and here is a specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL, which is a stereoscopic image, and the right side character string image LGR. The right end face of the character "O" which is the right end face is an open side end face, and here is a specific end face LGRa of the right side character string image LGR which is a stereoscopic image.

The character string image LG is formed as colored opaque, but when the display mode is such that the front surface of the left character string image LGL and the front surface of the right character string image LGR face each other and are closed so as to overlap each other, the left character string image LGL is specified. The end face LGLa and the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR are represented in a manner having transparency. Here, the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR are transparent regions, respectively.

When the display mode is such that the front surface of the left character string image LGL and the front surface of the right character string image LGR face each other and are closed, a predetermined image that should not exist in the background image is transparent to the specific end surface LGLa of the left character string image LGL. It can be visually recognized through a wide area and a transparent area of the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR.

Here, two characters CRA and CRB are used as "predetermined images", and the two characters CRA and CRB are still images facing each other with a sword, and show the world view of the production by the game machine 1. Even if the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR are gradually closed so that the front surface of the left character string image LGL and the front surface of the right character string image LGR face each other and are closed so as to overlap each other, two The positions of the characters CRA and CRB do not change, and the distance dimensions and sizes of the characters do not change. The character CRB can be visually recognized on the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL, and the character CRA can be visually recognized on the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR.

When the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR have just been closed so that the front surface of the left character string image LGL and the front surface of the right character string image LGR face each other and are closed so as to overlap each other. The transparent area of the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the transparent area of the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR are small, and the transparent area of the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR. Although it is difficult to notice that the transparent area of the specific end face LGRa of is transparent, as the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR are closed, the specific end surface LGLa of the left character string image LGL When the transparent area and the transparent area of the specific end face LGRa of the right side character string image LGR become large, a part of the character CRB can be visually recognized from the specific end face LGLa of the left side character string image LGL, and the right side character string image LGR A part of the character CRA can be visually recognized from the specific end face LGRa.

When the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR are closed until the front surface of the left character string image LGL and the front surface of the right character string image LGR face each other and are closed so as to overlap each other, FIG. 103 (G) As shown in, the transparent area of the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL is enlarged to a state where the presence of the character CRB can be visually recognized, and the transparent area of the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR is large. , The presence of the character CRA is increased to a state where it can be visually recognized.

Following FIG. 103 (G), as shown in FIG. 103 (H), the flash image FH in which light is emitted from the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in all directions is the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. After that, as shown in FIG. 103 (I), the character CRB visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end surface LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the transparent area of the specific end surface LGRa of the right character string image LGR. The character CRA visually recognized through the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the action effect by the two characters CRA and CRB is developed. At this time, in addition to the character CRB visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end surface LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the character CRA visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end surface LGRa of the right character string image LGR, 2 The background images of the two characters CRA and CRB are also displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

The action effect is developed, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (here, the number "9"). Then, a jackpot game (big hit production) is performed in which a jackpot is obtained and a profit is given to the player, whereas the left decorative symbol 8L is the number "9" on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. If the middle decorative symbol 8C becomes the number "8" and the right decorative symbol 8R becomes the number "9" and the same symbols (here, the number "9") are not aligned and are stopped and displayed, the deviation is confirmed and displayed. Become.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the specific end face effect of the stereoscopic image is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 101 (A) to 101 (E) of the specific end face effect A of a stereoscopic image, an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying various images. When displaying the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image on the image display device 7 (display means), the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image is divided. The specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative symbol 8CL and the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative symbol 8CR in which the middle decorative symbol 8C of the three-dimensional image is divided are represented in a mode of having transparency, and the middle left side. Through the specific end face 8CLa of the decorative symbol 8CL and the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative symbol 8CR, the first effect of making the two characters CRA and CRB (predetermined image) visible can be executed. According to this configuration, two characters CRA and CRB (predetermined images) are visually recognized through the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative symbol 8CL and the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative symbol 8CR, which are represented in a transparent manner. Since it is possible to provide an unprecedented novel production that can be performed, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved. In the specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIGS. 102 (A) to 102 (G) and the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image of FIGS. 103 (A) to 103 (G), the specific end surface LGLa of the left character string image LGL The two characters CRA and CRB (predetermined images) can be visually recognized through the transparent area of the right side character string image LGR and the transparent area of the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR, and the same is true.

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 101 (A) to 101 (E) of the specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image, in the first effect, it is represented by a mode having transparency. The intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image is divided so that the region between the specific end face 8CLa of the left intermediate decorative symbol 8CL and the specific end surface 8CRa of the right intermediate decorative symbol 8CR represented in a transparent manner is large. The left middle decorative symbol 8CL and the right middle decorative symbol 8CR are opened (rotated) in a double-door manner. According to this configuration, the left middle decorative symbol 8CL and the right middle decorative symbol 8CR are opened (rotated) in a double-folded manner, so that the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative symbol 8CL represented in a transparent manner is obtained. And, the area of the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative symbol 8CR represented by the transparent aspect is increased, and the area where the two characters CRA and CRB (predetermined image) can be visually recognized is increased. Therefore, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
In the specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic images of FIGS. 102 (A) to 102 (G), the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR are opened (rotated) in a double-folded manner to have transparency. The area of the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative symbol 8CL represented by the aspect and the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative symbol 8CR represented by the transparent aspect becomes large, and the two characters CRA and CRB The area where the (predetermined image) can be visually recognized can be increased, and the same is true.
In the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic images of FIGS. 103 (A) to 103 (G), the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR are the front surface of the left character string image LGL and the front surface of the right character string image LGR. The specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decoration symbol 8CL represented by the transparent aspect and the right middle decoration represented by the transparent aspect by being rotated in a display mode in which the characters face each other and are closed so as to overlap each other. The area of the specific end face 8CRa of the symbol 8CR is increased, and the area where the two characters CRA and CRB (predetermined image) can be visually recognized can be increased, which is the same.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 101 (C) of the specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image, the number “8” which is the intermediate decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image is before the first effect. A second effect of displaying the size of the image on the image display device 7 (display means) can be executed. According to this configuration, before the first effect, the size of the number "8", which is the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) in a large size, so that the decorative symbol 8CL is displayed. Before and after the specific end face 8CLa of the decorative symbol 8CL and the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative symbol 8CR are represented in a manner having transparency, the player with respect to the specific end face 8CLa of the decorative symbol 8CL and the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative symbol 8CR. Since it can contribute to directing the line of sight of the player, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
In the specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 102 (E), before the first effect, the mode of the Kannon opening by the right side of the left side character string image LGL and the left side of the right side character string image LGR is greatly increased by the image display device 7 ( By being able to be displayed on the display means), the specific end surface of the left character string image LGL and the specific end surface of the left character string image LGL are represented in a manner in which the specific end surface LGRa of the left character string image LGL and the specific end surface LGRa of the right character string image LGR are transparent. It can contribute to directing the line of sight of the player to the LGLa and the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR, and is the same.
In the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 103 (E), before the first effect, the display mode in which the front surface of the left character string image LGL and the front surface of the right side character string image LGR face each other and are closed is greatly increased. By being able to be displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the left character string before and after the specific end surface LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the specific end surface LGRa of the right character string image LGR are represented in a transparent manner. It can contribute to directing the line of sight of the player to the specific end face LGLa of the image LGL and the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR, and is similar.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 101 (C) of the specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image, in the second effect, the number "8" which is the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image is The number "8", which is the interior decoration symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, is displayed smaller by moving away from the depth direction, and then the number "8", which is the interior decoration symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, is displayed by moving closer to the front. The size of "8" is displayed large. According to this configuration, the mode of the double door opening by the right side of the left middle decorative symbol 8CL and the left side of the right middle decorative symbol 8CR can be displayed in a large size, so that the player can be visually entertained and the interest is improved. Can be planned.
In the specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 102 (E), the mode of the double door opening by the right side of the left character string image LGL and the left side of the right side character string image LGR can be displayed in a large size, which is the same.
In the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 103 (E), the display mode in which the front surface of the left character string image LGL and the front surface of the right character string image LGR face each other and are closed can be displayed in a large size, which is the same. ..

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 101 (C) to 101 (E) of the specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image, in the first effect, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image is on the left side. It is divided into a plurality of middle decorative symbols 8CL and a right middle decorative symbol 8CR, and the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative symbol 8CL and the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative symbol 8CR (in each divided stereoscopic image). It is possible to perform an effect in which the two characters CRA and CRB (predetermined image) can be visually recognized through the specific end face). According to this configuration, as a result of dividing the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image into a plurality of three-dimensional images, the number of stereoscopic images increases, and as a result, the specific end faces in each of the divided stereoscopic images also increase. Since it is possible to give the player many opportunities to visually recognize the two characters CRA and CRB (predetermined image) through the specific end face in the image, the player can be visually entertained and the interest is improved. Can be planned.
In the specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIGS. 102 (E) to 102 (G) and the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image of FIGS. 103 (E) to 103 (G), the character string image LG is "OA". As a result of being divided into two character string images in which the left side character string image LGL and "RO" are the right side character string image LGR, as the number of stereoscopic images increases, the specific end face in each divided stereoscopic image also increases. This is the same because it is possible to give the player many opportunities to visually recognize the two characters CRA and CRB (predetermined images) through the specific end faces in each of the three-dimensional images thus increased.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 102 (C) to 102 (D) of the specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image, the advance (front surface) of the image display device 7 (display means) A second movable accessory 15 (movable member) that can be moved to a position (predetermined position) is provided, and when the second movable accessory 15 (movable member) has a reach formed during a variation effect of a decorative pattern, When a reach effect including a specific end face effect of a stereoscopic image is performed from among a plurality of types of reach effects, a third effect that operates (at a predetermined timing) and moves to an advance position (predetermined position) can be executed. , In the second production, the character string image LG of the colored opaque stereoscopic image that the character string "OARO" written on the front surface of the second movable accessory 15 (movable member) is "OARO" is displayed. It has become. According to this configuration, when the second movable accessory 15 (movable member) operates at a predetermined timing and moves to the advance position (predetermined position), the second movable accessory 15 (movable member) is triggered by this. Since the character string "OARO" written on the front surface of the image is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) as the character string image LG of the colored opaque stereoscopic image "OARO", the second movable accessory 15 (movable) A mode in which the character string "OARO" written on the front surface of the member) is shaken off from the second movable accessory 15 (movable member) to the image display device 7 (display means). Since it is possible to perform a novel production, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved. The same applies to the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic images of FIGS. 103 (C) to 103 (D).

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the specific end face effect of the stereoscopic image.
[Modification 1]
In the specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 101, the specific end surface 8CLa of the left middle decorative symbol 8CL and the specific end surface 8CRa of the right middle decorative symbol 8CR are defined as transparent regions, and the specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 102. In the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 103, the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the specific end face LGRa of the right side character string image LGR are defined as transparent regions. However, the specific end faces 8CLa, 8CRa in the specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 101, the specific end faces LGLa, LGRa in the specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 102, and the specific end face LGLa in the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 103. , LGRa may have translucency, and may have translucency such as frosted glass. In this way, for example, the specific end face is represented by a translucent mode such as frosted glass, and the specific end face gradually becomes a transparent region from a blurred mode in which a predetermined image cannot be clearly seen through the specific end face. As the transparency increases, the predetermined image may be made easier to see through the specific end face. Even with this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Modification 2]
In the specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 101, the specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 102, and the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 103, two character CRAs are used as predetermined images through the specific end faces of the stereoscopic image. The CRB could be visually recognized, and it was a still image in which the two characters CRA and CRB faced each other with a sword. However, a moving image may be used instead of the still image. The moving image may be, for example, explaining the flow of two characters CRA and CRB facing each other with a sword, a moving image by 3D CG, a moving image by animation, or a movie one. It may be a scene.

[Modification 3]
In the specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 101, the specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 102, and the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 103, the stereoscopic image is divided into two stereoscopic images. However, it may be divided into a plurality of stereoscopic images of three or more. In this way, as the number of stereoscopic images increases due to the division, the specific end faces in each stereoscopic image also increase, and as a result, there are many opportunities to visually recognize the predetermined image through the transparent specific end faces. It can be given to the player.

[Modification example 4]
In the specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 101, the left middle decorative symbol 8CL and the right middle decorative symbol 8CR are gradually opened in a manner of opening the Kannon, and in the specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 102, the left character string image LGL and the right side are opened. The character string image LGR is gradually opened in a Kannon opening mode, and in the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 103, the front surface of the left character string image LGL and the front surface of the right character string image LGR are closed so as to face each other and overlap. The left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR were gradually closed so as to become. However, the stereoscopic image may be rotated in the same direction or may be rotated in different directions. For example, in the specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 101, the left middle decorative symbol 8CL and the right middle decorative symbol 8CR are rotated in the same direction (for example, a right rotation mode and a left rotation mode). It may be rotated forward, backward, etc.), or it may be rotated in different directions, for example, the left middle decorative symbol 8CL may be forward-turned, while the right middle decorative symbol 8CR may be backward-turned. Or, the left middle decorative symbol 8CL is rotated backward, while the right middle decorative symbol 8CR is rotated clockwise. Further, in the specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 102, the left side character string image LGL and the right side character string image LGR are rotated in the same direction (for example, a right rotation mode and a left rotation mode). A mode of forward rotation, a mode of backward rotation, etc.) may be used, or the left character string image LGL may be rotated forward, whereas the right character string image LGR may be rotated backward. Or, the left character string image LGL is rotated backward while the right character string image LGR is rotated clockwise. Further, in the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 103, the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR are rotated in the same direction without closing the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR. (For example, a mode of rotating clockwise, a mode of rotating counterclockwise, a mode of rotating forward, a mode of rotating backward, etc.) may be used, or as rotations in different directions, for example, a mode of rotating the left character string image LGL forward. On the other hand, the right-hand character string image LGR is backflip, or the left-side character string image LGL is backflip, whereas the right-side character string image LGR is right-handed.

[Modification 5]
In the specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 101, the specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 102, and the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 103, the effect of the game machine 1 as a predetermined image through the specific end face of the stereoscopic image. It showed the world view of. However, it may suggest the development destination of the reach production. Since there are multiple types of development destinations for reach production, it is possible to suggest to the player the degree of expectation that a jackpot game will occur by the development destination that can be visually recognized through a specific end face, and a predetermined image and a jackpot at the development destination. It can also contribute to the player himself / herself finding a relationship with the degree of expectation that the game will occur.

[Modification 6]
In the specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 101, the specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 102, and the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 103, the world view of the effect of the game machine 1 is shown as a predetermined image. there were. As an indicator of the world view of the production, for example, in addition to the two characters CRA and CRB having a sword, items such as a sword and a shield may be used, a vehicle may be used, and two characters CRA, It may be expressed by two kanji characters such as the character "crash", the character "Ranbu", and the character "Musou" indicating the action by CRB.

[Modification 7]
The specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 101, the specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 102, and the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image of FIG. The production of is may be added.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect D1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying various images.
When a stereoscopic image is displayed on the display means, the specific end face in the stereoscopic image is represented in a transparent manner, and the first effect of making the predetermined image visible through the specific end face can be executed. ,
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-1.
In the first effect, the stereoscopic image is rotated so that the region of the specific end face becomes large.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-1 or aspect D1-2.
Prior to the first effect, a second effect of displaying the size of the stereoscopic image on the display means can be executed.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-3.
In the second effect, the stereoscopic image is displayed in a smaller size by moving away from it in the depth direction, and then by approaching in the front direction, the size of the stereoscopic image is increased. Is displayed,
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D1-1 to D1-4.
In the first effect, the stereoscopic image is divided into a plurality of parts, and the effect that the predetermined image can be visually recognized through the specific end face in each of the divided stereoscopic images can be executed.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D1-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-3 or aspect D1-4.
A movable member that can be moved to a predetermined position on the front surface of the display means is provided.
It is possible to execute a third effect in which the movable member operates at a predetermined timing and moves to the predetermined position.
In the second effect, the three-dimensional image in which the movable member is three-dimensionally expressed is displayed.
A game machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the combined effects A to C of the movable accessory will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 106. In FIGS. 104 to 106, decorative symbols and various reserved images displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted from the viewability of the drawing and are arranged around the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Some of the second movable accessories 15 are also omitted due to the ease of viewing the drawings.

The combined effect of the movable accessory can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbol (for example, the period from the start of the variation of the decorative symbol to the stop of the variation). That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (for example, the variation effect start command) received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the combined effect of the movable accessory, the ROM 103 responds. The image data to be used is read out and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Further, when the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands received from the sub control board 90 (for example, a variable effect start command) and includes an instruction to execute a combined effect of the movable accessory, the game board 2 is set to the game board 2. The position, inclination and light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14 provided can be changed, and the position, inclination and light emitting mode of the second movable accessory 15 provided in the game board 2 can be changed. Light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 arranged around the left side of the opening of the front frame 53 and the frame lamp 66 arranged around the right side of the opening of the front frame 53 (hereinafter, "light emission of the frame lamp 66"). It is called "aspect").

It should be noted that the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 is equipped with a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of multicolor emission (plural), and the light emission mode of the left movable accessory 14L may be a multicolor emission mode. The right movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14 is equipped with a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors (multiple LEDs are provided), and the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R can be set to a multicolor emission mode. it can. Further, the second movable accessory 15 is equipped with a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor (a plurality of full-color LEDs are provided), and the light emitting mode of the second movable accessory 15 can be set to the mode of multicolor light emission, and the front frame 53 The frame lamp 66 arranged around the left side of the opening of the front frame 53 and the frame lamp 66 arranged around the right side of the opening of the front frame 53 are each equipped with a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors (plural). The light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 can be a multicolor light emitting mode.

Here, first, the union effect A of the movable accessory will be described, and then the union effect B of the movable accessory and the union effect C of the movable accessory will be described in order.

[Combining production of movable characters A]
First, the combined effect A of the movable accessory will be described with reference to FIG. 104. FIG. 104 is a diagram for explaining the combined effect A of the movable accessory. In the combined effect A of the movable accessory, first, as shown in FIG. 104 (A), the left movable accessory 14L is in a light emitting mode for the left movable accessory, and the retracted position on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (home). While advancing (moving) from the position) toward the advancing position in the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right movable accessory 14R emits light for the right movable accessory (light emission for the left movable accessory). In a light emitting mode different from the mode), the image display device 7 is advanced (moved) from the retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a toward the advanced position in the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. .. At this time, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory, which is exactly the same as the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory 14R. It's different.

The left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R advance (move) toward the advance position (in the direction close to each other) in the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, respectively, and FIG. 104 ( As shown in B), at the front (front) center position (advance position (deployment position)) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the ring-shaped decorative portion attached to the tip side of the left movable accessory 14L. The left side decoration part which is half and the right side decoration part which is half of the ring-shaped decoration part attached to the tip side of the right side movable accessory 14R are united, and the left side decoration part and the right side movable part of the left side movable accessory 14L are combined. One decorative member (combined accessory) having an annular shape with the right decorative portion of the accessory 14R is formed.

When the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form a combined accessory having an annular shape, the region formed in the annular shape has a circular shape (a region having a circular shape (). Hereinafter, it is referred to as a “circular region”) 14D. An image expressing emotions is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular region 14D. Here, an image of smiling with wide open eyes is displayed, and then the image is switched to an image of smiling with squinting eyes. By supplementing the circular region 14D of the combined accessory with an image expressing emotions on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the combined accessory can have emotions. As a result, it is possible to realize a variety of productions based on the emotions of the united characters.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 104 (C) and 104 (D), the united accessory tilts from the upper side to the lower side toward the front side (player side), and then returns to the original "nodding (person)". The face is bowing) ”. At this time, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular region 14D, an image expressing emotions is also displayed according to the movement in which the united accessory tilts toward the front side (player side) and returns to the original side. The display mode is such that the facial expression of the combined accessory is also changed three-dimensionally.

After that, as shown in FIG. 104 (E), the second movable accessory 15 having a rectangular shape with "OARO" written on the front surface is stationary at the retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7. The image display device 7 advances (moves) downward to a position closer to the center (advance position (effect position)) of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a, and rotates clockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, 30 degrees). And it will be in a stopped state. At this time, the second movable accessory 15 is arranged so as to advance forward of the combined left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R, so that the upper side of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are arranged. It will be in a state of covering a part of the upper side. The second movable accessory 15 may be configured to cover either a part of the left movable accessory 14L or a part of the right movable accessory 14R (specific movable member).

When the second movable accessory 15 advances, the light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L is controlled from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory to the light emitting mode for turning off the light, and the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R and the frame lamp 66. The light emitting mode of is controlled from the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory (light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory) to the light emitting mode for turning off the light. On the other hand, the light emitting mode of the second movable accessory 15 is controlled to the light emitting mode for the second movable accessory 15 when the second movable accessory 15 advances. The second light emitting mode for the movable accessory is different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory and the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory (light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory).

After that, as shown in FIG. 104 (F), the light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L is controlled from the light emitting mode of turning off the light to the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory again, and the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R and the frame lamp. The light emitting mode of 66 is controlled again from the light emitting mode for turning off the light to the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory (light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory). That is, the light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L becomes the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory, the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R and the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 become the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory, and the second movable accessory. Since the light emitting mode of the object 15 becomes the light emitting mode for the second movable accessory, the light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L and the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R (the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R). The light emitting mode is the same as the light emitting mode) and the light emitting mode of the second movable accessory 15 is different from each other.

After that, as shown in FIG. 104 (G), the second movable accessory 15 rotates counterclockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, 30 degrees) in the light emitting mode for the second movable accessory, stops, and is originally horizontal. When the state is reached and the retreat (movement) is completed upward from the advance position (directing position) to the retracted position (home position), the light emitting mode of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in the light emitting mode for the second movable accessory. Or, it is controlled to another light emitting mode (light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory and the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory), or is controlled to the light emitting mode to turn off.

Subsequently, in the direction in which the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are separated from each other, the left movable accessory 14L is in a light emitting mode for the left movable accessory, and the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed. ) While retreating (moving) from the central advance position toward the left retracted position (home position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right movable accessory 14R emits light for the right movable accessory (left movable accessory). In a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for objects), the image display device 7 moves backward from the front (front) center center position of the display screen 7a toward the retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Moving. At this time, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is the same as the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R.

After that, as shown in FIG. 104 (H), the left movable accessory 14L displays the image display device 7 from the advanced position at the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory. When the retreat (movement) is completed toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the screen 7a, the light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L is controlled from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory to the light emitting mode for turning off, and the right side is movable. The display screen of the image display device 7 from the advance position at the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory (light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory). When the retreat (movement) is completed toward the right retracted position (home position) of 7a, the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R is changed from the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory (light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory). The light emission mode is controlled so that the light is turned off. At this time, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is also the same as the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R, and the light emitting mode is turned off from the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory (light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory). Is controlled to.

As described above, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is such that when the right movable accessory 14R is activated (in the period until the right movable accessory 14R advances toward the advance position, retracts, and returns to the home position). Along with this, the light emitting mode is controlled to be the same as the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R. In other words, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is such that when the right movable accessory 14R is activated (in the period until the right movable accessory 14R advances toward the advance position, retreats, and returns to the home position). In conjunction with the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R, the light emitting mode is controlled to be the same as the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R.

The light emitting mode of the second movable accessory 15 proceeds according to the light emitting pattern data for the second movable accessory 15 defined in time series, and the light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L is defined in time series. It proceeds according to the light emission pattern data for the left movable accessory 14L, and the light emission mode of the right movable accessory 14R proceeds according to the light emission pattern data for the right movable accessory 14R defined in time series, and the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66. Proceeds according to the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66 defined in time series. The light emission pattern data for the right movable accessory 14R and the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66 are the same light emission pattern data.

The light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is such that when the right movable accessory 14R is activated (in the period until the right movable accessory 14R advances toward the advance position, retreats, and returns to the home position). Since the light emitting mode is controlled to be the same as the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R, the light emitting pattern data for the frame lamp 66 and the light emitting pattern for the right movable accessory 14R when the right movable accessory 14R is operated. The light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 and the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R may proceed according to the respective light emission pattern data with the data individually, or the right side instead of the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66. The light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 and the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R may proceed according to the light emission pattern data for the movable accessory 14R.

[Combining production of movable characters B]
Next, the combined effect A of the movable accessory will be described with reference to FIG. 105. FIG. 105 is a diagram for explaining the combined effect B of the movable accessory. In the combined effect B of the movable accessory, first, as shown in FIG. 105 (A), the left movable accessory 14L is in a light emitting mode for the left movable accessory, and the retracted position on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (home). The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is in a light emitting mode in which the movable accessory 14R on the right side is turned off while advancing (moving) from the position) toward the advance position in the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The image is advanced (moved) from the retracted position (home position) on the right side toward the advanced position at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this time, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is a light emitting mode in which the light is extinguished, which is exactly the same as the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R, and is the same as the light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L for the left movable accessory. It's different.

The left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R advance (move) toward the advance position (in the direction close to each other) at the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, respectively. As shown in B), at the front (front) center position (advance position (deployment position)) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the ring-shaped decorative portion attached to the tip side of the left movable accessory 14L. The left side decoration part which is half and the right side decoration part which is half of the ring-shaped decoration part attached to the tip side of the right side movable accessory 14R are united, and the left side decoration part and the right side movable part of the left side movable accessory 14L are combined. One decorative member (combined accessory) having an annular shape with the right decorative portion of the accessory 14R is formed.

When the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form a combined accessory having an annular shape, the light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L is for the left movable accessory. The light emitting mode is controlled from the light emitting mode to the light emitting mode, and the region formed in the ring becomes a circular region (hereinafter, referred to as “circular region”) 14D. An image expressing emotions is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular region 14D. Here, an image of smiling with wide open eyes is displayed, and then the image is switched to an image of smiling with squinting eyes. By supplementing the circular region 14D of the combined accessory with an image expressing emotions on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the combined accessory can have emotions. As a result, it is possible to realize a variety of productions based on the emotions of the united characters.

After that, as shown in FIG. 105 (C), the second movable accessory 15 having a rectangular shape with "OARO" written on the front surface is stationary at the retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7. The image display device 7 advances (moves) downward to a position closer to the center (advance position (effect position)) of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a, and rotates clockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, 30 degrees). And it will be in a stopped state. At this time, the second movable accessory 15 is arranged so as to advance forward of the combined left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R, so that the upper side of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are arranged. It will be in a state of covering a part of the upper side. The second movable accessory 15 may be configured to cover either a part of the left movable accessory 14L or a part of the right movable accessory 14R (specific movable member).

When the second movable accessory 15 advances, the light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L is maintained in the light emitting mode of turning off, and both the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R and the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 are turned off. Is maintained. On the other hand, the light emitting mode of the second movable accessory 15 is controlled to the light emitting mode for the second movable accessory 15 when the second movable accessory 15 advances. The light emitting mode for the second movable accessory is different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory, and is different from the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory (light emitting mode for the left movable accessory and the light emitting mode for the second movable accessory, which will be described later. The light emitting mode is different from that of the mode).

After that, as shown in FIGS. 105 (D) and 105 (E), the light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L is controlled from the light emitting mode of extinguishing to the light emitting mode of the left movable accessory again. The light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R is controlled from a light emitting mode in which the light is turned off to a light emitting mode in which the right movable accessory is emitted (a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory and the light emitting mode for the second movable accessory). At this time, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is exactly the same as the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory 14R of the right movable accessory 14R, and is controlled from the light emitting state of turning off to the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory, and is movable on the left side. The light emitting mode for the left movable accessory of the accessory 14L and the light emitting mode for the second movable accessory of the second movable accessory 15 are different. That is, the light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L becomes the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory, the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R and the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 become the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory, and the second movable accessory. Since the light emitting mode of the object 15 becomes the light emitting mode for the second movable accessory, the light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L and the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R (the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R). The light emitting mode is the same as the light emitting mode) and the light emitting mode of the second movable accessory 15 is different from each other.

Then, the united accessory performs a "nodding (like a human face bowing)" action of tilting from the upper side to the lower side toward the front side (player side) and returning to the original side. At this time, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular region 14D, an image expressing emotions is also displayed according to the movement in which the united accessory tilts toward the front side (player side) and returns to the original side. The display mode is such that the facial expression of the combined accessory is also changed three-dimensionally.

After that, as shown in FIG. 105 (F), the second movable accessory 15 rotates counterclockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, 30 degrees) in the light emitting mode for the second movable accessory, stops, and is originally horizontal. When the state is reached and the retreat (movement) is completed upward from the advance position (directing position) to the retracted position (home position), the light emitting mode of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in the light emitting mode for the second movable accessory. Or, it is controlled to another light emitting mode (light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory and the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory), or is controlled to the light emitting mode to turn off.

Subsequently, in the direction in which the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are separated from each other, the left movable accessory 14L is in a light emitting mode for the left movable accessory, and the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed. ) While retreating (moving) from the central advance position toward the left retracted position (home position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right movable accessory 14R emits light for the right movable accessory (left movable accessory). In a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for objects), the image display device 7 moves backward from the front (front) center center position of the display screen 7a toward the retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Moving. At this time, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is the same as the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R.

After that, as shown in FIG. 105 (G), the left movable accessory 14L displays the image display device 7 from the advanced position at the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory. When the retreat (movement) is completed toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the screen 7a, the light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L is controlled from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory to the light emitting mode for turning off, and the right side is movable. The accessory 14R advances in the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a light emitting mode for the right movable accessory (a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory and the light emitting mode for the second movable accessory). When the retreat (movement) is completed from the position toward the retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R is changed to the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory (left movable accessory). The light emitting mode is controlled from the light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the second movable accessory and the light emitting mode for turning off the light. At this time, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is also the same as the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R, and the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory (the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory and the light emitting mode for the second movable accessory). It is controlled from a different light emitting mode) to a light emitting mode in which the light is turned off.

As described above, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is such that when the right movable accessory 14R is activated (in the period until the right movable accessory 14R advances toward the advance position, retracts, and returns to the home position). Along with this, the light emitting mode is controlled to be the same as the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R. In other words, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is such that when the right movable accessory 14R is activated (in the period until the right movable accessory 14R advances toward the advance position, retreats, and returns to the home position). In conjunction with the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R, the light emitting mode is controlled to be the same as the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R.

The light emitting mode of the second movable accessory 15 proceeds according to the light emitting pattern data for the second movable accessory 15 defined in time series, and the light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L is defined in time series. It proceeds according to the light emission pattern data for the left movable accessory 14L, and the light emission mode of the right movable accessory 14R proceeds according to the light emission pattern data for the right movable accessory 14R defined in time series, and the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66. Proceeds according to the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66 defined in time series. The light emission pattern data for the right movable accessory 14R and the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66 are the same light emission pattern data.

The light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is such that when the right movable accessory 14R is activated (in the period until the right movable accessory 14R advances toward the advance position, retreats, and returns to the home position). Since the light emitting mode is controlled to be the same as the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R, the light emitting pattern data for the frame lamp 66 and the light emitting pattern for the right movable accessory 14R when the right movable accessory 14R is operated. The light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 and the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R may proceed according to the respective light emission pattern data with the data individually, or the right side instead of the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66. The light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 and the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R may proceed according to the light emission pattern data for the movable accessory 14R.

[Combining production of movable characters C]
Next, the combined effect C of the movable accessory will be described with reference to FIG. 106. FIG. 106 is a diagram for explaining the combined effect C of the movable accessory. In the combined effect C of the movable accessory, first, as shown in FIG. 106 (A), the left movable accessory 14L is in a light emitting mode for the left movable accessory, and the retracted position on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (home). While advancing (moving) from the position) toward the advancing position in the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right movable accessory 14R emits light for the right movable accessory (light emission for the left movable accessory). In a light emitting mode different from the mode), the image display device 7 is advanced (moved) from the retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a toward the advanced position in the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. .. At this time, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory, which is exactly the same as the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory 14R. It's different.

The left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R advance (move) toward the advance position (in the direction close to each other) at the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, respectively. As shown in B), at the front (front) center position (advance position (deployment position)) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the ring-shaped decorative portion attached to the tip side of the left movable accessory 14L. The left side decoration part which is half and the right side decoration part which is half of the ring-shaped decoration part attached to the tip side of the right side movable accessory 14R are united, and the left side decoration part and the right side movable part of the left side movable accessory 14L are combined. One decorative member (combined accessory) having an annular shape with the right decorative portion of the accessory 14R is formed.

When the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form a combined accessory having an annular shape, the region formed in the annular shape has a circular shape (a region having a circular shape (). Hereinafter, it is referred to as a “circular region”) 14D. An image expressing emotions is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular region 14D. Here, an image of smiling with wide open eyes is displayed, and then the image is switched to an image of smiling with squinting eyes. By supplementing the circular region 14D of the combined accessory with an image expressing emotions on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the combined accessory can have emotions. As a result, it is possible to realize a variety of productions based on the emotions of the united characters.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 106 (C) and 106 (D), the united accessory tilts from the upper side to the lower side toward the front side (player side), and then returns to the original "nodding (person)". The face is bowing) ”. At this time, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular region 14D, an image expressing emotions is also displayed according to the movement in which the united accessory tilts toward the front side (player side) and returns to the original side. The display mode is such that the facial expression of the combined accessory is also changed three-dimensionally.

After that, as shown in FIG. 106 (E), the left movable accessory 14L is an image display device in a light emitting mode for the left movable accessory in the direction in which the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are separated from each other. The right movable accessory 14R moves to the right while retreating (moving) from the advanced position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of 7 toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The retracted position on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 from the advance position at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the light emission mode for the accessory (light emission mode different from the light emission mode for the left movable accessory). Retreat (move) toward (home position). At this time, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is the same as the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R.

After that, as shown in FIG. 106 (F), the left movable accessory 14L displays the image display device 7 from the advanced position at the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory. When the retreat (movement) is completed toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the screen 7a, the light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L is controlled from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory to the light emitting mode for turning off, and the right side is movable. The display screen of the image display device 7 from the advance position at the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory (light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory). When the retreat (movement) is completed toward the right retracted position (home position) of 7a, the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R is changed from the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory (light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory). The light emission mode is controlled so that the light is turned off. At this time, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is also the same as the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R, and the light emitting mode is turned off from the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory (light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory). Is controlled to.

As described above, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is such that when the right movable accessory 14R is activated (in the period until the right movable accessory 14R advances toward the advance position, retracts, and returns to the home position). Along with this, the light emitting mode is controlled to be the same as the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R. In other words, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is such that when the right movable accessory 14R is activated (in the period until the right movable accessory 14R advances toward the advance position, retreats, and returns to the home position). In conjunction with the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R, the light emitting mode is controlled to be the same as the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R.

The light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L proceeds according to the light emitting pattern data for the left movable accessory 14L defined in the time series, and the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R is the right movable mode defined in the time series. The process proceeds according to the light emission pattern data for the accessory 14R, and the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 proceeds according to the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66 defined in time series. The light emission pattern data for the right movable accessory 14R and the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66 are the same light emission pattern data.

The light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is such that when the right movable accessory 14R is activated (in the period until the right movable accessory 14R advances toward the advance position, retreats, and returns to the home position). Since the light emitting mode is controlled to be the same as the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R, the light emitting pattern data for the frame lamp 66 and the light emitting pattern for the right movable accessory 14R when the right movable accessory 14R is operated. The light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 and the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R may proceed according to the respective light emission pattern data with the data individually, or the right side instead of the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66. The light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 and the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R may proceed according to the light emission pattern data for the movable accessory 14R.

Further, in the combined effect A of the movable accessory in FIG. 104 and the combined effect B of the movable accessory in FIG. 105, the second movable accessory 15 having a rectangular shape with "OARO" written on the front surface is the image display device 7. The clock advances (moves) downward from a stationary state at the upper retracted position (home position) to a position closer to the center (advance position (directing position)) of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The second movable accessory 15 is rotated by a predetermined angle (for example, 30 degrees) in the direction and stopped, and then the second movable accessory 15 rotates counterclockwise at a predetermined angle (for example, 30 degrees) in the light emitting mode for the second movable accessory. ) Rotates and stops, returning to the original horizontal state, and retreating (moving) upward from the advance position (directing position) to the retracted position (home position), whereas the movable accessory shown in FIG. 106 In the combined effect C of the above, there is no effect that the second movable accessory 15 appears on the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. This is the degree of expectation that a jackpot game (big hit effect) will occur when the decorative symbol is executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbol (for example, the period from the start of the variation of the decorative symbol to the stop of the variation). This is because the union effect A is the highest, followed by the union effect B of the movable accessory in FIG. 105, and the union effect C of the movable accessory in FIG. 106 is set to the lowest.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the combined production of movable accessories.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 104 (A) to 104 (H) of FIG. 104 (A) to FIG. 104 (H) of the combined effect A of the movable accessory, the frame lamp 66 (first light emitting means: a plurality of LEDs (many). It is provided with a front frame 53 provided with an LED)) capable of emitting color, and a game board 2 provided with a game area 3 visually recognized through an opening formed in the front frame 53, and various images can be displayed. The left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 that can move to the advancing position (predetermined position) in front of the displayable image display device 7 (display means) and the image display device 7 (display means) and can be combined. And the right movable accessory 14R (plurality of movable members) of the first movable accessory 14 are provided on the game board 2, and the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the right side of the first movable accessory 14 are provided. The movable accessory 14R (plurality of movable members) is provided with a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors), respectively, and the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the first movable accessory 14L. When the right movable accessory 14R (plurality of movable members) of the 1 movable accessory 14 is combined, the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the right movable accessory 14R (plural movable members) of the first movable accessory 14 are combined. Of the members), the light emitting mode and the front of a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) provided on the right movable accessory 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable accessory 14. The light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 (first light emitting means: a plurality of LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors)) provided on the frame 53 is the same as the light emitting mode. According to this configuration, the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the right movable accessory 14R (plurality of movable members) of the first movable accessory 14 can move to the advance position and can be combined. As a result, the player can be visually entertained, and a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: multicolor light emitting) provided on the right movable accessory 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable accessory 14 can be enjoyed. The light emitting mode of the LED) and the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 (first light emitting means: a plurality of LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors)) are the same as the light emitting mode. It can be visually entertaining and can improve the interest. The same applies to the combined effect B of the movable accessory of FIGS. 105 (A) to 105 (G) and the combined effect C of the movable accessory of FIGS. 106 (A) to 106 (F).

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 104 (A) to 104 (H) of FIG. 104 (A) to FIG. 104 (H) of the combined effect A of the movable accessory, the left movable accessory 14L and the first movable accessory 14 of the first movable accessory 14. When the right movable accessory 14R (plurality of movable members) of the movable accessory 14 is combined, the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the right movable accessory 14R (plurality of movable members) of the first movable accessory 14 are combined. ), A plurality of LEDs () provided on the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 (other movable members excluding the right movable accessory 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable accessory 14). Second light emitting means: LED capable of emitting multiple colors) and frame lamp 66 provided on the front frame 53 (first light emitting means: a plurality of LEDs (LED capable of emitting multiple colors)) The light emitting mode is different from that of the above. According to this configuration, the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the right movable accessory 14R (plurality of movable members) of the first movable accessory 14 move to the advance position and are united. It is possible to visually entertain the player, and a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: multicolor light emitting) provided on the right movable accessory 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable accessory 14. The light emitting mode of the LED) capable of emitting light is different from the light emitting mode of a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LED capable of emitting multiple colors) provided on the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14. The light emitting mode can visually entertain the player and improve the interest. The same applies to the combined effect B of the movable accessory of FIGS. 105 (A) to 105 (G) and the combined effect C of the movable accessory of FIGS. 106 (A) to 106 (F).

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 104 (E) to 104 (F) of FIG. 104 (E) to FIG. 104 (F) of the combined effect A of the movable accessory, the left movable accessory 14L and the first movable accessory 14 of the first movable accessory 14. A part of the right movable accessory 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable accessory 14 and the left side of the first movable accessory 14 without being combined with the right movable accessory 14R (plural movable members) of the movable accessory 14. A second movable accessory 15 (non-combined movable member) that can be moved so as to cover one or both of a part of the movable accessory 14L (another movable member) is provided. According to this configuration, the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the right movable accessory 14R (plurality of movable members) of the first movable accessory 14 are newly separated from the second movable accessory. Since the object 15 (non-combined movable member) appears and does not combine with the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the right movable accessory 14R (plural movable members) of the first movable accessory 14, the game It is possible to visually entertain people and improve their interests. The same applies to the combined effect B of the movable accessory of FIGS. 105 (C) to 105 (E).

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 104 (E) to 104 (F) of FIG. 104 (E) to FIG. 104 (F) of the combined effect A of the movable accessory, a plurality of movable accessories 15 (non-combined movable members) are connected. A plurality of LEDs (third light emitting means: LED capable of emitting multicolor light) provided and a plurality of LEDs provided on the second movable accessory 15 (non-combined movable member) (third light emitting means: multicolor light emitting) are provided. When the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the right movable accessory 14R (plurality of movable members) of the first movable accessory 14 are combined, the light emitting mode of the LED) can be the first movable accessory. A plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: multicolor) provided on the right movable accessory 14R (specific movable member) of the object 14 and the left movable accessory 14L (other movable member) of the first movable accessory 14. A light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode of the LED) capable of emitting light and the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 (first light emitting means: a plurality of LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting multicolored light)) provided on the front frame 53. It is designed to be. According to this configuration, the left movable accessory 14L of the combined first movable accessory 14 and the right movable accessory 14R (plurality of movable members) of the first movable accessory 14 are newly separated from the second movable accessory. An object 15 (non-combined movable member) appears, and a plurality of LEDs (third light emitting means: LED capable of emitting multicolored light) provided on the second movable accessory 15 (non-union movable member) emit light. The embodiment is a plurality of LEDs (first movable accessory 14) provided on the right movable accessory 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable accessory 14 and the left movable accessory 14L (other movable member) of the first movable accessory 14. 2. Light emitting means: LED capable of emitting multicolored light) and frame lamp 66 provided on the front frame 53 (first light emitting means: a plurality of LEDs (LED capable of emitting multicolored light)). Since the light emitting mode is different from the light emitting mode, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved. The same applies to the combined effect B of the movable accessory of FIGS. 105 (C) to 105 (E).

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 104 (A) to 104 (H) of FIG. 104 (A) to FIG. 104 (H) of the combined effect A of the movable accessory, the frame lamp 66 (first light emitting) provided in the front frame 53. Means), a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means) provided on the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the right movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14, and the second movable accessory 15. The plurality of LEDs (third light emitting means) provided are LEDs (light emitting means) capable of emitting multiple colors. According to this configuration, the frame lamp 66 (first light emitting means) provided on the front frame 53, the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14, and the right movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14 Since the plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means) provided and the plurality of LEDs (third light emitting means) provided on the second movable accessory 15 can emit light in multiple colors, the player can visually emit light. It can be entertained and can be enjoyed. The same applies to the combined effect B of the movable accessory of FIGS. 105 (A) to 105 (G) and the combined effect C of the movable accessory of FIGS. 106 (A) to 106 (F).

[Effect 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 104 (A) to 104 (H) of FIG. 104 (A) to FIG. 104 (H) of the combined effect A of the movable accessory, the jackpot gaming state (big hit effect) that gives a profit to the player. Before displaying the occurrence on the image display device 7 (display means) (that is, during the variation effect of the decorative symbol (for example, the period from the start of the variation of the decorative symbol to the stop of the variation)), the left side of the first movable accessory 14. The movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R (plurality of movable members) of the first movable accessory 14 can be combined. According to this configuration, before displaying the occurrence of the jackpot game state on the image display device 7 (display means) (during the variation effect of the decorative symbol (for example, the period from the start of the variation of the decorative symbol to the stop of the variation)). , The left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the right movable accessory 14R (plurality of movable members) of the first movable accessory 14 move to the advance position and are combined to have an impact on the player. It is possible to provide a certain effect and visually entertain the player, and it is possible to improve the interest. The same applies to the combined effect B of the movable accessory of FIGS. 105 (A) to 105 (G) and the combined effect C of the movable accessory of FIGS. 106 (A) to 106 (F).

[Effect 7]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 104 (A) to 104 (H) of FIG. 104 (A) to FIG. 104 (H) of the combined effect A of the movable accessory, the jackpot gaming state (big hit effect) that gives a profit to the player is During the period from the generation to the end (that is, during the jackpot production), the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the right movable accessory 14R (plural movable members) of the first movable accessory 14 It can be combined. According to this configuration, the left movable accessory 14L and the first movable accessory 14 of the first movable accessory 14 during the period from the occurrence of the jackpot game state (big hit effect) to the end (during the jackpot effect). By moving the movable accessory 14R (plurality of movable members) on the right side of the above to the advanced position and combining them, it is possible to provide the player with an impactful effect and visually entertain the player. It can be done and the interest can be improved. The same applies to the combined effect B of the movable accessory of FIGS. 105 (A) to 105 (G) and the combined effect C of the movable accessory of FIGS. 106 (A) to 106 (F).

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the combined production of movable accessories.
[Modification 1]
In the combined effect A of the movable accessory of FIG. 104, the combined effect B of the movable accessory of FIG. 105, and the combined effect C of the movable accessory of FIG. 106, the left movable accessory 14L and the first movable of the first movable accessory 14 The right movable accessory 14R (plurality of movable members) of the accessory 14 moved to the advance position and was united. However, any one of the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the right movable accessory 14R (plurality of movable members) of the first movable accessory 14 or all the movable members move to the advance position. You may return to the evacuation position (home position) and move to the advance position again, or reciprocate between the evacuation position (home position) and the advance position, and as a result, you may perform the union effect of the movable accessory that does not coalesce. .. Also in this case, the light emitting mode of the plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) provided on the right movable accessory 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable accessory 14. The light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 (first light emitting means: a plurality of LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors)) is the same as the light emitting mode, and the right movable accessory 14R (specific) of the first movable accessory 14 is used. A plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) provided on the movable member) and a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) provided on the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14. The second light emitting means: the light emitting mode is different from the light emitting mode of the LED) capable of emitting multicolored light. Further, the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the right movable accessory 14R (plurality of movable members) of the first movable accessory 14 reciprocate between the retracted position (home position) and the advanced position, resulting in a result. Even if the second movable accessory 15 (non-combined movable member) newly appears during the combined production of the movable accessory that does not combine with the second movable accessory 15 (non-combined movable member), the second movable accessory 15 (non-combined movable member) The light emitting modes of the plurality of provided LEDs (third light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) are the right movable accessory 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable accessory 14 and the first movable accessory. The light emitting mode of a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) provided on the left movable accessory 14L (another movable member) of the object 14 and the frame provided on the front frame 53. The light emitting mode is different from that of the lamp 66 (first light emitting means: a plurality of LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors)).

[Modification 2]
In the combined effect A of the movable accessory of FIG. 104, the combined effect B of the movable accessory of FIG. 105, and the combined effect C of the movable accessory of FIG. 106, the left movable accessory 14L and the first movable of the first movable accessory 14 Two movable accessories, the right movable accessory 14R of the accessory 14, were moved to the advance position and merged. However, there may be a mode in which three or more movable accessories move to the advance position and are united. In this case, the first movable accessory 14 has a specific movable accessory that has the same emission mode as that of the frame lamp 66 (first light emitting means: a plurality of LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors)). The right movable accessory 14R may be used, or another movable accessory different from the right movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14 may be used, or a movable accessory selected from all the movable accessories may be used. It may be a thing.

[Modification 3]
The left movable accessory 14L and the first movable accessory 14 of the first movable accessory 14 that operate on the combined effect A of the movable accessory of FIG. 104, the combined effect B of the movable accessory of FIG. 105, and the combined effect C of the movable accessory of FIG. 106. When the right movable accessory 14R of the movable accessory 14 is positioned (standby) in the retracted position (home position), the left decorative member that hides the existence of the left movable accessory 14L and the presence of the right movable accessory 14R are displayed. Even if the right side decorative member to be hidden is provided on the game board 2 and the left side decorative member is equipped with a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors, and the right side decorative member is equipped with a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors. Good. In this case, when the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the right movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14 are each positioned (standby) in the retracted position (home position), the first movable accessory 14 A plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) provided on the left movable accessory 14L of the object 14 and the right movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14 are turned off. Even so, it is possible to produce light emission by the left decorative member and the right decorative member by emitting light from a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the left decorative member and the right decorative member, respectively. For example, the light emitting mode of the left side decorative member, the light emitting mode of one or both of the right side decorative members, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66, and the light emitting mode of the second movable accessory 15 are the same. It can be an embodiment.

[Modification example 4]
In the combined effect A of the movable accessory in FIG. 104, the combined effect B of the movable accessory in FIG. 105, and the combined effect C of the movable accessory in FIG. 106, the right movable accessory 14R (specific movable) of the first movable accessory 14 is used. Light emitting mode of a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LED capable of emitting multiple colors) and a frame lamp 66 (first light emitting means: a plurality of LEDs (capable of emitting multiple colors)) provided on the member). The light emitting mode according to the LED)) was the same as the light emitting mode. However, the light emitting mode and the front frame 53 of a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) provided on the right movable accessory 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable accessory 14. While the frame lamp 66 arranged around the left side of the opening of the first movable accessory 14 has the same light emitting mode, a plurality of frames provided on the right movable accessory 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable accessory 14. The light emitting mode of the LED (second light emitting means: LED capable of emitting multicolored light) and the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 arranged around the right side of the opening of the front frame 53 are different from each other. Alternatively, the light emitting mode and the front of a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) provided on the right movable accessory 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable accessory 14. While the frame lamp 66 arranged around the left side of the opening of the frame 53 has a different light emitting mode, the plurality of light emitting modes provided on the right movable accessory 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable accessory 14. The light emitting mode of the LED (second light emitting means: LED capable of emitting multicolored light) and the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 arranged around the right side of the opening of the front frame 53 are the same light emitting mode. You may do it.

[Modification 5]
In the combination effect A of the movable accessory of FIG. 104, the combination effect B of the movable accessory of FIG. 105, and the combination effect C of the movable accessory of FIG. 106, the ring-shaped decoration attached to the tip side of the left movable accessory 14L. The left decorative part, which is half of the part, and the right decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip side of the right movable accessory 14R, are combined to form the left decorative part of the left movable accessory 14L. When one decorative member (combined accessory) having an annular shape with the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R is formed, the combined accessory moves from the upper side to the lower side toward the front side (player side). He was doing a "nodding" (like a person's face bowing) action of tilting and then returning. However, the united accessory may perform a "human face turning left and right" operation in which the left side and the right side are rotated toward the front side (player side) and returned to the original side. .. In this case, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular region 14D has an image in which the eyes are crossed (batten) as an image expressing emotions (see, for example, FIG. 54), which is sad. It may be an image expressing emotions.

[Modification 6]
As a degree of expectation that a jackpot game (big hit effect) will occur when the decorative symbol is executed during the variation effect (for example, the period from the start of the change of the decorative pattern to the stop of the variation), the combined effect A of the movable accessory in FIG. Was the highest, followed by the combined effect B of the movable accessory in FIG. 105, and the combined effect C of the movable accessory in FIG. 106 was set to the lowest. However, in the jackpot game (big hit effect) in which the player is given a profit by combining the movable accessory A in FIG. 104, the movable accessory united effect B in FIG. 105, and the movable accessory united effect C in FIG. 106. It may be executed as a production. It may be executed based on the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 by the player, or may be executed based on the operation (pushing downward) of the sword member 64 by the player. It may be executed based on the operation (pressing operation) of the sword button 65 provided on the upper end portion of the sword member 64 by the player.

[Modification 7]
The light emitting mode for the left movable accessory of the left movable accessory 14L and the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory of the right movable accessory 14R are completely different light emitting modes, and further, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is the right movable accessory. The light emitting mode is exactly the same as that of the object 14R for the right movable accessory, which is different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory of the left movable accessory 14L. However, in the period until the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R operate, advance toward the advance position, retreat, and return to the home position, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory are returned. When the 14R is interlocked with the same light emitting mode, the light emitting mode is different from the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 and the left movable accessory 14L. The left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are interlocked to form the same light emitting mode, for example, the frame lamp 66 lights up in red, blinks, or lights up in gradation, while the frame lamp 66 goes out. Alternatively, the light emitting mode is different from that of the left movable accessory 14L, such as lighting in white or lighting in gradation.

[Modification 8]
In the combined effect A of the movable accessory in FIG. 104, the combined effect B of the movable accessory in FIG. 105, and the combined effect C of the movable accessory in FIG. 106, a part of the described effects may not be provided, and others. The production of is may be added.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect D2-1]
The front frame provided with the first light emitting means and
A display means visually recognizable through the opening formed in the front frame, and
A gaming machine including a plurality of movable members that can be moved to a predetermined position in front of the display means and combined.
A second light emitting means is provided for each of the plurality of movable members.
When the plurality of movable members are combined, a light emitting mode of the second light emitting means provided on a specific movable member among the plurality of movable members and a light emitting mode of the first light emitting means provided on the front frame. Has the same light emission mode,
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-1.
When the plurality of movable members are united, the light emitting mode of the second light emitting means provided on the other movable members other than the specific movable member among the plurality of movable members and the first light emitting mode provided on the front frame. The light emitting mode is different from the light emitting mode of the light emitting means of 1.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-2.
A non-combined movable member that is movable so as to cover one or both of a part of the specific movable member and a part of the other movable member without being combined with the plurality of movable members.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D2-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-3.
A third light emitting means is provided on the non-union movable member.
In the light emitting mode of the third light emitting means provided on the non-union movable member, when the plurality of movable members are united, the second light emission provided on the specific movable member and the other movable member, respectively. The light emitting mode is different from the light emitting mode of the means and the light emitting mode of the first light emitting means provided on the front frame.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D2-1 to D2-4.
The first light emitting means, the second light emitting means, and the third light emitting means are light emitting means capable of multicolor light emitting.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D2-1 to D2-5.
The plurality of movable members can be combined before displaying the occurrence of the hit game effect on the display means.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D2-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D2-1 to D2-5.
The plurality of movable members can be combined in a period from the occurrence of the production of the winning game to the end.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Other variants]
In the various display effects described above, a configuration that does not include a part of the effects or an effect other than the above may be included.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is configured as a so-called type 1 type 2 mixing machine, but the gaming machine 1 may have a configuration other than this. For example, the game machine 1 may be an ST machine, a VST machine, a loop machine, or the like. Further, the above-described embodiment has been described by taking a pachinko gaming machine as an example, but the present embodiment is not limited to this. For example, instead of the pachinko gaming machine, the present invention may be applied to a spinning-type gaming machine such as a slot machine, an arrange ball gaming machine, or a sparrow ball gaming machine. When the game machine 1 is used as a slot machine, the game medium may be changed from a game ball to a game medal.

The game machine 1 of the above embodiment includes the effect button 63 as an operation unit to be operated by the player, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a lever, a trigger, or the like may be used as the operation unit to be operated by the player. .. Further, in the display effect of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display effect may be executed by using the button image representing the effect button 63, but instead of this, the display effect is performed by using the image representing the select button 68. It may be executed, or the display effect may be executed using an image representing a lever or a trigger.

The game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment is a game machine equipped with a payout device for paying out balls, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of the game machine 1, the present invention may be applied to a game machine that is not equipped with a payout device, such as a so-called enclosed game machine.

As shown in FIGS. 59 to 106, the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment uses the image display device 7 to perform various effects. In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, these effects may be combined with each other to form one display effect. That is, two or more production examples and / or modification examples may be combined among the plurality of production examples and / or modification examples described above. Further, the game machine 1 may include a sub display device in addition to the image display device 7 (display screen 7a). Then, at least a part of the display effect performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 may be performed on the display screen of the sub display device.

Although the present embodiment has been described above based on the embodiments and modifications, the embodiments of the above-described embodiments are for facilitating the understanding of the present embodiment and do not limit the present embodiment. This aspect may be modified or improved without departing from its spirit and claims, and this aspect includes its equivalents.

1 ... Game machine 3 ... Game area 5 ... Board lamp 7 ... Image display device 9A, 9B ... Hold image (hold icon)
9C ... The hold image (the hold icon)
14 ... 1st movable accessory 15 ... 2nd movable accessory 20 ... 1st starting port (1st ball entry port)
21 ... 2nd start port (2nd ball entry port)
66 ... Frame lamp 81 ... Game control microcomputer 91 ... Production control microcomputer 101 ... Image control microcomputer

Claims (1)

A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying various images.
It is possible to execute the first effect of displaying a selected image in which one of the plurality of effect modes can be selected on the display means.
Based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, the display of the selected image on the display means by the first effect is prevented.
The first effect is a display mode in which the names of the plurality of effect modes are arranged in a reel shape and rotated and displayed, and one selected effect mode is arranged on the foremost side.
A game machine characterized by that.

Images